Technical Proposal
Technical Proposal
Technical Proposal
Page 2 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
INTRODUCTION
T he Republic of Guinea-Bissau is located at West of Africa. It includes the tropical part and the Bissagos
islands. The tropical part boundaries are the Senegal from North, Guinea from East and the Atlantic Ocean
from South. The Coast is approximately 300 Km Long. Bissau is the capital. The population of Guinea-
Bissau is 1.61 million citizens, 27 tribes which 80% are Balanta, fula, mandingo. The Portuguese is the official
language, and the Creole is a communication language.
Bissau is the capital of Country where 384,000 citizens (2010). The weather is hot all the year, with an average
temperature of 25°C.
The installation of the electrical industry in Guinea-Bissau is weak, the electrical supply is mainly provided by
diesel thermal power station of low production capacity and high operating costs, it doesn’t satisfy the country
electricity demand. For changing this current situation of electricity supply in Guinea-Bissau and improve the
electricity production infrastructure, SINOHYDRO signed on 5 October 2016 at Bissau an MOU with the ministry
of Energy and industry in order to develop hydroelectric projects, solar projects and the re-establishment of
Bissau electricity network. In accordance with MOU conditions, SINOHYDRO did the studies related to the
preparation and the execution of a project of photovoltaic Power plant with capacity 20 MW. During the site visit,
the site of Bor at 8 KM of the West side has been selected for the construction of photovoltaic Power plant with
capacity 20 MW.
.A. CONSTRUCTION has an outstanding track record delivering complex power plants that support Egypt’s
H efforts to meet its growing energy needs. As one of leading contractors in Egypt qualified to bid on power
projects, we have been active partners in the Government’s fast track program ever since its launch in the
late 1980s.
Our prestigious track record in this sector includes more than 10 mega power stations that, combined, have
added more than 6,000 megawatts to the National Grid in the past decade. We deliver all aspects of power-
related construction, exceeding the sector’s demanding criteria with a comprehensive range of services that
include pilling, heavy reinforced concrete structures, steel structures, mechanical works, water intakes,
chimneys and discharges.
Continuing our commitment to providing the full energy solution to the ever-growing energy needs, H. A.
CONSTRUCTION has strategically planned to provide the full EPC, Turn-Key Photovoltaic Power Plant Package to
its local / international customers.
Page 3 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
The principal source of energy supply in Bissau is a Diesel Power Plant is composed of groups of generators
which the majority is malfunction and another 13 groups of 1MW rented to a Senegalese society which are
working normally. In accordance with the declaration of EAGB agents, a capacity of 13MW can satisfy only 1/3 of
the demand which explain the difficulty of electricity supply and justify the partial offloading at rush hours.
Energy Project of OMVG: the dams of Sambagalou and Kaléta supply a part of its energy in Guinea Bissau, with a
quota respectively 14% and 4% which are 18MW and 10MW having an equivalent guaranteed energy 56 million
kWh and 48 million kWh respectively.
Cussselinta and Saltinho Dams Projects: it’s provided that the construction will be on 2023 with installation
capacity respectively 13MW and 14 MW, annual production 115 million kWh and 125 million kWh. This power
stations will be connected to Bra substation.
Thermal Power Station Project: The first phase 15 MW composed of 3 groups of 5MW, the second phase 10 MW
in one group. This power station site is located at approximately 7Km in the South-West of Bissau city center, this
project is in tender stage and will be connected to EAGB Substation at Bissau.
Photovoltaic Power Station Project: As per the development plan of energy sector and in addition to conventional
energies, it’s provided the construction of Photovoltaic Power Station at Bissau which can be connected to the
EAGB substation or Bra substation.
Page 4 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
PLANNING OF ELECTRIC NETWORK AT BISSAU
As per the development plan of energy sector, taking in consideration the provisional high demand scenario, the
maximum consumption at Bissau will reach 49 MW and for the low demand scenario, it will reach 42MW in
accordance with these scenarios the actual production and distribution systems can’t satisfy the demand for
Bissau region alone. The European Funds of Development proposed to rehabilitate the electric network at Bissau,
specially the substation which access is connected to the loop 63kV and at 3 electric sources (substation 63kV
Antula, substation of Bra, EAGB power station). The African Bank of Development (BAD) financed a loop of 30 KV
at Bissau with the three stations of Antula, Bra and EAGB
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The current electrical supply in Guinea Bissau represent 1/3 of the demand, so the government decided to start
a plan to increase the electrical supply through many projects. Hence it was planned to construct a Solar Power
Plant in Bissau with a capacity of 20 MW as a first step.
The short-term plan of the project is to construct a 20 MW solar power plant to be extended to 50 MW as a long-
term plan. The project will be executed in "BOR" located 8 km from Bissau. The site of the project is covered with
vegetation. The geological conditions of the project are suitable for the execution of the project.
Page 5 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
SITE LOCATION
The site where the 20 MW PV Project is to be built with 500 m transmission line in Mafanco 133 km East of Bissau,
the country's capital city
The 30 MW PV Project is to be built with 17 km transmission line located in Bula distant 20 km from the capital
Bissau.
Page 6 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
PROJECT SPECIFIC TECHNICAL DATA
INTERFACES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PV solar plants consist of poly crystalline modules with 330Wp nominal Power,
The distribution of the panels on the area is performed to minimize losses caused by shading considering the sun
minimum inclination.
• Auxiliary Cabin equipped with Aux. transformer, Aux. LV board and UPS.
• Meteo stations.
• SCADA system.
PHOTOVOLTAIC GENERATOR
The photovoltaic generator has been designed and configured based of the Jinko solar EAGLE 72 cells, 330 Wp
(Refer to Module datasheet - Annex 4).
The modules have been subjected to rigorous testing to ensure long term reliability and have been certified in
order to meet the latest safety standards.
Page 7 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
They include an IP67 junction box with a bypass diode that ensures effective protection to prevent the cells from
overheating produced by partial shading. The junction box will be equipped with 1,2 m customized 4 mm 2 output
cables.
The output comes with two Multi‐Contac 4 with 4/6 mm2 connectors. The rated values of the selected solar
module’s main features in standard operating conditions (1,000 W/m2 irradiance, air mass 1,5 and 25°C cell
temperature).
CONVERSION UNIT
The conversion unit is proposed to be either INGECON SUN 1275TL U B460 or ABB central inverter, PVS 980.
Their specifications are listed in the attached Datasheets (Annex 5). All the current and voltage values are in
compliance with the module string design of the PV power plant.
CABLES
The LV route from the generators up to its delivery to the MV transformer runs through different sections of
conductors with different cross‐ sections and characteristics.
The purpose is to measure the conducting lines so that no circuit suffers a voltage drop greater than 4% along its
entire route. These sections are as follows:
o Cu conductor
o Cable 0,6/1,5 kV
• MV cables
• Al conductor
The ground conductor shall be made of minimum section 50 mm2 Cu, which shall run exposed along the
trenches. Its grounding distribution can be seen in the attached plan.
TRENCHES
All the power cable used in the plant will be directly buried underground with no protection, so armature is
required in order to give mechanical protection.
Details on different section and dimension of trenches are attached (Annex 1 – Item 7).
Page 9 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
GROUNDING SYSTEM
The PV plant should be considered as a single generator, so all the metallic part should be connected together in
order to from a single grounding system.
To achieve this goal ground braids are required between structures which are directly in contact with the soil.
The module frame should be in contact with the structure in order to perform continuity.
The ground conductor shall be made of a minimum section 50 mm2 Cu, which shall run exposed along the
trenches. Its grounding distribution can be seen in the attached plan.
All the neutrals of the power transformers will not be connected to ground, making an IT system on the AC side of
the generator.
A ring of minimum section of 95mm2 Aluminum cable is placed around cabins with 2 meters long earth rod at
each corner.
METEO STATION
In order to measure the power plant power ratio at least 2 meteo stations will be implemented in the PV plant
with the following:
The meteo stations will be connected to the monitoring system via RS485/LAN cable and will be equipped with
auxiliary batteries.
Perimeter Protection
Along the perimeter will be placed 14 speed dome cameras and a fix camera. The access gate and the control
room will be also protected.
The video of all cameras will be recorded for 30 days both in the NVR and in the server located in the control
room.
The NPS sensor is part of the NPS system. Each NPS processing unit and each camera will be connected to an
IP66 field station where are placed all the devices able to convert the signals from the NPS sensor and from the
Page 10 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
cameras by the optical fiber that will be the communication channel among all the field station of the plant and
the central control unit (QSVAR) placed in the Control Room.
NPS System
NPS is a security system that has the purpose to detect every attempt of climb over, breach of pressing impact
on a fence. It is installed directly on the nets, both light and heavy, and it consist of two principal components,
the NPS processing unit and the NPS sensor.
The NPS processing unit is a hardware system that has the task to receive the signals from the sensor,
processing them and defining the type of event associating it to an alarm. The accompanying software permits to
manage from remote the configuration, the calibration, the state control and the firmware upload.
The NPS sensor is a linear passive element of piezoelectric type which needs to be installed on the perimeter
fence net through appropriate fastening clamps and has the task to detect the stress to which the net is exposed
and to transmit these signals to the NPS processing unit.
The access gate will be equipped with an armored digital keyboard, to activate/deactivate the alarm system and
allow the access to the authorized staff. The keyboard will be connected to an IP66 field station.
In the control room, the room where the QSVAR is, will be positioned a keyboard for system management, a door
magnetic open/ close detector, and a double technology detector, all devices will be directly connected with the
QSVAR.
To manage the alarm system will be used a 16 Bit central with 128/296 alarm areas, able to receive the signals
from NPS devices, cameras, contacts and keyboards.
The whole system will be totally managed both locally, from the control room and remotely (using internet
connection). The system proposed is also able to send SCS, mail and radio link.
UPS
The alarm system will be equipped with two UPS and a power pack adequately sized to supply enough electricity
for at least 6 hours in case of grid power failure. The UPS will supply energy to all components of the security
system.
• Ensuring the system functioning at 50% in case one of the two UPS fails.
In order to facilitate the inspection of the perimeter and ensure a good view during the night time, a perimeter
lighting system will be provided. It will foresee the use of low-consumption LED lighting projectors, installed on
poles with height of 6 meters above the ground.
Page 11 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
The lighting system is structured into 3 groups of ignitions, the operating mode may be:
• Total scheduled power-on from timer and twilight mode during night time;
• Total scheduled power-on from timer and twilight mode in the night hours by turning off a group after a
specified time;
• Scheduled power on of a group from timer and twilight mode in the night hours;
SCADA SYSTEM
A plant monitoring system will be responsible for communication, data acquisition, monitoring. The installation
will feature the following:
A total system size of 30,294 MW with a central SCADA system depicted in the following picture.
• 18 Inverters in 9 Cabins
• Trackers
• Ethernet communication connecting all transformation centers and the main cabinet.
• Tariff Meters
• Strings
• Weather Stations
Each RTU will integrate communication coming from inverters, weather station ,strings of each sub-field. The
SCADA will integrate communication coming from inverters, weather station, strings, meters, analyzers,
switchgear and auxiliary systems installed in the plants.
In particular the SCADA HMI will display the following information among others:
• Trackers status
Page 12 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• String boxes monitoring of measures and status (for each string)
• Data visualization
• Alarm management
SCADA, through PV Control Panel PLC, will manage the activity of the PV PLANT CONTROLLER to realize the
automatic control on closed loop reactive power and on open loop active power limitation in compliance to grid
requirements:
• Reactive Power
The Plant Monitoring System will integrate the communication with the inverters, strings monitoring, weather
station, switchgears and auxiliary systems to be installed in the plant. It shall perform the following key
functions:
• Plant monitoring
• Trackers status
The data acquisition system communicates with all the following devices installed in the shelters:
• Sensors
• Inverters
• Trackers
• Weather Station
Page 13 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
METERING SYSTEM
The Metering Equipment shall be capable of obtaining and interpreting readings and performing the
adjustments, if required, to provide information concerning Facility Energy Output and Input and shall be
installed, operated and maintained in accordance with the Egyptian Metering Code. The Metering Equipment
shall be part of the PV Facility's control and measurement installations, and the criteria specified below.
The Metering Equipment shall be provided and will be connected to same cores of both CTs and VTs. All meters
shall support minimum two different tariff rates. The Metering Equipment shall comply with the Metering Code
and the Metering Equipment and instrument transformers shall be approved by grid operator.
Page 14 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
GENERAL
• Mobilization of all the temporary facilitates (office containers, diesel generators, etc.) in order to carry out
the Scope of Works detailed below
• Mobilization of all the machinery, equipment (with maintenance records) needed to perform the Scope of
Works
• Providing all necessary equipment for work during night shifts and ensuring that all safety conditions for
such works are considered
• H.A.C is responsible for the mobilization of all the manpower needed to ensure the on-time and correct
installation required in the SoW and deliver and upload complete documentation including medical records
to a centralized software platform – H.A.C shall take all necessary precautions for having availability of
working in sifts, night shift included, and shall prepare the work areas accordingly (generators, mobile
lighting systems, etc.) and will do it according to the both Guinian, Egyptian labor laws
• Providing containers as temporary stores for received materials, tools and equipment
• Maintaining the laydown area and upgrade it if required, for temporary storing of the material supplied by
the client
• Complying with the works schedule and make sure that all necessary machinery will be available for the on-
time and successful completion
• Providing all necessary documents related to the SoW / execution of the mechanical part, in both English
and Arabic.
• H.A.C will be responsible for all transportation required for the successful completion of the works, to and
from the Project Site and inside the Project Site. The Contractor must provide all conformity documents for
all the machinery and vehicles used on the Project Site.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
H.A.C. will provide all the manpower and documentation related to the project management of the works in
accordance with local laws and best engineering practices:
• Project Management
• H.A.C will ensure the good collaboration with the other subcontractors for electrical and mechanical works,
daily work schedules to be agreed between all parties during daily tool-box meetings
• Dispose of all waste created by the activities described in this SOW, according to international standards.
SITE PREPARATION
SITE CLEARANCE
• H.A.C will Survey to established locations, contours, lines, grades datum, control point and related items as
required
• H.A.C will demolish, remove and dump any existing structures within project boundary including, but not
limited to foundations, sumps, boulders, manholes, ditches, block ramps and trenches to the designated
areas for disposal as per the local authorities.
• H.A.C will clean the project site from debris, garbage, surplus, plants and left over unused materials and
dispose off-site at the designated areas for disposal as per the local authorities.
The site will be leveled. The plant roads will connect all the facilities with proper slopes. The below works will be
Performed.
• H.A.C will backfill within project boundary required to accomplish the site platform elevation.
• The roads design will be Gravel roads including 200mm Base Granular material 80% CBR and 350mm. Sub-
Base Granular material 30% CBR. Works including 300mm. Compact subgrade and fill with min. 15% CBR
as per drawings.
Page 16 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
BOUNDARY FENCE AND GATES
H.A.C will supply and install all of the parts required for the 2m high perimeter fencing with a 50 cm high anti-climb
system using three rows of barbed wire. Therefore, the total height is 2.5m. Fence materials will be supplied by
the client.
H.A.C will supply and install all of the parts required for the 2m high perimeter fencing with a 50 cm high anti-climb
system using three rows of barbed wire. Therefore, the total height is 2.5m. Fence materials will be supplied by
the client.
• Distance between support posts: 5.000 mm with bracing at corners and connected to the earth grid.
• Concrete footings for posts C40 (WxLxH: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
• Concrete footings for strain reliefs C40 ((WxLxH: 1000 x 1000 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
H.A.C will install the manual gate which will have the following specifications:
• The mounting posts should not allow the gates to become un-hinged.
• Concrete footings for gate posts C40 (WxLxH: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
H.A.C will install the manual gate which will have the following specifications:
• The mounting posts should not allow the gates to become un-hinged.
• Concrete footings for gate posts C40 (W x L X H: 500 x 500 mm x 800) as per the EN 206 standard
FOUNDATIONS
H.A.C will construct the concrete foundation according to the international and local codes and standards for the
following facilities:
• Inverter Stations
Page 17 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
The concrete will be grade C30.
BUILDINGS
SUPPLY AND FULL INSTALLATION OF PRE-FABRICATED CONTROL BUILDING:
H.A.C will supply and install of all necessary civil work, MEP works, electrical installation, furniture and additional
facilities (fire-detection systems, ventilation, sanitary, etc.).
• Excavation, compaction, installation of subbase layer, forming, blinding, polyethylene sheet, reinforced steel
rebar's, pouring concrete etc.
• Includes attachment inserts into the concrete slab for mounting of the tanks.
• Includes metal ladder for access to the top side of the water tank with platform. installation of pipes &
accessories, supply and install of the protection bollard.
• Excavation, compaction, installation of subbase layer, forming, blinding, polyethylene sheet, reinforced steel
rebar's, pouring concrete etc.
• Includes attachment inserts into the concrete slab for mounting of the tanks.
• Installation of pipes & accessories, supply and install of the protection bollard.
• Backfilling
Page 18 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LV WORKS
CONNECTION OF PV MODULE STRINGS:
• To electrically connect the modules, 30 in series to form the strings by plugging the existing male and
female connectors together. No crimping activities are required since the modules cables have all the
connectors pre-installed.
• Neatly organizing the cables into the module frame utilizing cable clips (cables clips will be supplied by the
Employer), each module will be supplied with 2 cable clips
• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the input from the DC-Bus cable (2x70mm²-Al).
• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the output from the DC underground cable (4x240mm²-Al) in the DC
Switch Box
• H.A.C will crimp lugs and terminate the earthing bare copper cable (1cx35mm²) in the DC Switch Box. The
contractor shall supply Y/G heat shrink and isolate the exposed part of the cable
• H.A.C will supply and crimp cable shoes and terminate the input from the auxiliary power supply cable
(2x5cx6mm²-Cu) in the DC Switch Box
• H.A.C will supply and crimp cable shoes and terminate the output from the auxiliary power supply cable
(3cx2.5mm²-Cu) in the DC Switch Box
• H.A.C will verify all glands are properly sealing the cable entries
• The heat shrink sleeves will be provided for the cable sizes mentioned above. The heat shrink will be blue
and red color. Average length is 20cm per termination.
• Laying direct buried DC Cable in the existing DC trenches, from the DC Switch Box to the Inverters and
through the concrete foundation pad of the inverter station
Page 19 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Trenches construction
• The heat shrink sleeves will be provided for the cable sizes mentioned above. The heat shrink will be blue
and red color. Average length is 20cm per termination.
• Install them directly buried along DC, MV, CCTV and in grounding trenches with all fittings and conforming to
IEC and local standards.
• Terminate each end of 1Cx35mm² bare copper cable to each end of mounting structure, DC Switch Box,
fence post, by exothermic-welding connections and terminate end of the cable to Inverter Station.
• H.A.C will supply the bare copper cable and lugs, and all required exothermic-welding connections and
materials
GROUNDING RODS:
• H.A.C will supply / Install the copper grounding rods with a minimum diameter of 14.3 mm and a minimum
length of 3m.
• H.A.C will supply / Install the rods buried to a depth of minimum 3 meter
• H.A.C will supply / install of earthing pit with cover for each ground rod (400x400mm)
• H.A.C will supply / install Mounting Table Jumpers by using fastener sets between the mounting tables
• H.A.C will supply / install Mounting Table Jumpers (1x35mm² Cu Y/G) with cable lugs, in addition to
stainless steel fastener sets
• H.A.C will supply / install lightning protection system with all necessary components in accordance with local
requirements and as per provided drawings.
Page 20 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Lightning protection system per set shall include but is not limited to the following:
o Air terminals with mounting accessories
o All termination lugs and fasteners for connecting the items mentioned above
SUPPORT BRACKETS:
• H.A.C will supply / install the support brackets on the posts of the trackers which will be prepared for that
purpose using the provided fasteners. Therefore, the Contractor shall not consider any drilling activities on
the posts.
SADDLE CLAMPS
• H.A.C will supply / install the saddle clamps on the support bracket item (5.1). The Contractor shall tension
the turn buckle to required value
• H.A.C will lift the steel rope and install the steel rope on the installed brackets.
The steel rope will be 6mm diameter. The length of each section will be 45m in average. The steel rope shall be
secured to the using saddle clamps and using turnbuckles.
• H.A.C will supply all fasteners for securing the steel rope to the brackets.
THE HANGERS
• H.A.C will supply / install the hangers on the steel rope after finishing the previous-mentioned items
Page 21 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LAYING DC-BUS CABLE TYPE-2 (95mm²) IN THE HANGERS: (Please Refer to DC Cable Management System)
This item considers laying 2 DC-Bus Cables (positive and negative) in each hanger.
MONITORING SYSTEM
H.A.C will supply the Central Monitoring Rack and install it at the Control Building. The work includes the
• electrical and communication connection of the rack.
• The Central Monitoring Rack will include the following equipment (or equivalent) but is not limited to:
o 1 - Electrical leading RACK 19in 1U 9 Plugs 1 - Patch Panel Cat 5e UTP 48 ports
Page 22 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
o 1 - Modbus RTU / TCP converter: MOXA, MGate MB3280
• H.A.C will supply / install the Main Control Units at the Inverter Stations.
• H.A.C will supply the necessary mechanical attachments to install this equipment at the Inverter Stations.
• H.A.C will supply / install the Power Plant Controller at the Control Building.
• H.A.C will:
o Perform the electrical and communication connection of the Power Plant Controller with the network.
o Including supporting Inverter Supplier for the commissioning of the Power Plant controller
WEATHER STATION:
• This work includes the installation of the following cables and equipment:
o Laying and termination of 30 m LV power cabling type 3cx4mm² 0.6/1kV for the power supply to
Meteorological Station,
o I/O module
o Power supply.
H.A.C will supply and install all required SS PVC quoted cable ties and cable shoes
• H.A.C will supply / install the RS 485 2x2x22 AWG type FTP with twisted/screened pairs communication
cables to connect to the modules
• H.A.C will terminate the communication cables in the Main Control Units and in the trackers motors control
units. Each Unit is one connection; therefore, a single cable has 2 connections at the start and the end of
each cable.
INSTALLATION OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES BETWEEN INVERTER STATIONS/ FROM INVERTER STATIONS TO CONTROL
BUILDING:
• H.A.C will supply / install the armored Optical Fiber, Multi-mode, 50/125, 12 fibers cables and they will be
buried directly.
• H.A.C will supply the required connectors and perform the splicing works
CONNECTION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING OF THE MONITORING SYSTEM AT THE INVERTER STATIONS AND
CONTROL BUILDING:
• H.A.C will provide test report for each connector of the Fiber optic cables. These tests must be performed by
a certified party for these tests
• Ensure connectivity of all related equipment to the communication infrastructure within the Inverter Stations
and the Control Building
• Support monitoring system supplier in pre-commissioning activities to ensure the operation of the system
and correct installation
SECURITY SYSTEM
LAYING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES FOR SECURITY SYSTEM:
• H.A.C will supply / install the armored Optical Fiber, Multi-mode, 50/125 fiber optic cables in the trenches.
Page 24 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LAYING AND TERMINATION OF POWER SUPPLY CABLES FOR THE CAMERA NETWORK:
• H.A.C will supply / install the LV power supply cables 3cx2.5mm² 0.6/1kV and relevant crimp cable shoes
• H.A.C will supply / install thermal Camera 35 mm or similar to cover the perimeter, including all necessary
equipment according to drawings.
• H.A.C will supply / install the Security Dome Cameras to cover all the input with IR night vision mode system
including all necessary equipment.
• H.A.C will supply / install the thermal and dome cameras security switch board to the post of the camera
including all necessary equipment.
• H.A.C will supply / install the security posts (4m in height) for the cameras. This activity includes all the
necessary equipment including the concrete foundation (300x300x750mm) with 4 No. M16 mounting bolts.
• H.A.C will supply / install the Ethernet cables, power supply cables, conduits, and cable ties:
• Fix 3m conduit to post including 90° elbow if required using SS PVC quoted cable ties.
• Lay and connect 3m pre-crimped Ethernet cable from Switch Board to Camera through conduit
• Lay and connect 3m power cable 3Cx2.5mm² cable from Switch Board to Camera through conduit for the
o PTZ Controller
Page 25 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTER STATIONS
• H.A.C will unload and place the inverter station on the foundation using a crane and following the
installation manual instruction
o 1x Medium Voltage skid preassembled by supplier with: 2x MV transformer, 2x AUX transformer, RMU, LV
Panel.
TYPE MATERIAL
INSTALLATION OF MV TERMINALS:
H.A.C will supply / install MV termination kit suitable for (185/300/630) mm² cables in MV Switchgear (Inverter
Stations and substation); each termination is considered to be 1 cable end and 1 phase only
INSTALLATION OF MV JOINTS:
H.A.C will supply / install MV Joints suitable for (185/300/630) mm² cables in MV Switchgear (Inverter Stations
and substation); each termination is considered to be 1 cable end and 1 phase only
• Unload the MV Main Switchgear Package Unit at its final location and place on concrete foundations
• Install the MV Ring Main Unit on the dedicated foundation next to the Control Room.
Page 26 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
INSTALLATION OF MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer:
H.A.C will perform the following activities to install the MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer and the Auxiliary Distribution
Board in the Control Room:
• Supply / install the 60kVA MV/LV Auxiliary Transformer on the dedicated foundation next to the Control
Room.
TRENCHES
MECHANICAL EXCAVATION OF MV / DC TRENCHES:
H.A.C will execute these trenches in accordance with the following:
o Soil Thermal Resistivity of Replacement Soil: 2 W/m. K, at maximum moisture content of 2% or less at
90% Compaction.
• Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil according to the drawings. Rock particles larger than 150 mm
shall be removed prior to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless
otherwise specified.
• The cable routes must be marked by concrete blocks clearly indicating voltage and cable type at every 50
meters.
Page 27 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• All works should be performed according to IEC and Local Standards.
MECHANICAL EXCAVATION OF EARTHING TRENCHES
o Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil according to the drawings. Rock particles larger than 150
mm shall be removed prior to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless
otherwise specified.
• All works should be performed according to IEC and Local Standards. The Contractor shall supply the
warning tape
o Backfilling the trench with the excavated soil Rock particles larger than 150 mm shall be removed prior
to compaction of the fill. The excavation works shall be completely dry, unless otherwise specified.
CONDUITS INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION DIRECTLY IN THE GROUND
• H.A.C will supply / install the conduit along with elbows, joints and supplementary material.
Page 28 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
LABELLING
• H.A.C will supply / install all electrical equipment and cables’ labels.
COMMISSIONING
PRE-COMMISSIONING:
• H.A.C will perform pre-commissioning works which includes but is not limited to the following:
o Checking system integrity, compliance with technical specifications, electrical terminals torque and
marking of the correct torque position, visuals inspections, etc.
COMMISSIONING:
o The final commissioning and the pre-commissioning will be performed by H.A.C, with / without the
assistance of a Subcontractor of 3rd Party
SURVEYING WORKS
• H.A.C will:
o Find best solution to mark the correct location of the trenches, foundations, manholes and any other
electrical installation works which might require the marking. Refer to the general and electrical layout
for further information.
o Any tools or material needed like steel or plastic sticks to place the marks shall be provided during
surveying works.
o H.A.C will provide all calibration certificates of surveying equipment prior to performing the works
o H.A.C will provide a permanent land surveyor for the duration of the civil activities, and as many land
surveyors as necessary for the on- time, as per schedule completion of the works. All progress reports will
contain the land surveyor's measurements attached.
Page 29 of 44
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
• Hot-dip galvanized steel piles, Aluminum support beams, complete with support poles, longitudinal support
structure, including every part of assembly to the foundation.
• Height above ground 1.40 m S275JR steel - hot-dip galvanized according to ISO1461:2009
Page 30 of 44
_____________________________________________________________________ __________________
Page 31 of 44
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 2 of 18
Index
GeneralOverviewfortheStandards ...................................................................................................................... 3
PVModules ........................................................................................................................................................... 3
Inverters ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Transformer .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
Cables .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Metering .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
General ................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Safety ....................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Components ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 3 of 18
GeneralOverviewfortheStandards
The following table summarizes available local standards for main components of PV power
generation systems as well as related international standards.
PVModules
(notes): ___
IEC 62817 Photovoltaic systems - Design qualification of solar IEC 62817:2014 is a design qualification standard
trackers applicable to solar trackers for photovoltaic systems, but
may be used for trackers in other solar applications. The
standard defines test procedures for both key
components and for the complete tracker system. In some
cases, test procedures describe methods to measure
and/or calculate parameters to be reported in the defined
tracker specification sheet. In other cases, the test
procedure results in a pass/fail criterion. This standard
ensures the user of the said tracker that parameters
reported in the specification sheet were measured by
consistent and accepted industry procedures. The tests
with pass/fail criteria are engineered with the purpose of
separating tracker designs that are likely to have early
failures from those designs that are sound and suitable for
use as specified by the manufacturer.
IEC 62790 Junction boxes for photovoltaic modules - Safety IEC 62790:2014 describes safety requirements,
requirements and tests constructional requirements and tests for junction boxes
up to 1 500 V dc for use on photovoltaic modules
according to class II of IEC 61140:2001. This standard
applies also to enclosures mounted on PV-modules
containing electronic circuits for converting, controlling,
monitoring or similar operations.
IEC TS 62727 Photovoltaic systems - Specification for solar IEC/TS 62727:2012(E) provides guidelines for the
trackers parameters to be specified for solar trackers for
photovoltaic systems and provides recommendations for
measurement techniques. The purpose of this test
specification is to define the performance characteristics
of trackers and describe the methods to calculate and/or
measure critical parameters. This specification provides
industry-wide definitions and parameters for solar
trackers.
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 4 of 18
IEC 62548 Photovoltaic (PV) arrays - Design requirements IEC/TS 62548:2013(E) sets out design requirements for
photovoltaic (PV) arrays including d.c. array wiring,
electrical protection devices, switching and earthing
provisions. The scope includes all parts of the PV array up
to but not including energy storage devices, power
conversion equipment or loads. The object of this
Technical Specification is to address the design safety
requirements arising from the particular characteristics of
photovoltaic systems.
IEC 61730 Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification IEC 61730-1:2004+A1:2011+A2:2013 Describes the
Part 1: Requirements for construction fundamental construction requirements for photovoltaic
Part 2: Requirements for testing modules in order to provide safe electrical and mechanical
operation during their expected lifetime. Addresses the
prevention of electrical shock, fire hazards, and personal
injury due to mechanical and environmental stresses.
Pertains to the particular requirements of construction
and is to be used in conjunction with IEC 61215 or IEC
61646. This consolidated version consists of the first
edition (2004), its amendment 1 (2011) and its
amendment 2 (2013). Therefore, no need to order
amendments in addition to this publication.
IEC 61724 Photovoltaic system performance monitoring - Recommends procedures for the monitoring of energy-
Guidelines for measurement, data exchange and related photovoltaic (PV) system characteristics, and for
analysis the exchange and analysis of monitored data. The purpose
is the assessment of the overall performance of PV
systems.
IEC 61683 Photovoltaic systems - Power conditioners - Describes guidelines for measuring the efficiency of power
Procedure for measuring efficiency conditioners used in stand-alone and utility-interactive
photovoltaic systems, where the output of the power
conditioner is a stable a.c. voltage of constant frequency
or a stable d.c. voltage.
IEC 61345 UV test for photovoltaic (PV) modules Determines the ability of a photovoltaic module to
withstand exposure to ultra-violet (UV) radiation from 280
nm to 400 nm.
IEC 61215 Terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design IEC 61215-1:2016 lays down requirements for the design
qualification and type approval qualification and type approval of terrestrial photovoltaic
Part 1: Test requirements (PV) modules suitable for long-term operation in general
open-air climates, as defined in IEC 60721-2-1. This
Part 1-1: Special requirements for testing of
standard is intended to apply to all terrestrial flat plate
crystalline silicon photovoltaic (PV) modules
module materials such as crystalline silicon module types
Part 2: Test procedures as well as thin-film modules. The objective of this test
sequence is to determine the electrical and thermal
characteristics of the module and to show, as far as
possible within reasonable constraints of cost and time,
that the module is capable of withstanding prolonged
exposure in climates described in the scope. This edition
of IEC 61215-1 includes the following significant technical
changes with respect to the second edition of IEC
61215:2005: new standard series structure consistent
with other IEC standards: Part 1 lists general
requirements, Part 1-x specifics for each PV technology
and Part 2 defines testing. All tests defined in Part 2 are
MQTs (module quality tests).
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 5 of 18
IEC 60904 Photovoltaic devices Describes procedures for the measurement of current-
Part 1: Measurement of photovoltaic current-voltage voltage characteristics of photovoltaic devices in natural
characteristics or simulated sunlight. Lays down basic requirements for
the measurement, defines procedures for different
measuring techniques in use and shows practices for
minimising measurement uncertainty.
IEC 60891 Photovoltaic devices - Procedures for temperature IEC 60891:2009 defines procedures to be followed for
and irradiance corrections to measured I-V temperature and irradiance corrections to the measured I-
characteristics V (current-voltage) characteristics of photovoltaic devices.
It also defines the procedures used to determine factors
relevant for these corrections. Requirements for I-V
measurement of photovoltaic devices are laid down in IEC
60904-1.
IEC 60870-1 Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 1: General Section one: Specifies classes for environmental
considerations. conditions under which telecontrol equipment has to
Section One: General principles operate. Gives an overall view of the functional elements
contributing to basic structures and to the choice of
Section Two: General principles
telecontrol system configurations. It deals with functions
which are typical for any process to be monitored and
controlled but emphasizes the specific problems which
characterize geographically widespread processes, such as
the dominant influence of telecommunications links with
restricted bandwidth and often low signal-to-noise ratio.
However, this report serves only as an introduction to the
detailed standards and recommendations laid down in
Parts 2-5 of IEC 60870.
Section Two: Presents guidelines but not standards for
establishing specifications for telecontrol systems and
equipment following the other IEC standards on
telecontrol systems and other relevant international
standards and recommendations such as CCITT
recommendations. Also facilitates the comparison of
equipment produced by different manufacturers.
IEC 60870-5 Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: IEC 60870-5-101:2003+A1:2015 Applies to telecontrol
Transmission protocols equipment and systems with coded bit serial data
Part 5-101: Transmission protocols - Companion transmission for monitoring and controlling geographically
widespread processes. Defines a telecontrol companion
standard for basic telecontrol tasks
standard that enables interoperability among compatible
telecontrol equipment. The defined telecontrol
companion standard utilizes standards of the IEC 60870-5
series of documents.
IEC 60364-1 Low-voltage electrical installations Fundamental principles, assessment of general
characteristics, definitions
IEC 60364-7 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 7-712: Apply to the electrical installations of PV power supply
Requirements for special installations or locations - systems including systems with AC modules.
Solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 6 of 18
IEC/TR 61850 Communication networks and systems for power IEC/TR 61850-1:2013 is applicable to power utility
utility automation automation systems and defines the communication
Part 1: Introduction and overview between intelligent electronic devices in such a system,
and the related system requirements. This part gives an
Part 3: General requirements
introduction and overview of the IEC 61850 standard
Part 4: System and project management
series.
IEC 61850-3:2013 defines the general requirements,
mainly regarding construction, design and environmental
conditions for utility communication and automation IEDs
(intelligent electronic devices) and systems in power plant
and substation environments. These general requirements
are in line with requirements for IEDs used in similar
environments, for example measuring relays and
protection equipment.
IEC 61850-4:2011 applies to projects associated with
process near automation systems of power utilities (UAS,
utility automation system), like e.g. substation automation
systems (SAS). It defines the system and project
management for UAS systems with communication
between intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) in the
substation respective plant and the related system
requirements.
PAGE
Guinea-Bissau 7 of 18
Inverters
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 8 of 18
Transformer
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 9 of 18
Guinea-Bissau 10 of 18
Cables
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 11 of 18
Metering
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 12 of 18
Monitoring
(notes): ___
General
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 13 of 18
Guinea-Bissau 14 of 18
Guinea-Bissau 15 of 18
Safety
(notes): ___
Guinea-Bissau 16 of 18
Guinea-Bissau 17 of 18
Guinea-Bissau 18 of 18
Components
(notes): ___
2. STAGING PLAN
5. ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
6. GROUNDING SYSTEM
7. TRENCHES
Page 32 of 44
24
330
330
72,728
BIDDER
Staging Plan
BIDDER
BIDDER
BIDDER
24
330
330
72,728
ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 3: PROCUREMENT PLAN
Procurement Plan
S.N. Equipment Brand Product Warranty period
Ja Solar
Jinko
Back to back warranty – 10-year product
1 Module Risen and 25-year performance
Talesun
Chint
ABB
Ingeteam
Santerno
GE
Pelco
7 CCTV SYSTEM 2 years
American-Dynamics
MET One
8 Meteo Station 2 years
Stevens
Page 33 of 44
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 34 of 44
www.jinkosolar.com
Eagle 72P-V
320-340 Watt (5BB)
POLY CRYSTALLINE MODULE
Positive power tolerance of 0~+3%
KEY FEATURES
System Voltage:
The maximum voltage is promoted to 1500V and the module strings
are extended by 50% which reduces the overall system BOS.
PID RESISTANT:
Eagle modules pass PID test, limited power degradation by PID test is
PID RESISTANT
guaranteed for mass production.
Low-light Performance:
Advanced glass and surface texturing allow for excellent performance in
LOW LIGHT
low-light environments.
Temperature Coefficient:
CLIMATE
Improved temperature coefficient decreases power loss during high
DURABILITY
temperatures.
80.7%
years
1 5 12 25
Engineering Drawings Electrical Performance & Temperature Dependence
992 40 942
Current-Voltage & Power-Voltage Temperature Dependence
Junction box Curves (325W) of Isc,Voc,Pmax
100
Label
300
10
L
1956
4
Ø
2- 250
1360
860
8
Grounding Holes
200 Isc
6
150 Voc
4 Pmax
Cathode - + Anode 100
Connector
A A
2 50
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Mechanical Characteristics
+0.2
0
4.9
9 5.5
1.5
55 CellType Poly-crystalline156×156mm(6inch)
40
5
4.
3
+0.3
7.70
8
No.ofcells 72(6×12)
55
1.5
14
1.8
Dimensions 1956×992×40mm(77.01×39.05×1.57inch)
35
Weight 22.5kg(49.6lbs.)
FrontGlass 3.2mm,Anti-ReflectionCoating,
HighTransmission,LowIron,TemperedGlass
Packaging Configuration Frame AnodizedAluminiumAlloy
(Twopallets=Onestack) JunctionBox IP67Rated
26pcs/pallet,52pcs/stack,624pcs/40'HQContainer OutputCables TÜV1×4.0mm2,Length:1200mmorCustomizedLength
SPECIFICATIONS
STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT STC NOCT
MaximumPower(Pmax) 320Wp 237Wp 325Wp 241Wp 330Wp 245Wp 335Wp 249Wp 340Wp 253Wp
MaximumPowerVoltage(Vmp) 37.4V 34.7V 37.6V 35.0V 37.8V 35.3V 38.0V 35.6V 38.2V 35.9V
MaximumPowerCurrent(Imp) 8.56A 6.83A 8.66A 6.89A 8.74A 6.94A 8.82A 6.99A 8.91A 7.05A
Open-circuitVoltage(Voc) 46.4V 43.0V 46.7V 43.3V 46.9V 43.6V 47.2V 43.8V 47.5V 44.0V
Short-circuitCurrent(Isc) 9.05A 7.35A 9.10A 7.40A 9.14A 7.45A 9.18A 7.52A 9.22A 7.98A
OperatingTemperature(℃) -40℃~+85℃
Maximumseriesfuserating 20A
Powertolerance 0~+3%
TemperaturecoefficientsofPmax -0.40%/℃
TemperaturecoefficientsofVoc -0.31%/℃
TemperaturecoefficientsofIsc 0.06%/℃
Nominaloperatingcelltemperature(NOCT) 45±2℃
* Powermeasurementtolerance:±3%
The company reserves the final right for explanation on any of the information presented hereby. EN-JKM-340PP-72-V_rev2017
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
1. INVERTERS
2. POWER TRANSFORMER
Page 35 of 44
SUN PowerMax U B Series
1,000 Vdc
UL 1741
COMPLIANT
www.ingeteam.com
solar.us@ingeteam.com
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc
Integrated combiner box with DC isolators. Insulation failure AC. Higher power density.
DC Reverse polarity. Grounding kit. Latest generation electronics.
Short-circuits and overloads at the output. Heating kit, for operating at an ambient More efficient electronic protection.
Anti-islanding with automatic disconnection. temperature of down to -22 ºF. Night time supply to communicate
Insulation failure DC. DC fuses. with the inverter at night.
Up to 15 pairs of fuse holders. Lightning induced DC surge arresters, type I+II. Enhanced performance.
Lightning induced DC and AC surge arrestors, Monitoring of the group currents at the DC input. Easier maintenance thanks to its
type II. Extendable up to 15 fuse holders per inverter. new design and enclosure.
PowerMax B Series
+12
...
+3
+2 Inverter
+1 L1 AC output for
Filter
L2 connection to a
-1 L3 MV network
-2
-3 M M
...
-12
Optional
Size and weight (inches and Ibs) 610TL U B220 / 830TL U B300 /
1000TL U B360 / 1110TL U B400 /
1165TL U B420
3,440 pounds
89”
11
1”
”
35
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc
610TL U B220 830TL U B300 1000TL U B360 1110TL U B400 1140TL U B410
Input (DC)
Recommended PV array power range(1) 618.4 - 792.6 kWp 775.8 - 994.4 kWp 1,011.9 - 1,297 kWp 1,034.3 - 1,325.7 kWp 1,150 - 1,477 kWp
Voltage Range MPP(2) 440 - 820 V 440 - 820 V 524 - 820 V 580 - 820 V 595 - 820 V
Maximum voltage(3) 1,050 V
Maximum current 2,000 A
Nº inputs with fuse-holders 5 up to 12 (up to 15 if the combiner box is not integrated)
Fuse dimensions 63 A / 1,000 V to 630 A / 1,000 V fuses (optional)
Type of connection Connection to copper bars
Power blocks 1
MPPT 1
Input protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters (type I+II optional)
DC switch Motorized DC load break disconnect
Other protections Up to 15 pairs of DC fuses (optional) / Reverse polarity / Insulation failure monitoring / Anti-islanding protection / Emergency pushbutton
Output (AC)
Power @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 609.7 kVA / 560.9 kVA 831.4 kVA / 764.9 kVA 997.7 kVA / 917.8 kVA 1,108.5 kVA / 1,019.8 kVA 1,136 kVA / 1,046 kVA
Current @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,600 A / 1,472 A
Rated voltage 220 V IT System 300 V IT System 360 V IT System 400 V IT System 410 V IT System
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Power Factor(5) 1
Power Factor adjustable Yes, 0-1 (leading / lagging)
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)(6) <3%
Output protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters
AC breaker Motorized AC circuit breaker
Anti-islanding protection Yes, with automatic disconnection
Other protections AC short-circuits and overloads
Features
Maximum efficiency 98.9%
CEC 98.5%
Max. consumption aux. services 4,250 W
Stand-by or night consumption(7) 60 W
General Information
Ambient temperature -4 ºF to +140 ºF
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 0-100%
Protection class NEMA 3R (NEMA 3 with the sand trap kit)
Maximum altitude 14,770 ft (for installations beyond 3,300 ft, please contact Ingeteam’s solar sales department)
Cooling system Air forced with temperature control (230 V phase+ neutral power supply)
Air flow range 0 - 78 ft3/s (0 - 7,800 m3/h)
Average air flow 42 ft /s (4,200 m3/h per power block)
3
Notes: (1) Depending on the type of installation and geographical location. Data for Efficiency INGECON® SUN 1165TL U B420 Vdc = 650 V
STC conditions (2) Vmpp.min is for rated conditions (Vac=1 p.u. and Power Factor=1) 99,00
(3)
Consider the voltage increase of the ‘VOC’ at low temperatures (4) With the sand trap kit,
these values will be for 89.6 ºF and 116.6 ºF, respectively (5) For Pout >25% of the rated 98,00
power (6) For Pout >25% of the rated power and voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-3-4 97,00
Efficiency (%)
(7)
Consumption from PV field when there is PV power available.
96,00
Vdc = 610 Vdc
95,00
Vdc = 705 Vdc
94,00 Vdc = 740 Vdc
93,00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Power (kVA)
SUN PowerMax U B Series 1,000 Vdc
1165TL U B420 1190TL U B430 1220TL U B440 1250TL U B450 1275TL U B460
Input (DC)
Recommended PV array power range(1) 1,084.9 - 1,392 kWp 1,206 - 1,549 kWp 1,234 - 1,585 kWp 1,262 - 1,621 kWp 1,290 - 1,657 kWp
Voltage Range MPP(2) 610 - 820 V 623.5 - 820 V 638 - 820 V 652 - 820 V 666 - 820 V
Maximum voltage(3) 1,050 V
Maximum current 2,000 A
Nº inputs with fuse-holders 5 up to 12 (up to 15 if the combiner box is not integrated)
Fuse dimensions 63 A / 1,000 V to 630 A / 1,000 V fuses (optional)
Type of connection Connection to copper bars
Power blocks 1
MPPT 1
Input protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters (type I+II optional)
DC switch Motorized DC load break disconnect
Other protections Up to 15 pairs of DC fuses (optional) / Reverse polarity / Insulation failure monitoring / Anti-islanding protection / Emergency pushbutton
Output (AC)
Power @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,163.9 kVA / 1,070.8 kVA 1,192 kVA / 1,097 kVA 1,217 kVA / 1,122 kVA 1,247 kVA / 1,147 kVA 1,275 kVA / 1,173 kVA
Current @95 ºF / @122 ºF(4) 1,600 A / 1,472 A
Rated voltage 420 V IT System 430 V IT System 440 V IT System 450 V IT System 460 V IT System
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Power Factor(5) 1
Power Factor adjustable Yes, 0-1 (leading / lagging)
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)(6) <3%
Output protections
Overvoltage protections Type II surge arresters
AC breaker Motorized AC circuit breaker
Anti-islanding protection Yes, with automatic disconnection
Other protections AC short-circuits and overloads
Features
Maximum efficiency 98.9%
CEC 98.5%
Max. consumption aux. services 4,250 W
Stand-by or night consumption(7) 60 W
General Information
Ambient temperature -4 ºF to +140 ºF
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 0-100%
Protection class NEMA 3R (NEMA 3 with the sand trap kit)
Maximum altitude 14,770 ft (for installations beyond 3,300 ft, please contact Ingeteam’s solar sales department)
Cooling system Air forced with temperature control (230 V phase+ neutral power supply)
Air flow range 0 - 78 ft3/s (0 - 7,800 m3/h)
Average air flow 42 ft /s (4,200 m3/h per power block)
3
Notes: (1) Depending on the type of installation and geographical location. Data for Efficiency INGECON® SUN 1165TL U B420 Vdc = 650 V
STC conditions (2) Vmpp.min is for rated conditions (Vac=1 p.u. and Power Factor=1) 99,00
(3)
Consider the voltage increase of the ‘VOC’ at low temperatures (4) With the sand trap kit,
these values will be for 89.6 ºF and 116.6 ºF, respectively (5) For Pout >25% of the rated 98,00
power (6) For Pout >25% of the rated power and voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-3-4 97,00
Efficiency (%)
(7)
Consumption from PV field when there is PV power available.
96,00
Vdc = 610 Vdc
95,00
Vdc = 705 Vdc
94,00 Vdc = 740 Vdc
93,00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Power (kVA)
—
SOL AR INVERTERS
—
02
—
Maximum energy revenues
— ABB central inverters have a high total efficiency. Versatile design for large-scale PV plants
02 ABB medium
voltage pad mounted Precise, optimized system control and maximum to minimize system costs
solution, PVS980-MVP, power point tracking (MPPT) combine with the ABB’s PVS980 central inverter enables system
installed on site
unit’s highly efficient power converter design to integrators to design PV power plants that use the
deliver the maximum energy from the PV modules optimum combination of inverters with different
to the power distribution network. For end users, power ratings. Equipped with extensive electrical
this generates the highest possible revenues and mechanical protection, the inverters are
from the energy sales. engineered to provide a long and reliable
service life of at least 25 years.
Self-contained, low-maintenance
cooling system Advanced grid support features
PVS980 inverters feature a proven closed loop The PVS980 software includes all the latest grid
cooling system used in other ABB industrial support and monitoring features, including active
applications. This innovative, truly low-maintenance power limitation, fault ride through (FRT) with
cooling solution is designed for demanding current feed-in and reactive power control.
applications and harsh environments, cutting Active and reactive power output can be controlled
maintenance costs and ensuring outstanding by an external control system or automatically by
endurance. the inverter.
Compact and modular design All grid support functions are parameterized,
PVS980 inverters are designed for fast and easy allowing easy adjusting for local utility
installation. The industrial design and modular requirements. ABB central inverters are also able
platform provide a wide range of options, such as to support grid stability at night by providing
remote monitoring, fieldbus connection and reactive power with the DC input disconnected.
modular and flexible DC input connections.
The integrated DC saves space and costs as the
solar array junction boxes can be connected
directly to the fused busbars in the DC cabinet.
PVS980 inverters are customized for the needs
of end users and will be available with short
delivery times.
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S
—
ABB central inverters
PVS980 – 1818 to 2091 kVA
Outstanding endurance for outdoor use Versatile design for largescale PV plants
• Water- and dustproof outdoor enclosure • Integrated DC connection with variable number
• Designed to withstand the toughest of inputs
environments • Wide standard option palette for tailoring
• Long and reliable service life following the • Versatile AC connection methods
ABB life cycle model
—
ABB central inverters
PVS980 – 1818 to 2091 kVA
—
Technical data and types
1)
DC/AC ratio over 1.6 might decrease maintenance intervals 6)
At nominal power
2)
As standard 7)
Inverter side must be IT type
3)
At 35 °C 8)
Without auxiliary power consumption at min U DC
4)
At 50 °C 9)
With auxiliary power included
5)
±10% 10)
Internal as option
P R O D U C T F LY E R F O R P V S 9 8 0 A B B S O L A R I N V E R T E R S
—
ABB PVS980 central inverter block diagram
PVS980-58-2000kVA-K
Filter
filter
filter
EMC
EMC
3
Control
and
monitor
PVS980-58-2000kVA-K
Filter
filter
filter
EMC
EMC
3
Control
and
monitor
—
Technical data and types
11)
Excluding underpressure testing, IP56 with underpressure 16)
More communication options as engineered option
12)
-40 °C as option 17)
Additional certifications and approvals pending,
13)
Power derating after 50 °C contact ABB for more information
14)
Power derating above 1000 m 18)
Also at night
15)
At partial power typically < 75 dBA
—
Data communication principle for ABB PVS980 central inverters
Remote
monitoring Web
Local Database
3 service PC
I/O PVS980-MVP
MV grid
connection
Electricity Data ABB transformer ABB SafeRing
switchgear
— —
For more information please contact We reserve the right to make technical We reserve all rights in this document and
your local ABB representative or visit: changes or modify the contents of this in the subject matter and illustrations con-
document without prior notice. With re- tained therein. Any reproduction, disclo-
www.abb.com/solarinverters gard to purchase orders, the agreed par- sure to third parties or utilization of its
www.abb.com ticulars shall prevail. ABB does not accept contents – in whole or in parts – is forbidden
any responsibility whatsoever for potential without prior written consent of ABB.
errors or possible lack of information in Copyright© 2018 ABB
this document. All rights reserved
Power transformers
Power transformers
Built for reliability and efficiency
Power transformers
A safe partner
Safe operation
Safe delivery
Safe investment
2 Power transformers
A safe choice in transforming electric energy
Reliability throughout the transformer life cycle
ABB’s platform for designing and manufacturing a complete Our success is the result of continuous feedback of informa-
portfolio of power transformers is unique to the industry. tion throughout our organization. Since every power trans-
It allows us to maintain control of the quality of all relevant former delivery is unique, we re-use all experience by feeding
parts – including key components such as bushings, tap information back into our vast and growing library of best
changers, insulation materials and active parts. We also practices. This helps guarantee the successful transfer of
ensure that the same rigorous demands apply to our first- skills across national borders as well as between generations
class certified suppliers. of our people.
Power transformers 3
Proven transformer technology and long-term,
global field experience
Twice as high short circuit reliability as the market Consistent quality of vital components
average A power transformer must withstand tremendous loads dur-
ABB conducts all the necessary electrical and thermal tests ing a lifetime of up to 40 years. This requires quality down to
according to international test standards. Short circuit tests the smallest detail and carefully selected components. Global
are particularly expensive to carry out, but they are vital to reliability surveys indicate that reliability is heavily dependent
the reliability of the transformer. That is why we conduct more on excellent quality bushings, tap changers and the active
short circuit tests than any other supplier. The results are part. Thanks to in-house production, ABB is able to consist-
clearly demonstrated by KEMA statistics, proving our short ently control and guarantee the quality of these key compo-
circuit reliability to be more than twice as high as the market nents. For those materials that ABB does not produce, it
average. maintains supply agreements with first-class certified suppliers
to ensure the continuous supply of high-quality materials – even
Complete power transformer portfolio during periods of raw material shortage.
ABB offers a complete range of power transformers and
related components and parts. We have delivered more than Undisputed global leader
14,500 power transformers (over 17,000,000 MVA), including ABB is the world’s largest power transformer manufacturer
over twenty 800 kV UHVDC and over five hundred 735–765 kV with 1,000+ units delivered annually from 13 factories world-
AC units, to all major global markets. Our entire range is the wide. ABB has more than 4,500 employees and works with
result of our own research, development and manufacturing, customers and suppliers in more than 100 countries. We
which makes us unique in the industry. This has given us have the capacity to rapidly deliver customized power trans-
extensive experience in every relevant part of power trans- formers, regardless of specification or international standard.
former technology. Customers worldwide can securely rely on Our global service support network delivers truly professional,
the quality and reliability of our products. local, 24/7 support to almost every corner of the earth.
4 Power transformers
A KEMA* report and ABB statistics indicate that ABB’s short circuit reliability is more
than twice as high as the market average.
TrafoStar rated 25 MVA or higher, short circuit tested 1996–2011 Transformers rated 25 MVA or higher, tested by KEMA 1996–2009
8
24
6
16
4
8
2
0 0
25–50 50–100 100–200 >200 MVA (rated) 25–50 50–100 100–200 >200 MVA (rated)
31 out of 35 tested units ≥ 25 MVA were passed between 1996 and 2011, Total test failures 28%.
corresponding to 11% test failures.
Test failures * R.P.P. Smeets, L.H. te Paske. Fourteen Years of Test Experience with Short-
Circuit Withstand Capability of Large Power Transformers Travek VIIth Int. Sci.
and Techn. Conf. on Large Power Transf. and Diagn. Syst., Moscow, 2010
2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010
The total number of test failures on ABB’s 60+ MVA units was reduced
by 50% between 2001 and 2010.
Power transformers 5
On-time delivery of high quality power transformers
TrafoStar Platform
Delivering a power transformer takes time and planning. One virtual factory – 13 manufacturing locations
There is a chain of events on which the project success For decades, ABB has refined a common, industry-unique
depends. ABB’s strong delivery performance builds on its manufacturing platform that is now implemented in all of our
common TrafoStar platform, which provides rigorous con- 13 manufacturing facilities around the globe. Common manu-
trol throughout the design, manufacturing, testing, trans- facturing methods, quality standards and test standards allow
port and delivery stages. Our reliable manufacturing and us to manufacture 1,000+ units annually with the same high
delivery processes mean efficiency in your business. quality in all of our plants worldwide. Our harmonized manu-
facturing processes also enable us to operate several plants
Global design standards speed up development in parallel to meet the strictest contractual delivery deadlines.
Consistently designing high-quality power transformers
requires knowledge and experience on a worldwide basis. More than 60,000 process measurements every year
With our global design system including common design Every year, we conduct more than 60,000 process parameter
rules, processes and IT systems, we have built up a global measurements to collect data to improve our global feedback
knowledge base. This allows us to design every power trans- process. All design and production improvements are imple-
former according to the same high standards regardless of mented in a structured release process of IT program, design
location. The transfer of knowledge between countries, con- instructions and manufacturing standards to further increase
tinents and generations is secured by a learning organization customer value. These improvements translate into increased
that continuously feeds back experience to a growing library value for ABB’s customers.
of best practices. Knowledge transfer is further strengthened
through our global Knowledge Communication Center in
Germany.
6 Power transformers
Delivering a power transformer takes time and planning. ABB’s global common TrafoStar platform provides rigorous control throughout the design,
manufacturing, testing, transport and delivery stages.
Our improvement processes measured yearly include: On-site installation and startup support
No customer delivery is completed until the transformer has
−− On-time delivery
been successfully energized. ABB installation engineers are
−− Test and field failures
therefore always on site to supervise installation and startup.
−− Inventory
On arrival, they will prepare the transformer by carefully reas-
−− Cost of poor quality
sembling all parts dismantled for transit, refill it with oil and
−− Total throughput time
conduct all necessary on-site tests to ensure long and trou-
−− Manufacturing throughput time
ble-free service. As far as possible, the engineers assigned
−− Productivity
will have local language skills.
−− Operational health and safety
−− Supplier quality
Secure transportation
Safe delivery VALUE
Moving an object the size and weight of a power transformer – Common platform The global
requires planning, know-how and a global network of con- – Global design TrafoStar plat-
tacts. At the time of transportation, up to 90 percent of the form ensures
cost of the transformer has already been expended. Hence
standards the highest
there is a significant risk for several parties involved, and the – 60,000+ quality from
demands for secure and reliable transportation are stringent. measurements design to
ABB has extensive experience in delivering power trans- installation.
formers by rail, road, ship and even air. Transport security is
– Installation support
ensured through robust transformer design and reliable logistics – Secure transport
partners, selected by a global internal logistics organization.
Power transformers 7
Efficient operation and reliable local support
Lower risk of failure with proven technology Efficiency increase through modernization
Transformers are key components in any electric power – a safe investment
system. Operational outages can have many negative con- Total loss in today’s Transmission and Distribution systems
sequences such as lost revenues, repair costs, dissatisfied is about 10 percent on average. Lifetime capitalized losses
customers etc. For example, an outage of a three-phase alone amount to approximately twice the cost of a modern
generator step-up transformer of 500 MVA may cost 3 million ABB power transformer, based on estimates of future energy
euros* per day in lost revenues. Securing transformer avail- prices. The figures speak for themselves: investing in energy
ability should therefore be considered an inevitable expense efficiency pays off. In fact, new high-performance power
to ensure long-term continuous operation. transformer technology is one of the safest investments
imaginable – particularly as demand for power supply and
The costs can be estimated by summing up a large number energy prices are likely to continue to increase.
of operational risk factors. What if the transformer has a weak
short circuit design? Will it withstand the startup load after Pushing 100 percent efficiency
a blackout? Due to their proven robust design and reliability, Efficiency factors of up to 99.85 percent are achievable
ABB power transformers dramatically reduce these and other today. These levels are mainly determined by the loss capi-
operational risks. talization factors applied by the customer and ABB’s design
skills. Correct loss capitalization factors, together with high-
These are some of the factors that affect the total cost quality core steel grades, core designs, winding conductors
of ownership, aside from the purchase price: and magnetic shielding methods, combine to make ABB’s
−− Capitalized losses power transformers among the most efficient in the market.
−− Short circuit strength
−− On-time delivery
−− Test failure records *Calculation based on a load of 400 MW, 170 operating hours per week and
−− Transport security a power price of 0.05 euro/kWh.
0
Years 99,726 99,789 99,821
ABB life cycle cost is lower when also considering costs for repairs Relation between total ownership costs, price and cost of losses
and loss of revenues due to potential breakdowns. (15,000 EUR/kW) as a function of efficiency.
8 Power transformers
ABB Power Transformers
– Manufacturing facilities
Ensuring
Ensuring local
local needs needsknowledge
with global with global knowledge
Safety
Environmentally conscious
Trouble-free operation
Maximize asset utilization
Reduce outage
Extend asset life Safe investment VALUE
Needs
Smooth handover Low Life Cycle Cost (LCC) Extend asset life
Transportation/hauling Optimize investment Optimize capital
due to its high
planning
Control and monitoring
expenditure
Spare parts – Personal safety efficiency.
Condition/risk/life Preventive maintenance
assessment
Transformer
Refurbishment/enhancement – 24/7 local support
Upgrades
management training
Remanufacturing/
TrafoSite Repair
End of life management
Power transformers 9
ABB – your long-term trusted partner
Quality through experience and cooperation Pushing the research frontline forward
Every grid is unique and so too is every power transformer. ABB’s power transformer operations are backed by the ABB
Transformers are specified by customers who know their Group’s extensive research and development (R&D), which is
grids and who rely on the manufacturer to come up with a financed by three percent of the Group’s annual turnover
solution that perfectly suits their needs. This is why we invite – equivalent to a yearly investment of more than $1 billion.
our customers to provide their input into the design, manu- The interaction between our growing practical experience and
facturing and installation processes. the support of our corporate R&D is unique in the market,
and further demonstrates our commitment to guaranteeing
Global methodology passed down between generations superior product quality and continuous improvement.
After the BBC-ASEA merger in 1988, ABB’s power transformer
technology was developed through a process in which expe- We have access to the research results of 6,000 scientists
rience and best practices from a wide range of previously and engineers in R&D. Cooperation with 70 universities adds
independent transformer manufacturers were selectively to the combined knowledge base, in basic as well as applied
combined into an improved, common technology known as research. In addition, our manufacturing facilities around the
TrafoStar. world have their own resources for development and local
implementation of global R&D results.
This concept epitomizes ABB’s culture of continuous improve
ment. Everyone involved in the supply chain works according Demand will always be there – and so will ABB
to the same set of rules. All plants manufacture in accordance Demand for a secure power supply continues to increase. New
with the rules, and follow this up with testing and corrective economies are booming, and along with it, demand for vast
procedures. This way, our worldwide global industrial system amounts of electrical energy. Meanwhile, there is growing
is passed down to the next generation of employees – thus demand for improved energy efficiency and reduced environ-
securing our continued knowledge and expertise which places mental impact. ABB continues to invest in the world’s future
us as world leaders in power transformers. by developing solutions for the energy challenges of tomorrow.
10 Power transformers
Power transformers 11
Contact us
Page 36 of 44
Distribution Transformers
Special Applications
Reactors page 47
Boosterformers™ page 49
Special Applications
Pad Mounted Transformers: These units are delivered from the factory in tamper-resistant housings
designed to prevent access by unauthorised personnel.
Transformers for variable speed drives: These units can be supplied with primary power ratings
up to 30 MVA. They can be supplied as oil type or dry type. Converter transformers can be used
for the variable speed drives of high-load, low-speed equipment such as mine hoists, rolling mills
and ship propulsion systems. A correctly designed installation will provide impressive savings from
reduced down-time, extended equipment life and lower power costs.
Boosterformers™: Boosterformers™ are used in order to improve the function of electrical power
systems and protect the environment from dangerous stray currents near an electrical railway.
Large > 2000 up to 72.5 Used for indoor or outdoor applications, can
Distribution be provided with on-load tap changers or
Transformers off-load tap changers.
Pad Mounted
Transformers
Transformers for
Variable Speed Drives
Reactors
Boosterformers™
ABB’s liquid filled Power Distribution Transformers range from 16 kVA upwards, with primary
voltages up to 72.5 kV.
ABB supplies the widest range of power distribution transformers, including specific designs
for power centres, substations, networks and padmounts.
Transformers are an integral part of power systems with applications in industrial facilities,
commercial buildings and utility transmission and distribution networks.
The core and coil design is a unique characteristic of ABB’s oil type transformers, which
generate the reliability, durability and reduced dimensions required for their application in
utilities, industrial installations and public distribution. ABB oil type transformers are manu-
factured in accordance with the international quality standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Standard features
Standard features include aluminium or copper windings, epoxy or porcelain bushings, gauges,
alarm packages, fans and special signs and tags.
For heavily polluted environmental conditions ABB offers special paint finish cycles in epoxy-
coating for the protection of metallic components and electrical equipment.
Selection Guide
Product kVA Primary Features
Voltage (kV)
Coils
The coil features a low voltage rectangular wire or sheet conductor extending along the full
height of the coil. The layer to layer insulation, Insuldur, is a thermally upgraded kraft paper.
The layer insulation is coated with a diamond pattern of B-stage epoxy adhesive, which cures
during processing to form a high strength bond. This bond keeps the windings from moving
during operation or under short circuit stresses. The high to low insulation is fitted over the low
voltage winding and the wire of the strap wound high voltage is wound directly over the low
voltage to form a high strength coil assembly. Generous oil ducts extend along the height of the
coil to provide cooling in the winding. The staggered, diamond epoxy bonds help assure free
oil flow through the winding.
Accurately located taps and a large winding cross section keep unbalanced ampere-turns
to a minimum. Unbalanced ampere-turns create forces during short circuits that push the high
voltage and low voltage coils apart vertically. By minimising this imbalance vertical forces are
correspondingly reduced, thus making the design stronger under short circuit stresses.
The large areas presented by the layer-type winding result in a low ground capacity, which
gives a nearly straight line surge distribution throughout the winding. A compact, high-impulse-
strength coil is the result.
Turn insulation
ABB power distribution transformers are designed to meet specific performance criteria defined
by the customer. Some design considerations may require the use of traditional crepe paper or
Nomex® tape as turn insulation. Most designs, however, utilise DuraBIL®, which is a tough, flexible
and inert turn insulation. It reduces the most prevalent cause of transformer failure – deterioration
of turn insulation.
DuraBIL® is a single layer of epoxy powder deposited electrostatically and baked on a strap
conductor. The process is closely controlled and monitored to ensure a continuous, uniform
coating. The result is a compact turn insulation with superior characteristics including adhesion,
flexibility, abrasion resistance and thermal and chemical stability.
Since DuraBIL® is chemically stable, it does not degrade or contaminate the transformer fluid
with moisture. As a result, DuraBIL® maintains its dimensional stability and the coil’s structural
integrity.
Layer insulation
The Insuldur system of chemical stabilisers thermally upgrades the cellulose insulating materials
to permit 12% higher load capacity. Insuldur can be used with all fluids offered by ABB for small
power transformers. Chemical stabilisers delay insulation breakdown under elevated temperature
conditions. Dimensional changes in the insulating materials are minimised to ensure a tighter
structure. The result is greater strength and coil integrity throughout the life of the transformer.
The Insuldur system allows a unit rated at 55°C to be operated at a 10°C higher temperature
with a 12% increase in kVA capacity.
Construction features
Description
ABB Distribution Transformers manufactures
three phase oil type small distribution trans-
formers within the range up to 250 kVA and
36 kV. The transformers are adaptable for
pole mounting or assembly in substations.
Standard features
Hermetically sealed transformers completely
filled with oil:
Tank description
Total weight (kg)
Noise level (dB)
Impedance (%)
Length (mm)
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
HV1 (V)
HV2 (V)
LV1 (V)
kVA
30 20500 0 410 Yzn11 4 100 585 0 395 115 840 770 1005 0 ▲
40 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 90 900 48 340 90 790 580 970 420 ▲
40 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 130 900 48 330 90 790 580 970 420 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 1100 47 375 90 760 650 885 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 190 1100 50 365 90 760 650 885 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 875 47 425 100 820 625 885 ▲
50 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 140 885 0 440 125 840 770 1055 0 ▲
50 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 125 900 51 390 120 820 645 1010 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn11 4 190 1100 44 465 125 870 650 1400 670 ▲
50 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 115 940 48 415 110 810 585 1040 0 ▲
50 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 115 920 48 370 90 760 600 945 0 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 875 47 375 95 860 600 975 ▲
50 10000 0 400 Dyn5 3.7 115 850 50 425 115 800 480 1200 0 ▲
50 20000 0 400 Yzn5 4 125 1350 47 350 90 790 580 955 ▲
63 22000 0 420 Yzn5 4 190 1350 51 465 105 1280 630 1650 420 ▲
63 22000 0 420 Yzn5 4 160 1350 48 465 105 1280 630 1650 420 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 130 1130 48 430 100 945 665 970 420 ▲
63 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 130 950 51 460 110 820 645 1030 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1130 48 430 100 945 665 970 420 ▲
63 21000 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1280 48 460 100 830 680 1150 420 ▲
63 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 180 1160 48 470 100 830 680 1150 420 ▲
100 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 320 1750 50 585 130 820 775 1030 ▲
100 10000 0 400 Yzn5 4 210 1750 49 670 145 1120 725 1090 ▲
100 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 220 1485 0 510 120 850 610 1080 0 ▲
100 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 215 1700 48 490 110 870 500 1170 0 ▲
100 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 180 11800 52 730 160 930 645 1200 ▲
100 21000 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 240 1720 49 585 120 870 670 1200 420 ▲
100 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 500 1700 48 800 0 950 650 1270 520 ▲
100 10500 0 400 Dyn11 4 165 1700 48 535 110 870 500 1220 0 ▲
100 21000 0 400 Dyn11 4.2 165 1760 48 580 140 920 520 1295 0 ▲
100 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 185 1520 48 510 95 860 600 1070 0 ▲
100 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 185 1525 48 545 125 850 610 1115 0 ▲
100 10500 0 420 Dyn5 3.4 165 1240 54 600 135 920 540 1220 0 ▲
100 22000 0 420 Dyn11 3.6 245 1550 48 540 150 920 520 1245 0 ▲
160 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 375 2350 57 765 165 1000 720 1400 520 ▲
160 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 280 2200 50 830 165 970 805 1110 520 ▲
160 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 460 2350 50 840 180 1040 675 1140 670 ▲
160 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 460 2350 50 880 205 1000 700 1210 670 ▲
160 20000 0 400 Dyn11 4 300 2350 50 880 205 1000 700 1210 ▲
160 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 265 1750 53 890 190 1010 645 1180 ▲
160 15750 0 400 Yzn5 4.5 300 2350 50 1000 220 1080 790 1290 520 ▲
160 15000 0 400 Dyn11 4 650 2400 48 900 0 1100 670 1350 520 ▲
160 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 300 2000 50 870 180 1040 675 1140 520 ▲
200 20500 0 410 Dyn11 4 420 2295 0 995 235 1080 730 1250 0 ▲
200 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 320 2450 53 870 180 950 625 1345 0 ▲
200 22000 11000 420 Dyn11 3.6 370 2280 53 870 180 950 625 1495 0 ▲
200 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4 365 2225 53 840 160 1030 655 1170 0 ▲
200 22000 0 420 Dyn11 4 370 2250 53 940 200 1020 700 1245 0 ▲
200 10500 0 400 Dyn11 3.8 360 2700 53 840 200 950 625 1295 0 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 425 3250 55 1180 260 1100 780 1500 520 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 440 2750 55 1250 260 1100 800 1600 520 ▲
250 10000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 3250 50 1110 205 1300 750 1190 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn5 4 530 3250 60 1180 260 1100 780 1500 520 ▲
250 10000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 2750 50 1160 200 1000 700 1220 ▲
250 20000 0 400 Dyn5 4 425 3250 50 1130 220 1060 760 1190 ▲
250 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 360 2350 51 1010 200 1150 975 1260 520 ▲
250 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 460 3200 51 1030 205 1040 950 1185 520 ▲
250 25000 0 400 Dyn11 4.5 780 3500 52 1245 300 1210 860 1605 1070 ▲
250 16800 0 420 Dyn5 4 345 2230 55 1450 270 1150 715 1310 ▲
250 22000 0 420 Dyn1 4 290 5000 46 1120 0 1450 900 1500 520 ▲
250 21000 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 460 3260 51 945 175 990 720 1340 520 ▲
Please note that this table only shows a small sample ▲ Hermetically sealed with corrugated tank ● Corrugated tank with conservator
of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Standard features
Hermetically sealed. (Rated power <1000 kVA):
- Oil filling plug on the cover
- Oil-level indicator
- The two lifting lugs on the cover are made
for lifting the transformer or its removable part
- Corrugated tank
- Undercarriage with bi-directional rollers
- Oil drain valve
- Off-circuit tap changer handle
- Earthing terminals
- Sparking gaps for voltages 15 kV and above
- Rating plate
Additionally, for transformers with conservator
(Rated power ≥1000 kVA):
- Max thermometer
- Magnetic oil-level indicator
Construction features - Oil filling plug on the conservator
- Buchholz relay
Description - Dehydrating breather
MDT transformers are used to step down three- - Conservator
phase high voltage to low voltage for power
distribution, mainly in metropolitan areas and Core
for industrial applications. The transformers in The cores of the transformers are made of
standard versions are designed for use in grain-oriented magnetic, cold-rolled silicon
moderate climates and can be installed both steel laminations with low losses.
outdoors and indoors. The loading is in
accordance with IEC 354. MDT transformers Windings
are hermetically sealed (the tank is completely The windings of the transformers are made of
filled with oil) or equipped with oil conser- high grade electrolytic copper or aluminium.
vator. Both types are equipped with flexible The High Voltage windings are wound either
corrugated tank walls enabling sufficient with round, enamel insulated, or shaped, paper
cooling of the transformer. They also compen- insulated wire. The Low Voltage windings are
sate for the changes in the oil volume during wound with shaped, paper insulated wire or
operation. An advantage of the hermetically foil. The winding construction is characterised
sealed transformers is that the oil is never in by high dielectric strength with high resistance,
contact with the atmosphere thus avoiding to atmospheric surges and to the effects of
periodic oil analysis. short-circuits. Neutral points of the Low Voltage
windings are brought to the tank cover.
Off-circuit tap changer
The off-circuit tap changer is of a 5-position
type connected on the High Voltage side with
a handle located on the cover. The tap changer
should be operated only when the transformer
is deactivated.
Tank description
Total weight (kg)
Noise level (dB)
Impedance (%)
Length (mm)
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
HV1 (V)
HV2 (V)
LV1 (V)
kVA
315 26000 0 400 Dyn11 4 980 4130 64 1550 370 1300 900 1700 670 ▲
315 20000 8000 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
315 15000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
315 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1050 4200 53 1300 0 1240 800 1400 670 ▲
400 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 620 5000 50 2050 0 1300 900 1800 670 ▲
400 21000 0 420 Dyn5 4 750 4600 63 1560 340 1300 900 1600 670 ▲
400 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 570 4100 52 1520 320 1210 850 1480 670 ▲
400 10500 0 420 Dyn5 4 475 3480 0 1730 320 1140 820 1495 0 ▲
500 22000 11000 420 Dyn11 4.4 710 5000 0 1750 320 1140 880 1600 0 ▲
500 20000 0 400 Dyn5 4 730 5500 50 1660 365 1300 920 1860 ▲
500 11000 0 420 Dyn11 4.5 710 4600 0 1690 320 1140 880 1450 0 ▲
500 10000 0 690 Dyn5 4.6 500 4000 0 2200 350 1470 850 1560 0 ▲
500 10000 0 400 Dyn11 4 1450 5800 53 1750 0 1450 970 1500 670 ▲
630 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 840 7000 52 2600 0 1450 900 1800 670 ▲
630 22000 0 420 Dyn5 6 800 5600 60 2500 510 1400 1050 1700 670 ▲
630 15750 0 400 Dyn5 4.5 720 6100 54 2035 400 1270 900 1600 670 ▲
630 10000 0 400 Dyn5 6 800 8700 54 2040 445 1530 950 1690 ▲
800 26000 0 400 Dyn11 6 1700 8500 68 2650 525 1700 950 2100 670 ▲
800 21000 0 400 Dyn11 4.8 1030 6800 0 2300 380 1520 900 1700 0 ▲
800 15000 10000 400 Dyn11 5 1940 8200 53 2200 0 1630 1080 1600 670 ●
800 10000 0 400 Dyn5 6 1400 8500 56 2320 530 1400 1050 1890 ▲
1000 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 1600 9700 0 3100 0 1800 1050 1860 820 ▲
1000 21000 0 400 Dyn5 6 1300 10200 56 2800 550 1970 980 1980 820 ●
1000 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 1300 10200 56 2790 550 1970 980 1980 820 ●
1000 10000 0 400 Yyn0 5.3 1300 12200 0 2420 470 1670 1030 1590 0 ▲
1250 26000 0 400 Dyn11 6 2360 13500 70 3550 760 2000 1100 2250 820 ▲
1250 20000 15000 400 D(D)yn11 7.19 1320 16900 0 4140 1190 2345 1370 2310 820 ●
1250 15000 10000 400 Dyn11 6 2600 13000 65 3600 0 1860 1250 1640 820 ●
1250 10500 0 400 Dyn11 5.4 1460 13400 0 3000 580 1830 1150 1720 0 ▲
1600 35000 0 400 Dyn1 6 2400 14000 0 4000 0 2000 1100 1900 820 ▲
1600 20000 0 400 Yyn0 5.5 1780 16700 0 3320 680 1890 1170 1860 0 ▲
1600 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 1700 16000 58 3995 820 2100 1130 2250 820 ●
1600 10000 0 690 Dyn5 5.7 1580 13500 0 3680 775 1910 1120 1970 0 ▲
2000 30000 0 6300 Dyn5 6 3200 21000 71 5000 1100 2250 1300 2350 1070 ●
2000 20000 0 400 Yyn0 6 2200 20100 0 4020 850 2010 1220 1910 0 ▲
2000 15750 0 400 Dyn5 6 2100 19000 0 4710 900 2330 1360 2320 1070 ●
2000 10000 0 6300 Dyn5 6 3200 21000 71 5000 1100 2250 1300 2350 1070 ●
Please note that this table only shows a small sample ▲ Hermetically sealed with corrugated tank ● Corrugated tank with conservator
of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Construction features
Description
ABB has been manufacturing transformers for
almost a hundred years. The production is
based on the development and research carried
out in the design department and at the ABB
Research Centre in close cooperation with our
customers. This long experience combined
with research and development, guarantees
high quality, long life and reliability.
Standard features
The transformers are manufactured and tested
in accordance with the IEC Publication 76. Windings
They are also in compliance with several The material of the windings is either copper
national standards e.g. BS 171, VDE 0532, or aluminum. The windings are made of paper
SS 4270101 etc. insulated rectangular wire in the form of multi-
The transformers can be overloaded in layer, disc or helical windings. Transformers
accordance with IEC Publications 354 (1972). provided with on-load tap-changer usually
The on-load tap-changer and bushings have have a separate tap winding.
been chosen so as not to limit the overload
capability. The cooling methods are ONAN Off-load tap-changer
or ONAN/ONAF. The transformers are normally equipped with
a 5-position off-load tap-changer on the High
Construction features Voltage side, with its handle located on the
The transformers are of the breathing, conven- cover. When changing the tap position the
tional type provided with an oil conservator. transformer has to be un-energized.
Two types of transformers are manufactured: Position 1 of the tap-changer (+ position)
- Transformers with off-load tap changer corresponds with the highest ratio, which
- Transformers with on-load tap changer gives the lowest voltage on the Low Voltage
side. Position 5 of the tap-changer (- position)
Core corresponds with the lowest ratio which conse-
The three legged bolt-less core is constructed quently gives the highest voltage on the Low
of grain oriented steel laminations. The joints Voltage side. Transformers having dual primary
between the leg and yoke are mitred at 45° (or secondary) voltages are usually equipped
and interleaved. The cross section of the leg with a selector switch with the handle on
is circular. the cover.
Tank Bushings
The transformer tank is usually of the rigid type The bushings are of a solid porcelain type and
provided with removable radiators connected located on the cover. Bushing insulators can
to the tank by means of a shut-off valve. On be changed without opening the transformer.
request, the tank can be made vacuum proof. The bushings comply with IEC 137.
Transformers up to 5 MVA can be supplied with The terminals can be provided with an air
a compact tank with corrugated cooling fins. insulated enclosure. The enclosure can be
on the primary and/or on the secondary side
Painting and surface treatment and may be constructed for cable or bus duct
Prior to the painting of the tank, the cover and connection. Alternatively the transformers can
oil conservator are sandblasted. External sur- be provided with plug-in bushings.
faces are painted immediately after pretreatment
with a two-pack epoxy primer coat. Testing
The finishing is carried out by applying a All transformers are manufactured according
two-pack polyurethane paint to a total thick- to the ISO 9001 Quality System. The trans-
ness of 180 µm. The colour of the paint is formers are individually tested according to
RAL6013 (rush green). IEC standards.
The inside of the transformer tank is painted
with a two-pack epoxy primer to a thickness
of approx. 30 µm. The external surfaces of the
radiators are hot dip galvanized to a thickness
of approx. 60 µm. Corrugated tanks are flow
painted with alkyd primer and acrylic finish
to a total thickness of 80 µm. The conservator
and the bottom part of the tank are painted
internally.
2. Type tests
2.1 Temperature rise test
2.2 Dielectric tests:
2.2.1 Lightning impulse test
Rated power Tap-changer No-Load Loss Load Loss Impedance Total Weight Oil
kVA W W % kg kg
3150 ±2x2.5% 3500 25000 6.35 6250 1210
±9x1.67% 3800 25500 6.35 10000 2780
4000 ±2x2.5% 4200 29000 6.35 7500 1440
±9x1.67% 4500 31000 6.35 12100 3220
5000 ±2x2.5% 4900 35000 7.15 9300 1670
±9x1.67% 5000 39000 7.15 13400 3620
6300 ±2x2.5% 6000 45000 7.15 13200 2750
±9x1.67% 6200 45000 7.15 15400 3960
8000 ±2x2.5% 7000 56000 8.35 15300 3140
±9x1.67% 7200 56000 8.35 18100 4760
10000 ±2x2.5% 8100 65000 8.35 17200 3480
±9x1.67% 8200 68000 8,35 20600 5090
Other product types with different datas and specifications can be supplied on request.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Construction features
Description
ABB Distribution Transformers manufactures
single-phase, oil type small distribution trans-
formers for pole mounting. These represent
an economical option for certain networks.
They are suitable for serving residential over-
head distribution loads, as well as for lighting,
commercial loads, industrial and diversified
power applications. ABB’s core design provides
optimal efficiency and better mechanical,
thermal and electrical performance. These
transformers are designed for the duties nor-
mally encountered on electric utility power Options and accessories
distribution systems. Bushings mounted on lid or on turrets. 2 or 3
view options. Internal HT fuses can be fitted.
Ranges ANSI or DIN bushings. Single or dual ratio.
15 kVA to 100 kVA with voltages up to a Tap-switch or internal link board. Can be fitted
maximum of 36 kV. with acing horns or surge arrestors.
ABB’s dry type transformers range from 30 kVA to 30 MVA, with primary operating voltages up to
41.5 kV and secondary operating voltages up to 36 kV.
With the aim of minimising environmental contamination and fire hazards, customers are increas-
ingly requesting dry type transformers. These transformers meet strict parameters with respect to
electrical system demands and functioning in areas with extreme climatic conditions.
Applications include high-density office buildings, nuclear power plants, offshore drilling plat-
forms, nuclear-powered navy vessels and high-volume industrial process plants.
ABB dry type transformers fulfil the requirements of international standards IEC 60726, as well
as the European HD464 and HD538.
ABB’s dry type transformers are virtually maintenance free and are manufactured in accordance
with the international quality standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Applications
ABB dry type transformers are most suitable for installations that require a high degree of safety,
such as: hospitals, shopping centres, multipurpose cultural centres, car factories etc. ABB dry
type transformers are also the most technologically advanced, designed for the severe conditions
present in:
- Chemical processing, offshore platforms for oil wells, offshore drilling platforms, marine appli-
cations, container cranes at seaports.
- Heavy industrial applications: wind power generation, underground railways, stations and
underground mines in non-classified areas. Rectifiers and frequency converters for AC motors.
Power plants for auxiliary services and excitation transformer systems.
Windings
ABB’s windings construction depends on operating voltage, basic impulse level and current
capacity of the individual winding. Typically, ABB’s Low Voltage windings, insulation class 1.1 kV,
are wound using sheet conductors. This construction allows free current distribution within the
axial width of the coil which eliminates the axial forces developed in other types of windings
under short circuit conditions.
During the assembly process each Low Voltage winding is blocked radially and axially against
the core using a combination of solid and resilient mounts for sound suppression and thermal
expansion compensation.
ABB’s winding construction may be either round or oval up to 2500 kVA. Windings on trans-
formers with a rating greater than 2500 kVA are generally round.
An experienced and dedicated work force ensures quality transformers and customer satisfaction
with the product.
Construction features
Description
ABB vacuum cast coil transformers range from
50 kVA up to 30 MVA with primary operating
voltages up to 36 kV and secondary operating
voltage up to 6 kV.
Customers demand dry type transformers
more frequently in order to minimise environ-
mental contamination and fire hazard. These
transformers are not flammable, they are self-
extinguishing and in the event of a breakdown
there is no risk of leakage of flammable or
contaminating substances.
The emission of toxic substances and fumes
is minimised. The use of cast resin, combined - Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly
with our latest manufacturing technique allows - Rating plate
us to build a stronger compact transformer - Temperature control device
capable of withstanding severe rolling and - Earthing terminals
vibration. - Base equipped with bidirectional rollers or
Vacuum cast coil transformers are virtually designed for skidding
maintenance free. They do not require any
special civil works prior to installation and due Options and accessories
to the particular design they can be repaired Design options:
on site. ABB vacuum cast coil transformers are - 80°C average temperature rise (or other
manufactured in accordance with the interna- according to requirement)
tional quality standard ISO 9001. - Copper windings
Vacuum cast coil transformers are moisture- - Cast coil LV windings
proof, suitable for operation in humid or heav- - Increased basic impulse levels
ily polluted environments. They are the ideal - Dual primary-secondary voltage
transformers for operation in environments - Loss optimised designs
with a humidity higher than 75% as well as at - Retrofit designs
temperatures lower than -25°C. - Other designs available on request
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
50 1400 1230 350 4 58
100 2000 1760 440 4 59
160 2700 2380 610 4 62
250 3500 3080 820 4 65
315 4300 3780 1100 4 66
400 4900 4310 1150 4 68
500 6400 5630 1350 6 69
630 7600 6690 1370 6 70
800 9000 8010 1800 6 71
1000 10000 8900 2000 6 73
1250 12500 11130 2500 6 74
1600 14000 12460 2800 6 76
2000 18000 16200 3600 6 78
2500 21000 18900 4300 6 81
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
50 1500 1320 350 6 58
100 2100 1850 500 6 59
160 2900 2550 750 6 62
250 3800 3340 880 6 65
315 4600 4050 1150 6 66
400 5500 4840 1200 6 68
500 7000 6160 1500 6 69
630 7800 6860 1650 6 70
800 9400 8370 2100 6 71
1000 11000 9790 2300 6 73
1250 13500 12020 2900 6 74
1600 16000 14240 3100 6 76
2000 19500 17550 4200 6 78
2500 23000 20700 5000 6 81
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
160 2900 2550 960 6 66
250 4000 3520 1280 6 67
315 4800 4220 1500 6 68
400 5700 5020 1650 6 69
500 7100 6250 1950 6 70
630 8000 7040 2200 6 71
800 9700 8630 2800 6 72
1000 11500 10240 3100 7 73
1250 13800 12280 3700 7 74
1600 17000 15130 4200 8 76
2000 21000 18900 5000 8 78
2500 25000 22500 5800 8 81
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
50 1020 800 1240 300 450 520 125 40 520
100 1100 800 1240 300 450 520 125 40 730
160 1270 800 1290 300 475 520 125 40 860
250 1280 850 1440 375 475 670 125 40 1230
315 1350 850 1480 375 495 670 125 40 1310
400 1440 850 1520 375 495 670 125 40 1660
500 1440 850 1630 375 525 670 125 40 1570
630 1550 900 1650 375 525 670 125 40 2060
800 1550 900 1880 375 575 670 125 40 2170
1000 1620 900 1900 375 575 670 125 40 2620
1250 1680 1000 2200 490 610 820 200 70 3100
1600 1840 1000 2250 490 610 820 200 70 4020
2000 1860 1000 2480 490 635 820 200 70 4630
2500 2050 1250 2500 615 635 1070 200 70 5500
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
50 1020 800 1300 300 450 520 125 40 540
100 1100 800 1300 300 450 520 125 40 750
160 1270 850 1350 300 475 520 125 40 970
250 1480 850 1500 375 475 670 125 40 1320
315 1550 850 1550 375 495 670 125 40 1440
400 1620 900 1560 375 495 670 125 40 1760
500 1620 900 1700 375 525 670 125 40 1800
630 1670 900 1730 375 525 670 125 40 2260
800 1680 900 1950 375 575 670 125 40 2450
1000 1770 900 1980 375 575 670 125 40 2910
1250 1800 1000 2270 490 610 820 200 70 3380
1600 1920 1000 2320 490 610 820 200 70 4240
2000 2000 1000 2550 490 635 820 200 70 4900
2500 2150 1250 2580 615 635 1070 200 70 5900
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
kVA mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
160 1450 925 1450 300 625 520 125 40 1150
250 1550 1000 1600 375 625 670 125 40 1420
315 1600 1000 1650 375 625 670 125 40 1650
400 1800 1000 1700 375 625 670 125 40 2100
500 1800 1000 1800 375 675 670 125 40 2120
630 1850 1000 1850 375 675 670 125 40 2550
800 1920 1000 2050 375 725 670 125 40 3020
1000 1950 1050 2100 375 725 670 125 40 3250
1250 2000 1100 2400 490 760 820 200 70 3680
1600 2100 1150 2450 490 760 820 200 70 4480
2000 2200 1150 2600 490 785 820 200 70 5200
2500 2350 1300 2650 615 785 1070 200 70 6200
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Construction features
Description
The ABB resin-encapsulated dry-type trans-
former, RESIBLOC®, offers specific advantages.
For more than a quarter of a century we have
been using only epoxy resin and fibre-glass
to encapsulate the wire layers. Epoxy resin
moulding reinforced with fibre-glass rovings
is a material of outstanding strength. Further-
more we manufacture RESIBLOC® transformers
without the addition of extenders or plasticizers.
Electronically controlled winding processes
ensure uniform distribution of the glass rovings
and precise tracking.
The Low Voltage and High Voltage windings
are joined adhesively by way of bars to form
a compact block winding. The favourable
impulse voltage distribution – resulting from
the costly multilayering of the High Voltage
winding – in conjunction with the outstanding
strength of the coil makes RESIBLOC® resin- - Built-in cooling channels to dissipate heat
encapsulated transformers short-circuit proof. - Environmentally friendly
The fibre-glass reinforcement of the resin- - Linear distribution of lightning impulse
encapsulated RESIBLOC® windings is so robust voltage
that we have no hesitation in guaranteeing - Base equipped with bi-directional rollers or
the crack resistance of the High Voltage coil designed for skidding arrangement
for the entire life of the transformer.
We also guarantee that no silicone is used Options and accessories
at any time in RESIBLOC® coil manufacture. - Dimensions adaptable to specific require-
This is a further key point for those operators ments
who demand absolutely silicone free manu- - Loss optimised design
facture from their transformer suppliers. - Special designs as traction, rectifier and
converter transformer, multiwinding
Standard features transformers
- Ratings: from 30 kVA to 30 MVA - Enclosure IP20 to IP65, indoor and outdoor,
- Primary Voltages: up to 41.5 kV galvanized without painting
- Secondary Voltages: up to 36 kV - Fans for forced cooling (up to 140% of AN
- BIL: According to standards rating), including control
- HV Winding: Copper - Anti-vibration pads, (1 set=4 pieces)
- LV Winding: Aluminum - Earthing bolts (1 set=3 pieces)
- Step-lap mitred core - PTC sensors, with relay
- Tapping 2 x 2.5% - Dial type thermometer (with capillary
- Temperature device tube 2 m)
- Fire class F1 - Thermo-resistor PT100
- Environmental class E2 - Copper for LV windings
- Climatic class C2 - Reduced temperature rise on request
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 2000 1700 440 4 59
160 2700 2300 610 4 62
250 3500 3000 820 4 65
315 4200 3650 950 4 67
400 4900 4300 1150 4 68
500 6300 5500 1300 4 69
630 7300 6400 1500 4 70
250 3900 3400 690 6 65
315 4700 4100 820 6 67
400 5730 5000 1000 6 68
500 6530 5700 1200 6 69
630 7600 6600 1370 6 70
800 8820 7700 1700 6 72
1000 10000 8800 2000 6 73
1250 12000 10500 2400 6 75
1600 14000 12700 2800 6 76
2000 18000 15500 3500 6 78
2500 21000 19000 4300 6 81
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 1750 1550 600 4 59
160 2500 2150 870 4 67
250 3450 3000 1100 4 65
400 4900 4250 1450 4 68
630 6900 6000 2000 4 70
100 2050 1750 460 6 59
160 2900 2500 650 6 62
250 3800 3300 880 6 65
315 4580 4000 1050 6 67
400 5500 4800 1200 6 68
500 6870 6000 1400 6 69
630 7800 6900 1650 6 70
800 9280 8100 1900 6 72
1000 11000 9600 2300 6 73
1250 13100 11500 2700 6 75
1500 16000 14000 3100 6 76
2000 19100 19000 4000 6 78
2500 23000 20000 5000 6 81
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 2000 1700 320 4 51
160 2700 2300 440 4 54
250 3500 3000 600 4 57
315 4200 3650 730 4 59
400 4900 4300 880 4 60
500 6300 5500 1000 4 61
630 7300 6400 1150 4 62
250 3900 3400 540 6 57
315 4700 4100 640 6 59
400 5730 5000 780 6 60
500 6530 5700 940 6 61
630 7600 6600 1100 6 62
800 8820 7700 1330 6 64
1000 10000 8800 1500 6 65
1250 12000 10500 1880 6 67
1600 14000 12700 2100 6 68
2000 18000 15500 2750 6 70
2500 21000 19000 3000 6 71
Rated power Load loss at Load loss at No-load loss Short-circuit Sound power
120 ºC 75ºC at 100% Ur impedance level
kVA W W W % dB
100 1750 1550 400 4 51
160 2500 2150 580 4 54
250 3450 3000 800 4 57
400 4900 4250 1100 4 60
630 6900 6000 1600 4 62
100 2050 1750 340 6 51
160 2900 2500 480 6 54
250 3800 3300 650 6 65
315 4580 4000 820 6 59
400 5500 4800 940 6 60
500 6870 6000 1100 6 61
630 7800 6900 1250 6 62
800 9280 8100 1460 6 64
1000 11000 9600 1800 6 65
1250 13100 11500 2080 6 67
1600 16000 14000 2400 6 68
2000 19100 16700 3100 6 70
2500 23000 20000 3600 6 71
AC: Power frequency withstand voltage LI: Lightning impulse withstand voltage.
Please note that this table only shows a small sample of all productdesigns and ratings we supply.
Pad Mounted
Transformers
Transformers for
Variable Speed Drives
Reactors
Boosterformers™
Construction features
Description
ABB padmounted transformers feature a tamper
resistant construction with no externally
accessible bolts, hinges, screws or fasteners,
thus providing a safe, self-contained unit which
cannot be accessed by unauthorised personnel.
Unsightly fences or other forms of protective
devices are not necessary. Completely factory
assembled, the units are shipped in one piece.
These units feature a rectangular core and
coil design which is a distinguishing character-
istic of ABB’s oil type transformers. This proven
design offers reliability, durability and reduced
dimensions. Nearly 40 years of service and
scrupulous testing confirm the consistency of
the design.
Standard features
1. Tamper resistant
2. Copper or aluminium windings b) Ground pad
3. Special core and coil design c) Provision for dial-type thermometer
4. 65°C average temperature rise d) Provision for vacuum-pressure gauge
5. Tap changer for deactivated operation e) Pressure relief valve
6. Four full capacity taps on winding rated f) Liquid level gauge
2.5% 2-FCAN - 2-FCBN on units with g) Diagrammatic stainless steel rating plate
voltage above 601 V 18. Different paint finishes available
7. Liquid preservation system with sealed tank 19. Base designed for rolling the unit in
8. Tank rated 5 psig for oil-filled units accordance with ANSI-IEC-DIN segment
9. Tank rated 8 psig for silicone filled units centre lines
10. Lifting lugs for moving complete units
11. Pressure relief valve Options and accessories
12. Two copper-faced steel ground pads on - Copper windings
tank - 55°C average winding temperature rise
13. Weather-resistant cabinet bolted to the - Dead front primary entrance
front of the transformer - Basic impulse level adjustable on request
14. HV/LV compartment barrier bolted in place - Dial-type thermometer
15. Three-point terminal compartment laching - Liquid level valve
16. HV compartment located on left side - Pressure vacuum gauge
of unit: - Radiator valves
a) Live front-cast resin bushings, or univer- - Sudden Pressure surge relay
sal bushing wells for dead front - CTs and PTs
b) Provision for distribution-class LAs - Special ambient conditions
c) Space for stress cones - Special altitudes
d) Interlocked door which can be opened - Non-standard HV taps
only after opening LV compartment door - Special impedance
17. LV compartment located on right side: - Special noise levels
a) Compartment door with provision for - Electrostatic shields
pad-lock - Special paint finishes
● Output transformers
Transformers for voltage step-up from
converter to motor (see opposite).
EMC
A specifically designed shield between trans-
former windings reduces transferred radio
interference from the drive to the network.
The earthed shield also protects the drive
from transient over-voltages coming from the
feeding network.
Converter transformer, 19400 kVA, 13.2 MVA, 4-windings, water cooled Converter transformer.
three-windings supply of LCI-drives. RESIBLOC® transformer for ship-
propulsion.
Construction features
Introduction
Sıngle-phase and/or three-phase reactors are
characterised by a wide range of solutions
found in several High Voltage and/or Medium The commutation reactors are individually
Voltage installations for both oil-type and dry designed and manufactured according to
purposes. system requirements.
Cable Boosterformer™
for electric railway system.
Page 37 of 44
KBE Solar
KBE Solar DB
Erdverlegbar / direct burial
KBE Multinorm
TÜV PV1-F / UL 4703 (PV Wire)
QUALITÄT / QUALITY Made in Germany
Die KBE Elektrotechnik GmbH ist Hersteller von KBE Elektrotechnik GmbH is specialized in manufac-
Kabeln und Leitungen für die Solar-, Automobil- und turing electrical wires and cables for the photovoltaic,
Hausgeräteindustrie. automotive, and household appliance industry.
In unseren nach ISO TS 16949 zertifizierten Werken All our plants are certified according to ISO TS 16949.
produzieren wir rund 1,5 Mio km Leitungen und verar- We manufacture about 1.5 million km of wires and
beiten ca. 20000 t Kupfer pro Jahr. cables with 20000 tons of copper per year.
Das KBE Solarleitungsprogramm reicht von Standard- KBE’s solar product range covers standard cables,
leitungen, über erdverlegbare Leitungen bis hin zu PV-cables for direct burial, and voltages up to 1500 V.
Solarkabeln mit internationalen Zertifizierungen und Our cables are certified according to TÜV and interna-
Spannungen bis 1500 Volt. tional standards.
Diese speziell auf Anforderungen im Bereich PV- Our solar cables are suitable for installations in PV
Kraftwerke, Dachanlagen, Kabelkonfektion, Modulher- power plants, roof systems, wire harnesses, and panel
stellung und Großhandel angepassten Solarleitungen manufacturing while meeting the expectations of distri-
werden auf modernsten Anlagen kostenoptimiert her- butors. Our state-of-the-art production facilities guaran-
gestellt. tee a continuous cost optimization.
Unsere KBE Solarleitungen sind gemäß TÜV und UL KBE solar cables are TÜV certified and UL Listed. The
zertifiziert. Unsere vernetzten Spezialisolierungen special cross-linked insulations exceed the test requi-
übertreffen die gestellten Anforderungen und erzielen rements to ensure long service time and high operating
eine hohe Lebensdauer und Einsatzsicherheit. reliability.
KBE Solarleitungen sind in verschiedenen Außen- KBE solar cables are available in many different
durchmessern erhältlich und damit kompatibel zu allen outer diameters making them compatible with almost
gängigen Steckern und Anschlussdosen. Unsere kur- all connectors and junction boxes. Our capacity and
zen Lieferzeiten werden Sie überzeugen. Verschiedene short delivery time is outstanding while offering different
Verpackungsgrößen erfüllen Ihre individuellen Anforde- packaging sizes to meet your individual requirements.
rungen.
KBE Solar DB – Datenblatt / Technical Data Sheet
Stand: 31.05.2013
Leiter / • E-Cu verzinnt nach DIN EN 60228 • E-Cu tinned, DIN EN 60228
conductor Klasse 5 Class 5
Richtlinien & Zertifikate / • TÜV 2 PfG 1169/08.07, R60085683 • TÜV 2 PfG 1169/08.07, R60085683
guidelines & certificates • RoHS 2002/95/EC • RoHS 2002/95/EC
ANNEX 8: EARTHING
(GROUNDING) SYSTEM
1. BAHRA CABLES
2. WALLIS
Page 38 of 44
EARTHING & LIGHTNING
EARTHING & LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM
2 EARTHING
6 EARTH ELECTRODES
11 INSPECTION PITS
12 EARTH ROD ALTERNATIVES - PL ATE & L ATTICE
13 BACKFILLL COMPOUNDS
14 ACCESSORIES
RODS & REBAR CL AMPS -
PIPE CL AMPS -
EAARTH POINTS -
BON
ONDDSS -
20 EARTH BARS
25 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
29 CONDUCTORS
BARE COPPER & ALUMINIUM TAPES -
PVC, LEAD & TIN PL ATED TAPES -
WIRES & CABLES -
39 AIR RODS & ACCESSORIES
45 BAHRAWELD
48 T YPES OF CONNECTIONS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
7 4
2
3
12
13
13
10 12
10
11
10
1 6 10
1
Multiple Point Bonds Earth Electrodes
2 7 11
Air Terminal Conductor Jointing Earth Lattice Copper
Clamps
3 8 12
Air Rod Base Test Clamps Earth Plate Solid Copper
4 9 13
Square Tape/Conductor Earth Inspection Pit DC Tape Clip
Clamp
5
Copper Tapes/Conductors
2
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
An earthing system is a need in any electrical system to protect from the adverse effects of
lightning, Leakage currents, insulation failures, short circuiting and other faults. A reliable
earthing system with short, direct and low resistive path ensures protecting people, equipment,
structure and environment by dissipating fault currents that are of high magnitude and impulsive
rise times.
Earthing systems are designed as per the requirement of electrical systems and applications,
though the principle remains the same, conductors, devices, type of connections varies for
different applications such as power stations, overhead transmission systems, consumer power
networks.
3 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
4
EARTHING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Definitions
(DUWK
Earth is an equipotential conductive mass, conventionally assumed that its potential is Zero
(Negligible).
(DUWKLQJ
Earthing or Grounding is connecting an electrical network, equipment or structure to earth
incidentally or intentionally, directly or through a conducting medium.
&RQGXFWRUV
An electrical conductor is a medium in which electrical charge flows, usually electrons when
there is a potential difference.
/HDNDJHFXUUHQW
Current that could flow from any conductive part or the surface of non-conductive parts to
ground if a conductive path is available.
6KRUW&LUFXLW
A short circuit is simply a low resistance connection between the two conductors supplying
electrical power to any circuit, this results in excessive current flow in the power source through
the ‘short,’ and may even cause the power source to be destroyed.
,PSHGDQFH
The effective resistance of an electric circuit or component to alternating current, arising
from the combined effects of ohmic resistance and reactance. Resistivity of soil, reactance of
conductor and connection forms the impedance of an earthing network.
.H\)DFWRUVGULYLQJWKHHIILFLHQF\
The effectiveness of the earthing system relies on various factors including but not limited to
6RLOUHVLVWLYLW\W\SHDQGVKDSHRIFRQGXFWRUVW\SHRIHOHFWURGHVDQGHIILFLHQF\RIFRQQHFWLRQV
The system design and selection of components are essential in achieving the shortest, direct
and low impedance path to dissipate the energy to the ground.
2XU6ROXWLRQ
%DKUD(DUWKLQJ6\VWHPVRIIHUVDFRPSUHKHQVLYHVROXWLRQZLWKGHVLJQWHFKQLFDOVXSSRUWDWWKH
VLWHIRU6RLO5HVLVWLYLW\WHVWLQJDQGVHOHFWLRQRIFRPSRQHQWVWKDWVXLWVIRUWKHDSSOLFDWLRQV7KH
earthing components are designed and engineered to withstand harsh environmental conditions
DQG IDXOW FRQGLWLRQV LQ WKH HOHFWULFDO QHWZRUNV DQG DUH WHVWHG WR WKH VWULQJHQW %6 ,(& DQG 8/
standards.
5 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES
&RSSHUERQGHGHDUWKURGV
7KUHDGHGURGV
,W LV LPSRUWDQW WKDW WKH HDUWK HOHFWURGH VKRXOG EH FRUURVLRQ UHVLVWDQW DQG OHVV UHDFWLYH WR WKH
conductors used ensuring longer life and low maintenance. Bahra Threaded Copper bonded
earth rods are made by molecularly bonding 99.9% pure electrolytic copper on a high tensile
steel rod.
The copper bonded rod features high tensile strength comparing to solid copper earth rods
and can be deep driven to the ground with less wear to the rods. Even at severe conditions
the bonded copper does not crack or tear, the adhesion of copper is ensured by a thin layer of
nickel beneath the copper.
The threads are formed by a cold rolling process which ensures strength and eliminating the
risk of chipping of threads while driving the rod deep into the ground. Threading is done after
the copper coating as per the standard requirements, and this also ensures thread diameter of
the rods to match couplers and other accessories. Cold Rolled threads are better than the cut
threads as stress is evenly distributed in the cold rolled threading process.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
6
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES
$OO%DKUDFRSSHUERQGHGURGVDUHFRDWHGZLWKDPLQLPXPWKLFNQHVVRIPLOVRUPLFURQV
DVSHUWKH8/VWDQGDUGV PLO LQFKPLFURQV
Partt N
P No LLength
th Th
Thread
d Di
Diameter
t
RT001 1200 mm 1/2”
RT002 1500 mm 1/2”
RT003 1800 mm 1/2”
RT004 2400 mm 1/2”
RT005 3000 mm 1/2”
RT011 1200 mm 5/8”
RT012 1500 mm 5/8”
RT013 1800 mm 5/8”
RT014 2400 mm 5/8”
RT015 3000 mm 5/8”
RT021 1200 mm 3/4”
RT022 1500 mm 3/4”
RT023 1800 mm 3/4”
RT024 2400 mm 3/4”
RT025 3000 mm 3/4”
&RPSOLHV%6(18/
$FFHVVRULHV
&RXSOHUV
Earth Rod Couplers are designed for coupling two or more threaded
copper bonded earth rods or to couple with a driving stud during
installation. They ensure continual contact between the rods and are
used to aid deep rod driving.
'ULYLQJVWXG
Part no. Type
WHQVLOH VWHHO DUH GHVLJQHG
(DUWK5RG'ULYLQJVWXGVPDGHIURPKLJKWHQVLOHVWHHODUHGHVLJQHG
CT12 1/2” Coupling for driving earth rods by hand tools or power hammer. These
CT58 5/8 ” Coupling reusable studs are fixed on the top of the rod with the help of
CT34 3/4 ” Coupling coupler.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES
8QWKUHDGHGURGV
Bahra unthreaded copper bonded earth rods are customised rods without threading for specific
applications.
&RPSOLHV%6(1
&RPSOLHV8/
$FFHVVRULHV
EARTHING SYSTEMS
8
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES
6ROLG&RSSHUDQG6WDLQOHVVVWHHOHDUWKURGV
6ROLGFRSSHUURG
%DKUD6ROLGFRSSHUURGVDUHKLJKO\FRQGXFWLYHKDUGGUDZQIURPSXUHFRSSHU
cathodes. They are ideally used in conditions where soils are with high salt and moisture
content.
Tin plating is also done to reduce the risk of oxidation and to increase the life of the
rod. Physical connection to the rod can be done by mechanical clamps, compression or
BahraWeld exothermic welding system.
6ROLGFRSSHUURGNLW
9 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ELECTRODES
6WDLQOHVVVWHHOURG
6WDLQOHVVVWHHOURGVDUHXVHGWRRYHUFRPHJDOYDQLFFRUURVLRQZKLFKFDQEHFDXVHGE\
GLVVLPLODUPHWDOVRUFRPSRQHQWVKDYLQJGLIIHUHQWHOHFWURQHJDWLYLW\EXULHGRQDGMDFHQW
sides.
Bahra recommends stainless steel rods with high resistance to corrosion and anodic to
solid copper rods which likely react hostile with the buried metals.
6WDLQOHVV6WHHOURGNLW
$FFHVVRULHV
'ULYLQJVWXG
5HXVDEOH+LJKWHQVLOHVWUHQJWK&RPPRQIRUFRSSHU66URGV
&RXSOLQJGRZHO
%UDVV2SWLRQDOSKRVSKRUEURQ]H6WHHO
6WHHOVSLNH
0DGHIURP+LJK7HQVLOHVWUHQJWKVWHHO&RPPRQIRUFRSSHU66URGV
&RPSOLHV%6(1
&RPSOLHV8/
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
INSPECTION PITS
,QVSHFWLRQ3LW
3RO\PHULQVSHFWLRQSLW
Polymer inspection pits are highly recommended for areas
where higher loads are standard, with a load rating up
WR NJ SRO\PHU OLGV DUH UHFRPPHQGHG DQG IRU ORDG
UDWLQJVXSWRNJWKHVHSRO\PHUSLWVFDQEHXVHGZLWK
concrete lids.
&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&
&RQFUHWHLQVSHFWLRQSLW
%DKUD FRQFUHWH HDUWK LQVSHFWLRQ SLWV DUH WHVWHG DV SHU ,(&
ZLWKVWDQGLQJ NJ ORDG WHVWV 6WDLQOHVV 6WHHO
KRRNV E\ GHIDXOW LQ DOO WKH FRQFUHWH LQVSHFWLRQ SLWV
ensure less corrosion, durability and low maintenance.
&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&
$FFHVVRULHV
&RPSOLHV%6(1 ,(&
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH ROD ALTERNATIVES
(DUWKURGDOWHUQDWLYHV
6ROLGFRSSHUHDUWKSODWH
6ROLG &RSSHU (DUWK SODWHV IXOILO WKH HDUWKLQJ UHTXLUHPHQWV
where driving earth rods are not ideal due to hard rocks or
high resistive soils.
&RSSHUHDUWKODWWLFH0HVK0DW
&RSSHU HDUWK ODWWLFH0HVK0DW DUH PDQXIDFWXUHG IURP
KLJK FRQGXFWLYLW\ FRSSHU WDSHV DV SHU ,(& LW LV
UHFRPPHQGHGLQDUHDVZKHUHVWHS WRXFKSRWHQWLDOKD]DUGV
are high.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
BACKFILL COMPOUNDS
%DFNILOOFRPSRXQGV
%DKUD&(0²&RQGXFWDQFH(QKDQFHPHQW0L[
)RU HDUWKLQJ V\VWHPV WR EH HIIHFWLYH LW LV LPSRUWDQW WKDW
the electrical path for dissipation is with lower resistance.
BahraCEM is a backfilling compound that enhances the
conductance by actually increasing the surface area of the
earth rods, also comes with optionally premixed cement for
making long lasting, low maintenance conductive concretes.
%DKUDEHQWRQLWHPRLVWXUHUHWDLQLQJFOD\
Bentonite is a natural mineral mined from the earth, and
it is an economical backfill compound for earth rods. The
property of bentonite to absorb water more than ten times
of its volume and to retain it for a longer time helps in
maintaining lower soil resistivity. Bahra bentonites are first-
grade bentonites developed for earthing applications.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
Accessories
All earthing accessories or mechanical connection components are made from a special
FRSSHU DOOR\ WKDW IHDWXUHV KLJK PHFKDQLFDO VWUHQJWK DQG KLJK FRQGXFWLYLW\ )RU VRPH
parts considering their applications, forging process is used to increase the mechanical
VWUHQJWKDVVXULQJH[WUDKHDY\GXW\SHUIRUPDQFH)DVWHQHUVXVHGLQDOOWKHILWWLQJVDUH
RQO\ PDGH IURP VROLG FRSSHU DOOR\V 6SHFLDO *UDGH %UDVV 3KRVSKRU %URQ]H SXUH
FRSSHU DQGDUHQRWPDGHIURPFRPPHUFLDOFRSSHUEUDVVSODWHGVWHHO
%6 (1 ,(& 8/ DUH WKH SULPDU\ VWDQGDUGV FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR
accessories, and test reports can be provided on special request.
5RGWRWDSHFODPS W\SH$
5RGWRWDSHFODPS W\SH*
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
´8µEROWURGFODPS W\SH(
´8µEROWURGFODPS W\SH*89
Conductor
Part No Rod / rebar diameter
range
CRCU01 5⁄8” 16 mm 16-95 mm2
CRCU01 3⁄4” 20 mm 16-70 mm2
CRCU02 5⁄8” 16 mm 70-185 mm2
CRCU02 3⁄4” 20 mm 70-150 mm2
CRCU03 5⁄8” 16 mm 150-300 mm2
CRCU03 3⁄4” 20 mm 150-300 mm2
CRCU04 1” 25 mm 16-70 mm2
CRCU05 1” 25 mm 70-150 mm2
CRCU06 1” 25 mm 150-300 mm2
5RGWRFDEOHOXJFODPS W\SH%
5HEDUFODPS
Conductor Conductor
Part No Rebar diamater
diameter material
CRCR01 8 mm 8-18 mm Copper
CRCR02 8 mm 18-38 mm Copper
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
Pipe Clamp :
Pipe clamps are used over metal pipes to connect to earthing
conductors.
Part No Pipe diameter Conductor range
CPC1325 1⁄2” – 1” 13-25 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC3250 11⁄4 ”– 2” 32-50 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC6590 21⁄2 ”– 31⁄2 ” 65-90 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC100125 4” - 2” 100-125 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC150 6” 150 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC200 8” 200 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC250 10” 250 mm 25-95 mm2
CPC300 12” 300 mm 25-95 mm2
Earth Points :
Earth points are used when a steel rebar needs to be grounded or connected to the
GRZQFRQGXFWRU7KH\DUHXVHGZLWK8EROWFODPSVWKDWDUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHUHEDUZLWK
a conductor. Another end of the conductor is exothermically welded to an earth point
which is connected to a tape or down conductor.
Earth points are also available with standard, and customised pre-welded tails (Bahra
Green Yellow PVC earthing cable).
6LQJOH+ROH(DUWK3RLQW
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
6LQJOHKROHHDUWKSRLQWZLWKVLQJOHSUHZHOGHGWDLO
Part No Description
EP1T08 EP1N08 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T10 EP1N10 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T12 EP1N12 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP1T16 EP1N16 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
Part No Description
EP2T01 EP2N01 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
EP2T02 EP2N02 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
Part No Description
EP22T01 EP2T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable
EP22T02 EP2T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQW
)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQWZLWK6LQJOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO
Part No Description
EP4T01 EP4T01 earth point with pre-welded 500mm earth cable
)RXU+ROH(DUWK3RLQWZLWK'RXEOH3UH:HOGHG7DLO
Part No Description
EP42T01 EP4T01 earth point with pre-welded 2x500mm earth cable
7\SH++LJK6WUHQJWK6SOLWEROW&RQQHFWRU
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
Bonds:
B bond:
A bonding tool to connect tape to steel structure.
Maximum Tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CBB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CBB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium
CBB03 31 mm M10 Copper
Metalwork bond:
%RQGVVWHHOVWUXFWXUHVXSWRPP
Maximum Tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CMB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CMB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium
CMB03 31 mm M10 Copper
RWP bond :
A bonding tool to bond tape to rainwater pipes, handrails, etc.
Maximum tape
Part No Bolt size Conductor material
width
CRB01 26 mm M10 Copper
CRB02 26 mm M10 Aluminium
Watermain bond:
A bonding tool to bond tape to rainwater pipes, handrails, etc.
Maximum tape
Part No Conductor material Weight per unit
width
CWB01 26 mm Copper 0.26 Kg
Pipe Bond :
A bonding tool to bond duct and large diameter pipes.
Conductor Weight per
Part No Conductor diameter Pipe diameter
material unit
CWP01 8 mm 50-200 mm Copper 0.46 Kg
CWP02 8 mm 50-200 mm Aluminium 0.25 Kg
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS
Earth Bar:
Earth bar with single disconnecting link:
Copper Earth Bar:
Part No Description Length Weight per unit
EBCS06 6 way 475 mm 2.30 Kg
EBCS08 8 way 575 mm 2.70 Kg
EBCS10 10 way 725 mm 3.30 Kg
EBCS12 12 way 825 mm 3.70 Kg
EBCS14 14 way 925 mm 4.10 Kg
EBCS16 16 way 1025 mm 4.50 Kg
EBCS18 18 way 1125 mm 4.90 Kg
EBCS20 20 way 1275 mm 5.50 Kg
EBCS22 22 way 1375 mm 5.90 Kg
EBCS24 24 way 1475 mm 6.30 Kg
EBCS26 26 way 1575 mm 6.70 Kg
EBCS28 28 way 1725 mm 7.40 Kg
EBCS30 30 way 1825 mm 7.80 Kg
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS
(DUWK%DU:LWK7ZLQ'LVFRQQHFWLQJ/LQN
Copper Earth Bar
EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
22
EARTHING
EARTH BARS
&6KDSHG&RQQHFWRU
Copper :
Conductor range Conductor range
Part No
(Main) (Tap)
CC101510 10 mm2 1.5-10 mm2
23 EARTHING SYSTEMS
EARTHING
EARTH BARS
Tinned Copper :
Conductor range Conductor range
Part No
(Main) (Tap)
CT101510 10 mm2 1.5-10 mm2
EARTHING SYSTEMS
24
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Our Offerings
Bahra offers a comprehensive solution for lightning protection that includes,
6RLO5HVLVWLYLW\7HVWLQJ
5LVN$VVHVVPHQWDVSHU%6(1,(&
'HVLJQ
3URGXFWVXSSOLHV
26
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Risk Assessment:
2XU WHDP RI H[SHUWV ZLOO PDNH D FRPSOHWH ULVN DVVHVVPHQW IRU SURMHFWV DV SHU ,(&
ZLWK WKH VLWH VXUYH\ RU SURMHFW UHSRUWV ,QIRUPDWLRQ RQ JHRJUDSKLFDO ORFDWLRQ
soil resistivity, structure dimensions, the frequency of thunderstorms, wind speed,
people population, etc., are critical for assessing the risks and selecting the right level
of protection.
Design:
Upon selecting the level of protection, a detailed design for the project can be offered
with bill of materials, recommended practices, and installation guidelines. It ensures
optimum level of safety and protection for the people, equipment and structures.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
27
LIGHTNING
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Product Supplies:
%DKUDPDQXIDFWXUHVFRQGXFWRUVDQGFRPSRQHQWVIRU(DUWKLQJDQGOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
in its state of the art manufacturing facilities.
Product Portfolio
Our wide range of conductors and accessories ensures that every project need is
fulfilled to achieve the complete earthing and lightning protection. This catalog lists all
the standard products, In addition to this Bahra offers customized products designed
for particular applications.
28
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
Conductors:
EARTHING SYSTEMS
29
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
30
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
6RIW'UDZQ6WUDQGHG&RSSHU&DEOH
When an application needs conductors with higher flexibility, copper stranded
conductors are the best alternative to copper tapes. Also, stranded conductors offer a
larger surface area comparing to the solid conductors of the same cross-sectional area.
Larger the surface area, higher is the conduction as current flows on the surface of the
FRQGXFWRU 6NLQHIIHFW
Part No. Cross-sectional area Stranding No./mm Ø Nominal diameter Weight per metre
BCSS006 6 mm2 7/1.04 3.12 mm 0.05 Kg
BCSS016 16 mm2 7/1.70 5.10 mm 0.15 Kg
BCSS025 25 mm2 7/2.14 6.42 mm 0.23 Kg
BCSS035 35 mm2 7/2.52 7.56 mm 0.32 Kg
BCSS050 50 mm2 19/1.78 8.90 mm 0.43 Kg
BCS070 70 mm2 19/2.14 10.70 mm 0.62 Kg
BCSS095 95 mm2 19/2.52 12.60 mm 0.86 Kg
BCSS120 120 mm2 37/2.03 14.21 mm 1.09 Kg
BCSS150 150 mm2 37/2.25 15.75 mm 1.33 Kg
BCSS185 185 mm2 37/2.52 17.64 mm 1.67 Kg
BCSS240 240 mm2 61/2.25 20.25 mm 2.20 Kg
BCSS300 300 mm2 61/2.52 22.68 mm 2.76 Kg
BCSS400 400 mm2 61/2.85 25.65 mm 3.53 Kg
7LQQHG6RIW'UDZQ6WUDQGHG&RSSHU&DEOH
Tin plated conductors are highly resistant to oxidation
recommended for harsh environments.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
31
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Weight per metre Standard coil size
TCT01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 100 m
TCT02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
TCT03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 100 m
TCT04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
TCT05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 100 m
TCT06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 100 m
TCT07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 50 m
TCT08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 25 m
TCT09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 50 m
TCT10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 25 m
TCT11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 50 m
TCT12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 50 m
TCT15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
TCT16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 40 m
TCT17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 50 m
TCT19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 40 m
TCT20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 30 m
TCT21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 50 m
TCT22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 30 m
TCT23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 25 m
TCT24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 40 m
TCT25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 30 m
TCT26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 25 m
TCT27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 25 m
TCT28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 25 m
TCT29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 40 m
TCT30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 30 m
TCT31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 20 m
TCT32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 20 m
TCT33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 20 m
TCT34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 20 m
32
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
33
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
Bare Busbar:
7KH PXOWLSXUSRVH EDUH %XVEDUV DUH XVHG DV (DUWK %DU
Ground Busbar for connecting equipment’s ground
WHUPLQDOV7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQJURXQGLQJHWF)RU%XVEDUV
with insulation base and with connection terminals refer to
(DUWK%DUVVHFWLRQ
Part No. Conductor Size (X x Y) Weight per metre Length per Bar
BCB01 12.5 x 1.5 mm 0.17 Kg 4m
BCB02 12.5 x 3 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
BCB03 20 x 1.5 mm 0.27 Kg 4m
BCB04 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB05 20 x 3 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB06 25 x 1.5 mm 0.33 Kg 4m
BCB07 25 x 2 mm 0.49 Kg 4m
BCB08 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB09 25 x 3 mm 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB10 1” x 1⁄4 ” 0.67 Kg 4m
BCB11 25 x 4 mm 0.89 Kg 4m
BCB12 25 x 6 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB13 1” x 1⁄4 ” 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB14 30 x 2 mm 0.53 Kg 4m
BCB15 30 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
BCB16 30 x 4 mm 1.07 Kg 4m
BCB17 30 x 5 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB18 31 x 3 mm 0.83 Kg 4m
BCB19 31.5 x 4 mm 1.13 Kg 4m
BCB20 31 x 6 mm 1.65 Kg 4m
BCB21 38 x 3 mm 1.01 Kg 4m
BCB22 38 x 5 mm 1.69 Kg 4m
BCB23 38 x 6 mm 2.02 Kg 4m
BCB24 40 x 3 mm 1.06 Kg 4m
BCB25 40 x 4 mm 1.42 Kg 4m
BCB26 40 x 5 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
BCB27 40 x 6 mm 2.16 Kg 4m
BCB28 40 x 6.3 mm 2.24 Kg 4m
BCB29 50 x 3 mm 1.33 Kg 4m
BCB30 50 x 4 mm 1.78 Kg 4m
BCB31 50 x 5 mm 2.22 Kg 4m
BCB32 50 x 6 mm 2.68 Kg 4m
BCB33 50 x 6.3 mm 2.80 Kg 4m
BCB34 50 x 7 mm 3.08 Kg 4m
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
7LQQHG+DUG'UDZQ%DU
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
Color codes:
Y- Green Yellow
G- Green
1%ODFN
W-White
55HG
B-Blue
(*UH\
L-Lead covered
T-Tin plated
36
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
37
LIGHTNING
CONDUCTORS
3YF&RYHUHG&RSSHU6ROLG&LUFXODU
Offered from the portfolio of Bahra Cables, wires and
conductors specially made for earthing and lightning
ning
protection applications.
38
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS
$LU5RGV
Air rods on the roof are selected and positioned
oned based on the design and class of
protection required, a group of air rods make the air termination network for the
lightning protection system. Hard drawn externally threaded rods with knurling to fix
PXOWLSRLQWV PXOWLSRLQWVDUHVXSSOLHGDVVHSDUDWHDFFHVVRULHV
Part No. Rod length Rod diameter Thread size Conductor material
AR01 500 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR02 1000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR03 1500 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR04 2000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
AR05 3000 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
Accessories:
Maximum conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size
width
CAB01 15 mm M16 25 mm
CAB02 15 mm M16 50 mm
AR03 1500 mm 15 mm M16
AR04 2000 mm 15 mm M16
AR05 3000 mm 15 mm M16
)ODW&RQGXFWRU6DGGOH
Flat conductor saddles are used for connecting air rods with stranded conductors.
Conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size Conductor material
diameter
CAF01 50 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
CAF02 70 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
CAF03 95 mm 15 mm M16 Copper
EARTHING SYSTEMS
39
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES
5LGJH6DGGOH
6XLWDEOH WR LQVWDOO RQ ULGJHV RU XQHYHQ VXUIDFHV ZKHUH
standard air rod bases are not feasible to fix.
Maximum
Conductor
Part No. Rod diameter Thread size conductor
material
width
CAR01 15 mm M16 31 mm Copper
5RGEUDFNHWV
6XLWDEOHIRUDSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUHDLUURGVQHHGWREHPRXQWHGRQYHUWLFDOSODQHV
5RGWRFRQGXFWRUFRXSOLQJ
$LU URGV ZKHQ PRXQWHG RQ YHUWLFDO SODQHV ZLWK &5% 'RZQ
conductors such as tapes or stranded conductors can be
connected with a rod to conductor couplings.
Multiple points:
Multi points are packed as a kit of 3 rods and a multipoint base.
Additional fasteners are not required ergonomically fixes on
the knurling of air rods.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES
'&WDSHFOLS
'& WDSH FOLS PHFKDQLFDOO\ IL[HV WKH WDSHV RQ WR D ZDOO VXSSOLHG ZLWK FRXQWHUVXQN
screws.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES
Tape Clip:
Made from 99.99% pure copper, used for fixing tapes on flat surfaces or the walls.
Additional screws are required for fixing.
Cable saddle:
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES
1RQPHWDOOLF'&WDSHFOLS
Made from heavy duty PVC compound. A screw is needed for fixing the base, no
additional screws required for closing the clip.
6TXDUHWDSHFODPS
Clamps are supplied with countersunk screws, Additional screws are required for fixing
the bases for all square clamps.
EARTHING SYSTEMS
LIGHTNING
AIR RODS - ACCESSORIES
EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
BahraWeld
BahraWeld is an exothermic welding system that does not require an external source for
heating. Exothermic welding is preferred where highly conductive, strong connections
are required, these connections are permanent and do not loosen over time and
withstands under repeated fault conditions.
Molds
Molds are made from optimum density graphite that lasts for 50 to 80 welds. The
density of graphite and design of mold is selected based on various factors,
/LIHRIPROGVWRZLWKVWDQGUHSHWLWLYHRSHQLQJFORVLQJILULQJDQGFOHDQLQJF\FOHVIRU
50-80 connections. (Higher the density of graphite, higher is the life)
7LPHIRUZHOGGLVVLSDWLRQ /RZHUWKHGHQVLW\RIJUDSKLWHIDVWHULVWKHKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQ
7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQVL]HDQGFRPSOH[LW\RIFRQQHFWLRQVHWF
,QDGGLWLRQWRWKHVWDQGDUGPROGVOLVWHGLQWKLVFDWDORJ%DKUD:(/'RIIHUVDZLGHUDQJH
RIFXVWRPL]HGPROGVIRUSRZHUVWDWLRQVUDLOZD\VDQGRWKHUXQLTXHDSSOLFDWLRQV
Weld Metal
Weld metals are available in the form of powders and tablets. Weld metals are made
IURPFRSSHUDQGDOXPLQLXPR[LGHV7KHFRQWHQWRIPHWDOYDULHVEDVHGRQWKHVL]HDQG
W\SHRIWKHMRLQWUHTXLUHG,JQLWLRQ6WDUWLQJSRZGHULVDQH[SORVLYHZKLFKLQLWLDWHVWKH
combustion process of weld metal.
Tools
33(VVXFKDVJORYHVJRJJOHVDUHPDQGDWRU\IRUWKH%DKUD:(/'SURFHVV
+DQGOH FODPSV DUH UHTXLUHG IRU RSHQLQJ FORVLQJ DQG WR KROG WKH JUDSKLWH PROGV
during the welding process.
)OLQWJXQVRUHOHFWURQLFLJQLWLRQWRROVDUHUHTXLUHGIRULQLWLDWLQJWKHZHOGLQJSURFHVV
6FUDSHU%UXVKDQGRWKHUFOHDQLQJWRROVDUHQHHGHGWRFOHDQWKHPROGVFRQGXFWRUV
and joints.
46 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
47
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm
48 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
20 x 3 45W10 BB7-M4-203 HK4
25 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-253 HK4
25 x 4 90W10 BB7-M4-254 HK4
25 x 6 150W10 BB7-M4-256 HK4
30 x 2 65W10 BB7-M4-302 HK4
30 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-303 HK4
30 x 4 90W10 BB7-M4-304 HK4
30 x 5 115W10 BB7-M4-305 HK4
31 x 3 65W10 BB7-M4-313 HK4
31 x 6 150W10 BB7-M4-316 HK4
38 x 3 90W10 BB7-M4-383 HK4
38 x 5 150W10 BB7-M4-385 HK4
38 x 6 200W10 BB7-M4-386 HK4
40 x 3 90W10 BB7-M4-403 HK4
40 x 4 115W10 BB7-M4-404 HK4
40 x 5 150W10 BB7-M4-405 HK4
40 x 6 200W10 BB7-M4-406 HK4
50 x 3 150W10 BB7-M5-503 HK5
50 x 4 200W10 BB7-M5-504 HK5
50 x 5 200W10 BB7-M5-505 HK5
50 x 6 250W10 BB7-M5-506 HK5
EARTHING SYSTEMS
49
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm
50 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm mm x mm
EARTHING SYSTEMS
51
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127203 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127253 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 4 90W10 BR2-M4-127254 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR2-M4-127302 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127303 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 31 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127313 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 38 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127383 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 40 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-127403 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-127503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-142203 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR2-M4-142253 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 4 115W10 BR2-M4-142254 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 6 150W10 BR2-M4-142256 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR2-M4-142302 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-142303 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 4 150W10 BR2-M4-142304 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142305 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 3 115W10 BR2-M4-142313 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 6 150W10 BR2-M4-142316 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-142383 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142385 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-142386 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-142403 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 4 150W10 BR2-M4-142404 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 5 150W10 BR2-M4-142405 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-142406 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-142503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-142504 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-142505 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-142506 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 20 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172203 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172253 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-172254 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 x 6 200W10 BR2-M4-172256 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 2 150W10 BR2-M4-172302 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 3 150W10 BR2-M4-172303 HK4
52 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 4 250W10 BR2-M4-172304 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 30 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172305 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 31 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172313 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 31 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172316 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172383 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172385 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 38 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172386 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 3 200W10 BR2-M4-172403 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 4 200W10 BR2-M4-172404 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 5 200W10 BR2-M4-172405 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 40 x 6 250W10 BR2-M4-172406 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 3 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172503 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 4 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172504 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172505 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BR2-M5-172506 HK5
%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127203 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127253 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 x 4 90W10 BR7-M4-127254 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 2 90W10 BR7-M4-127302 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 30 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127303 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 31 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127313 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 38 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127383 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 40 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-127403 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-127503 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 x 6 115W10 BR7-M4-127503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 20 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-142203 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 3 90W10 BR7-M4-142253 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 4 115W10 BR7-M4-142254 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 x 6 115W10 BR7-M4-142256 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 2 115W10 BR7-M4-142302 HK4
EARTHING SYSTEMS
53
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR(DUWK5RG%53DUW
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
Ø Ø
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142303 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 4 150W10 BR7-M4-142304 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 30 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142305 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142313 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 31 x 6 150W10 BR7-M4-142316 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 3 1115W10 BR7-M4-142383 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142385 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 38 x 6 200W10 BR7-M4-142386 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 3 115W10 BR7-M4-142403 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 4 150W10 BR7-M4-142404 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 5 150W10 BR7-M4-142405 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 40 x 6 200W10 BR7-M4-142406 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 3 150W10 BR7-M4-142503 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 4 200W10 BR7-M4-142504 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 x 5 200W10 BR7-M4-142505 HK4
14.2 8⁄5 “ 50 x 6 200W10 BR-7M142506-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 20 x 3 115W10 BR-7M172203-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 3 150W10 BR-7M172253-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 4 150W10 BR-7M172254-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 25 x 6 200W10 BR-7M172256-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 2 150W10 BR-7M172302-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 3 150W10 BR-7M172303-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 4 250W10 BR-7M172304-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 30 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172305-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 31 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172313-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 31 x 6 200W10 BR-7M172316-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172383-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172385-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 38 x 6 250W10 BR-7M172386-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 3 200W10 BR-7M172403-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 4 200W10 BR-7M172404-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 5 200W10 BR-7M172405-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 40 x 6 250W10 BR-7M172406-4 HK4
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 3 250W10 BR-7M172503-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 4 250W10 BR-7M172504-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 5 2 x 150W10 BR-7M172505-5 HK5
17.2 4⁄3 “ 50 x 6 2 x 150W10 BR-7M172506-5 HK5
54 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
EARTHING SYSTEMS
55
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
56 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
%DUWR6WHHO6XUIDFH%6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm x mm
EARTHING SYSTEMS
57
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm
[6
58 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm
EARTHING SYSTEMS
59
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2 mm x mm
[6
60 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
[6
EARTHING SYSTEMS
61
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
62 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
63
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
64 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
EARTHING SYSTEMS
65
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
66 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 65W10 CR1-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 65W10 CR1-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 90W10 CR1-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR1-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 115W10 CR1-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 115W10 CR1-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 150W10 CR1-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 65W10 CR1-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 65W10 CR1-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 65W10 CR1-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 90W10 CR1-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR1-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 90W10 CR1-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 90W10 CR1-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 90W10 CR1-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 115W10 CR1-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 115W10 CR1-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 150W10 CR1-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 200W10 CR1-M4-172300 HK4
EARTHING SYSTEMS
67
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 90W10 CR2-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR2-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 90W10 CR2-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 90W10 CR2-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 90W10 CR2-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 115W10 CR2-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 200W10 CR2-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 200W10 CR2-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 250W10 CR2-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 90W10 CR2-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 90W10 CR2-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 90W10 CR2-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 115W10 CR2-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR2-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 115W10 CR2-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 115W10 CR2-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 150W10 CR2-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 200W10 CR2-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 200W10 CR2-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 250W10 CR2-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 150W10 CR2-M5-172300 HK5
68 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 115W10 CR3-M9-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 115W10 CR3-M9-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 150W10 CR3-M9-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 115W10 CR3-M9-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 115W10 CR3-M9-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 150W10 CR3-M9-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 150W10 CR3-M9-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 200W10 CR3-M9-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR3-M9-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 90W10 CR3-M9-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 90W10 CR3-M9-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 90W10 CR3-M9-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 115W10 CR3-M9-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR3-M9-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 150W10 CR3-M9-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 150W10 CR3-M9-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 200W10 CR3-M9-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 250W10 CR3-M9-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR3-10-172185 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 250W10 CR3-10-172240 HK5
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 3x 300W10 CR3-10-172300 HK5
[6
EARTHING SYSTEMS
69
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
)UDPH
)UDPHVFRPHDGGLWLRQLQWRWKHSURFHVVWRKDQGOHFODPSZKLOHXVLQJWKUHHPROGSDUWV
Part No Description
HKF4 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK4
HKF5 Frame for use with Handle Clamp HK5
70 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 150W10 CR17-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 200W10 CR17-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 90W10 CR17-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 90W10 CR17-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 90W10 CR17-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 115W10 CR17-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR17-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 200W10 CR17-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 250W10 CR17-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 250W10 CR17-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR17-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 115W10 CR17-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 115W10 CR17-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 115W10 CR17-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 150W10 CR17-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 150W10 CR17-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 200W10 CR17-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 250W10 CR17-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 250W10 CR17-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 150W10 CR17-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR17-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 250W10 CR17-M5-172300 HK5
EARTHING SYSTEMS
71
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A B
C
mm inches Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø Ø
12.7 1⁄2 “ 16* 90W10 CR24-M4-12716 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 25 90W10 CR24-M4-12725 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 35 90W10 CR24-M4-12735 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 50 115W10 CR24-M4-12750 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 8 mm Ø 115W10 CR24-M4-1278SC HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 70 150W10 CR24-M4-12770 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 95 200W10 CR24-M4-12795 HK4
12.7 1⁄2 “ 120 250W10 CR24-M4-127120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 16* 115W10 CR24-M4-14216 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 25 115W10 CR24-M4-14225 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 35 115W10 CR24-M4-14235 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 50 200W10 CR24-M4-14250 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 8 mm Ø 200W10 CR24-M4-1428SC HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 70 250W10 CR24-M4-14270 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 95 250W10 CR24-M4-14295 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 120 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-142120 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 150 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-142150 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-142185 HK4
14.2 5⁄8 “ 240 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-142240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 16* 115W10 CR24-M4-17216 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 25 115W10 CR24-M4-17225 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 35 115W10 CR24-M4-17235 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 50 250W10 CR24-M4-17250 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 8 mm Ø 250W10 CR24-M4-1728SC HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 70 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-17270 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 95 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-17295 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 120 2 x 150W10 CR24-M4-172120 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 150 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-172150 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 185 2 x 200W10 CR24-M4-172185 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 240 2 x 250W10 CR24-M4-172240 HK4
17.2 3⁄4 “ 300 2 x 250W10 CR24-M5-172300 HK5
72 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE-M1-3-16 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE-M1-3-25 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE-M1-3-35 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE-M1-3-8SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE-M1-3-50 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE-M1-3-10SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE-M1-3-70 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE-M1-3-95 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE-M1-3-120 HK3-B PACK-A
&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
16 16* 90W10 CRE2-M4-16R16 HK4
16 25 90W10 CRE2-M4-61R25 HK4
16 35 90W10 CRE2-M4-16R35 HK4
16 8 mm Ø 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R8SC HK4
16 50 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R50 HK4
16 10 mm Ø 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R10SC HK4
16 70 115W10 CRE2-M4-16R70 HK4
16 95 150W10 CRE2-M4-16R95 HK4
16 120 150W10 CRE2-M4-16R120 HK4
16 150 200W10 CRE-2M16-4R150 HK4
16 185 200W10 CRE-2M16-4R185 HK4
16 240 250W10 CRE-2M16-4R240 HK4
16 300 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M16-4R300 HK4
18 16* 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R16 HK4
18 25 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R25 HK4
18 35 115W10 CRE-2M18-4R35 HK4
18 8 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R8SC HK4
18 50 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R50 HK4
18 10 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R10SC HK4
18 70 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R70 HK4
18 95 150W10 CRE-2M18-4R95 HK4
EARTHING SYSTEMS
73
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
18 120 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R120 HK4
18 150 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R150 HK4
18 185 200W10 CRE2-M4-18R185 HK4
18 240 250W10 CRE2-M4-18R240 HK4
18 300 2 x 150W10 CRE2-M4-18R300 HK4
20 16* 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R16 HK4
20 25 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R25 HK4
20 35 115W10 CRE2-M4-20R35 HK4
20 8 mm Ø 150W10 CRE2-M4-20R8SC HK4
20 50 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R50 HK4
20 10 mm Ø 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R10SC HK4
20 70 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R70 HK4
20 95 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R95 HK4
20 120 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R120 HK4
20 150 200W10 CRE-2M20-4R150 HK4
20 185 250W10 CRE-2M20-4R185 HK4
20 240 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M20-4R240 HK4
20 300 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M20-5R300 HK5
25 16* 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R16 HK4
25 25 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R25 HK4
25 35 250W10 CRE-2M25-4R35 HK4
25 8 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R8SC HK4
25 50 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R50 HK4
25 10 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R10SC HK4
25 70 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R70 HK4
25 95 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M25-4R95 HK4
25 120 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M25-4R120 HK4
25 150 2 X 200W10 CRE-2M25-4R150 HK4
25 185 2 X 250W10 CRE-2M25-5R185 HK5
25 240 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M25-5R240 HK5
25 300 3 x 200W10 CRE-2M25-5R300 HK5
30 16* 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R16 HK4
30 25 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R25 HK4
30 35 250W10 CRE-2M30-4R35 HK4
30 8 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R8SC HK4
30 50 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R50 HK4
74 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR5HLQIRUFLQJ%DU&5(3DUW
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm 2
Ø
30 10 mm Ø 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R10SC HK4
30 70 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-4R70 HK4
30 95 2 x 150W10 CRE-2M30-5R95 HK5
30 120 2 x 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R120 HK5
30 150 2 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R150 HK5
30 185 2 X 250W10 CRE-2M30-5R185 HK5
30 240 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R240 HK5
30 300 3 X 200W10 CRE-2M30-5R300 HK5
[6
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE3-3-3-16 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE3-3-25 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE3-3-3-35 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE3-3-8SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE3-3-50 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE3-3-10SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE3-3-70 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE3-3-95 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE3-3-120 HK3-A PACK-A
EARTHING SYSTEMS
75
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE6-3-3-16 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE6-3-25 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE6-3-3-35 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 65W10 CRE6-3-8SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 50 65W10 CRE6-3-50 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE6-3-10SC HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE6-3-70 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE6-3-95 HK3-A PACK-A
10-40 120 115W10 CRE6-3-120 HK3-A PACK-A
A
B
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle Packing
mm 2
Ø
10-40 16* 45W10 CRE17-3-3-16 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 25 45W10 CRE17-3-25 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 35 45W10 CRE17-3-3-35 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 8 mm Ø 90W10 CRE17-3-8SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 50 90W10 CRE17-3-50 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 10 mm Ø 90W10 CRE17-3-10SC HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 70 90W10 CRE17-3-70 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 95 90W10 CRE17-3-95 HK3-B PACK-A
10-40 120 90W10 CRE17-3-120 HK3-B PACK-A
76 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
EARTHING SYSTEMS
77
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
78 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
EARTHING SYSTEMS
79
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
A
Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
80 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
B
A
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø
2.5 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-2.5-A HK1
2.5 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-2.5-B HK1
4 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-M4-A HK1
4 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-M4-B HK1
6 <125 15W10 CS32-M1-6-A HK1
6 >125 15W10 CS32-M1-6-B HK1
10 <125 25W10 CS32-M1-10-A HK1
10 >125 25W10 CS32-M1-10-B HK1
16 <125 45W10 CS32-M2-16-A HK2
16 >125 45W10 CS32-M2-16-B HK2
25 <70 25W10 CS32-M1-25-C HK1
25 70-165 25W10 CS32-M1-25-D HK1
25 >165 25W10 CS32-M1-25-E HK1
35 <70 45W10 CS32-M2-35-C HK2
35 70-165 45W10 CS32-M2-35-D HK2
35 165-250 45W10 CS32-M2-35-F HK2
35 >250 45W10 CS32-M2-35-G HK2
50 <70 45W10 CS32-M2-50-C HK2
50 <125 45W10 CS32-M2-50-D HK2
50 70-165 45W10 CS32-M2-50-F HK2
50 165-250 45W10 CS32-M2-50-G HK2
70 <70 65W10 CS32-M2-70-C HK2
70 70-165 65W10 CS32-M2-70-D HK2
70 165-250 65W10 CS32-M2-70-F HK2
70 >250 65W10 CS32-M2-70-G HK2
EARTHING SYSTEMS
81
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
&DEOHWR6WHHO6XUIDFH 3LSH&6
B
A
mm Weld Metal Mold Handle
mm2
Ø
2.5 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-2.5-A HK2
2.5 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-2.5-B HK2
4 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-M4-A HK2
4 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-M4-B HK2
6 <125 15W10 CS34-M2-6-A HK2
6 >125 15W10 CS34-M2-6-B HK2
10 <125 32W10 CS34-M2-10-A HK2
10 >125 45W10 CS34-M2-10-B HK2
16 <125 45W10 CS34-M2-16-A HK2
16 >125 45W10 CS34-M2-16-B HK2
25 <70 32W10 CS34-M1-25-C HK2
25 70-165 32W10 CS34-M1-25-D HK2
25 >165 32W10 CS34-M1-25-E HK2
35 <70 45W10 CS34-M2-35-C HK2
35 70-165 45W10 CS34-M2-35-D HK2
35 165-250 45W10 CS34-M2-35-F HK2
35 >250 45W10 CS34-M2-35-G HK2
50 <70 65W10 CS34-M2-50-C HK2
50 70-165 65W10 CS34-M2-50-D HK2
50 165-250 65W10 CS34-M2-50-F HK2
50 >250 65W10 CS34-M2-50-G HK2
6WXGWR6WHHO6XUIDFH56
82 EARTHING SYSTEMS
BAHRAWELD
TYPES OF CONNECTIONS
Handle Clamps :
)UDPHV
Accessories:
EARTHING SYSTEMS
83
)RU0RUH,QIRUPDWLRQ
3OHDVH9LVLW
ZZZEDKUDFDEOHVFRPHDUWKLQJ
J0902003 Cover 2008 10/12/08 10:35 Page 1
Welcome to our
latest Earthing
& Lightning
Protection catalogue
We hope you will find your
catalogue both informative
and easy to use. We have
included much more
information within the tables
and drawings to help you
select the products you require.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 3
CONTENTS
Introduction 2–3
Earthing 9 – 40
Lightning Protection 41 – 86
Conductors 87 – 104
0A. N. WALLIS
A. N. WALLIS
& Co. Ltd
& Co.
• Tel
Ltd +44
• Tel
(0)115
+44 (0)115
927 1721
927•1721
Fax +44
• Fax
(0)115
+44 (0)115
875 6630
875•6630
E-mail
• E-mail
info@an-wallis.com
info@an-wallis.com
• Website
• Website
www.an-wallis.com 1
www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 4
INTRODUCTION
2 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 5
INTRODUCTION
With extensive experience and technical expertise, we can also The Wallis Cu-nnect exothermic welding system is a simple,
design and advise on earthing and structural lightning protection economical method of making permanent, very high quality
schemes to suit individual requirements. We have designed and electrical connections mainly between copper to copper or
supplied materials for projects including high-rise commercial copper to steel. The system is completely portable and
and residential buildings, bridges, telecommunication requires no outside source of power or heat.
installations, transmission lines and substations.
We also offer a comprehensive range of surge protection
Such is our reputation for high standards that Wallis devices for mains power, data, signal and telephone lines, to
equipment is used around the world, including the Middle protect sensitive electronic equipment from damage caused
East and Far East, with stocking distributors in key areas. by transient over-voltages.
If you’ve selected Wallis for structural lightning protection Please contact our sales office for further details.
products, why not make us your choice for exothermic
welding and surge protection equipment too.
Application
Example
Material -
Specification
& Finishes
Technical
Drawing
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 3
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 6
PRODUCT LOCATOR
4 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 7
PRODUCT LOCATOR
KEY
Item Product Page Item Product Page
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 5
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 8
A ‘G’ Type 21
‘A’ Clamps 20 ‘MV’ Type 66
Adhesive DC Clips 54 ‘U’ Bolt 22
Air Rod Brackets, Side Mounting 47 Interface Test 67
Air Rod Saddles Metalwork Bonding 68
Cable 74 Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Flat 46 Oblong Test 58
Free-Standing 85 Parallel Groove 35
Light Duty 45 Plate Type Test 59
Multi-Purpose 62 Screw Down Test
Ridge 46 Split Connector 23
Air Rods 44, 62, 72, 84 Square Cable 77
Air Terminal Saddles Square Tape 57
Cable 74 ‘T’ Connector 66
Flat 46 Tower Earth 35, 70, 78
Free-Standing 85 Cleaning Solution 55
Light Duty 45 Clips
Multi-Purpose 62 Adhesive DC 54
Ridge 46 Bitumen Felt DC 55
Air Terminals 44, 62, 72, 84 Metallic Cable 76
Aluminium Conductors, Solid Circular 98-99 Metallic Conductor 64
Aluminium Tapes 96 Metallic DC 48
Anti-Vandal Non-Metallic DC 49
Cable Guards 103 Non-Metallic DC with Plug 50
Tape Guards 97 Non-Metallic Down Conductor 65
One Hole 64
Push-In Roof Conductor 65
B Tape 51
‘B’ Bonds 60, 69, 70
Weldable DC 53
Back Plate Holdfasts 56
Compound, Low-Resistance Earthing 26
Bare
Compression Connectors
Aluminium Tapes 96
‘C’ Crimp 38
Copper Flat Braids 95
Terminals 39, 40
Copper Round Braids 104
Concrete
Copper Tapes 90
Bases 86
Hard Drawn Copper Bars 94
Earth Inspection Housings 29
Perforated Copper Tape 97
Conductors
Solid Circular Conductors 98-99
Solid Circular 98-99
Stranded Copper Conductors 100
Stranded Copper 100-103
Bentonite 26
Connectors
Bi-Metallic Connectors 60, 68
‘C’ Crimp 38
Bitumen Felt
‘T’ Clamp 66
DC Clips 55
Bi-Metallic 60, 68
Roll 82
Cable to Tape 78
Blocks, Earth 34
Solid Circular to Tape 67
Bonding Clamps
Universal Cable 77
‘B’ Bonds 60
Copperbond Earth Rods 12
Circular ‘B’ Bonds 69
Copper Bars 94
Metalwork Bonding 68
Copper Conductors
Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Solid Circular 98-99
Parallel Groove 35
Stranded 100-103
Rainwater Pipe 61, 69
Copper Braids
Tower Earth 35, 70, 78
Flat 95
Watermain Pipe Bond 61
Round 104
Bonding Points 31
Copper Nails, Round Head 111
Bosses, Earth 34
Copper Tapes
Brackets, Side Mounting Air Rod 47, 73
Bare 90
Braid Bonds 36
Green & Yellow PVC Insulated 92
Braids
Lead Covered 92
Flat 95
LSOH Covered 92
Round 104
Perforated Bare 97
PVC Covered 91
C Tinned 93
‘C’ Crimp Connectors 38
Couplings
Cable Guards, Anti-Vandal 103
Rod to Cable 74
Cable Shoes 74
Rod to Tape 47
Cable to Tape Connectors 78
Threaded 13
Circular ‘B’ Bonds 69
Countersunk
Circular Conductors 98-99
Machine Screws 110
Circular Conductor Shoes 71
Wood Screws 109
Clamps
Coupling Dowels 15, 17
‘A’ Type 20
Crimp Connectors 38
‘B’ Bonds 60
Cross-Profile Galvanised Steel Earth Rod 19
6 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 9
D Cross-Profile 19
DC Clips Galvanised Steel Earth Rod Set 18
Adhesive DC 54 Glazing Bar Holdfasts 56
Bitumen Felt DC 55 Green & Yellow Insulating Tape 82
Metallic 48 Green & Yellow PVC Insulated
Non-Metallic DC 49 Copper Tapes 92
Non-Metallic DC with Plug 50 Stranded Copper Conductors 101
Non-Metallic Down Conductor 65 Guards, Anti-Vandal
Push-In Roof Conductor 65 Cable 103
Weldable DC 53 Tape 97
Disconnecting Link 33
Down Conductor Clips, Non-Metallic 65 H
Dowels Heavy Duty Earth Inspection Housings 27
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Hexagon
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Head Set Screws 106-107
Driving Heads Nuts 107
for Copperbond Earth Rods 13 Hard Drawn Copper Bars 94
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Holdfasts
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Back Plate 56
Driving Spikes Glazing Bar 56
for Solid Copper Earth Rods 15 Pyramid 71
for Stainless Steel Earth Rods 17 Slate 52, 63
E I
Earth Bar Insulators 30 Inhibiting Compound 80
Earth Bar Link 33 Inspection Housings
Earth Bars Concrete 29
for Earth Inspection Housings 27, 28, 29 Heavy Duty 27
Standard Range 32, 33 Light Duty 28
Static 37 Inspection Housing Earth Bars
Earth Blocks 34 Concrete 29
Earth Bonding Points 31 Heavy Duty 27
Earth Bosses 34 Light Duty 28
Earth Clamps Insulators 30
‘A’ Type 20 Insulating Tape Green & Yellow 82
‘G’ Type 21 Interceptor Plates 79
‘U’ Bolt Type 22 Interface Test Clamps 67
Split Connector Type 24
Parallel Groove Type 35 J
Tower Earth Type 35, 70 Junction Clamps 57, 59, 66, 67, 77, 78
Earth Inspection Housings
Concrete 29 L
Heavy Duty Plastic 27 Lattice Mats 25
Light Duty Plastic 28 Lead Covered
Earth Receptacle, Static 37 Copper Tapes 92
Earth Rod Clamps Stranded Copper Conductors 103
‘A’ Type 20 Light Duty
‘G’ Type 21 Air Rod Saddles 45
‘U’ Bolt Type 22 Earth Inspection Housings 28
Split Connector Type 24 Link, Disconnecting 33
Earth Rod Seals 30 Low-Resistance Earthing Compound 26
Earth Plates, Solid Copper 25 LSOH Covered Copper Tapes 92
Earth Rods
Copperbond 12
Solid Copper 14 M
Stainless Steel 16 ‘MV’ Clamps 66
Earthing Compound Mats, Solid Copper Lattice 25
Bentonite 26 Metallic Cable Clips 76
Low-Resistance 26 Metallic Conductor Clips 64
Eyebolts 37 Metallic DC Clips 48
Metalwork Bonding Clamps 68
Multi-Point 45, 72
F Multi-Purpose ‘B’ Bonds 70
Flat Air Rod Saddles 46
Multi-Purpose Air Rod Saddles 62
Flat
Braids 95
Washers 108 N
Flexible Copper Braid Bonds 36 Nails, Copper Round Head 111
Flux 83 Non-Metallic DC Clips 49
Free-Standing Air Terminal Supports 85 Non-Metallic DC Clips with Plug 50
Free-Standing Air Terminals 84 Non-Metallic Down Conductor Clips 65
G O
Oblong Test Clamps 58
‘G’ Clamps 21
One Hole Cable Clips 75
Galvanised Steel Earth Rods
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 7
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 10
8 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 11
EARTHING CONTENTS
EARTHING
Introduction 10 – 11
Earthing Products 20 – 36
Compression Connectors 38 – 40
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 9
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:42 Page 12
EARTHING INTRODUCTION
10 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 13
EARTHING INTRODUCTION
Where deep driving is not possible shorter rods with a larger The information contained in this
diameter can be used; copper earth mats and earth plates section is intended as a guide and
can be used in place of earth rods. should not be used to perform
designs. A.N.Wallis does not
A “crow’s foot” configuration can be used where parallel
accept responsibility for errors or
connection is not possible.
omissions. Detailed information on
Where high resistance soil conditions are a problem soil earthing design is contained in
conditioning agents can be used to internationally recognised
backfill rod holes. Conductive concrete European and British earthing
can be used to backfill an earth mat. Both standards.
effectively increase an electrodes cross
sectional area and therefore reduce its
resistance to earth.
The international standards also specify
the recommended materials used for all
earthing conductors and their dimensions.
Equipotential Bonding
It is common practice to use the buildings natural structural
steelwork and bonding it to the LPS to further improve its
ability to conduct lightning and fault currents to earth; prior
permission may be required.
Joints
Joints should be
mechanically effective,
all joints other than
welded ones are a
potential discontinuity,
and care should be
taken to ensure
contact surfaces are
clean and that fixing
clamps are tight and well protected from corrosion, which
can occur if dissimilar metals are joined. Ideally there should
be as few joints as possible in an earthing design.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 11
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 14
Unthreaded
L1 D L1
Thread
Size
12 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 15
Threaded Couplings
These Wallis high-strength couplings are used for joining copperbond
threaded earth rods together. They facilitate deep driving and ensure
continual contact between the rods both during and after installation.
The coupling also protects the earth rod threads during installation with the
threaded driving head. There is a lead-in for ease of assembly and a hex on the
outside for grip and keeping the coupling tight when driving into the ground.
All Wallis couplings are manufactured from a high copper content alloy 3/4"
ensuring excellent corrosion resistance.
5/8"
Type L D Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
1 /2 ” 70 20 0.07 ERBO 12
5 /8 ” 70 20 0.09 25 ERBO 16
3 /4 ” 80 24 0.14 ERBO 20
Material: Steel.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 13
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 16
D Thread
Size
L1 L1
14 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 17
Driving Heads
The driving head protects the internal thread and the top of the solid
copper earth rod from damage when being driven into the ground.
Material: Steel.
L
Thread
Size D
L1
Driving Spikes
These driving spikes enable solid copper earth rods to be driven easily
into the ground.
D L Thread L1 Unit Pack Part
mm mm Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
16 42 M10 20 0.03 ERCS 16
20 51 M10 20 0.06 25 ERCS 20
25 60 M12 25 0.10 ERCS 25
Thread D
Size
L1
Coupling Dowels
The phosphor bronze coupling dowel is used for joining solid copper
earth rods together.
Thread
Size
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 15
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 18
D Thread
Size
L1 L1
16 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 19
Driving Heads
The driving head protects the internal thread and the top of the stainless
steel earth rod from damage when being driven into the ground.
Material: Steel. L
Thread
Size D
L1
Driving Spikes
These driving spikes enable stainless steel earth rods to be driven easily
into the ground.
Material: Steel. L
ERCS 16
Thread D
Size
L1
Coupling Dowels
The stainless steel coupling dowel is used for joining stainless steel
earth rods together.
Thread
Size
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 17
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 20
D Thread
Size
Thread
Size
L1 L2
18 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 21
3 or 5
50 3 or 5
50
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 19
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 22
Material: Aluminium Bronze with M10 x 25mm Phosphor Bronze Set Screw.
20 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 23
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 21
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 24
ERU 025
Material: Gunmetal plate with M10 threaded Copper ‘U’ Bolt.
22 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 25
Re-bar Clamps
This versatile range of Wallis Re-bar clamps is used to connect re-bar to
re-bar or re-bar to stranded cable. They provide a strong mechanical
connection along with excellent resistance to corrosion.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 23
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 26
24 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:43 Page 27
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 25
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 28
Low
Resistance
Earthing
Compound
Bentonite
Bentonite is a moisture retaining clay used as an earth electrode back-fill
to help lower soil resistivity. The clay is a sodium activated montmorillonite,
which when mixed with water swells to many times its original dry volume.
Bentonite can be supplied in granular or powder form. The granular
form is easier to handle as the powder can cause dust in windy
conditions. Granular is the preferred option for filling trenches as the
substance can be mixed in the trench. Powder is the preferred option
for pouring into bore holes to ensure the mixture is a thin enough
consistency to reach the bottom of the hole.
The typical expansion ratio when mixed with water is 2:1.
Bentonite
26 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 29
H1
EPP 002 W
H
H1
W1
W
L1
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 27
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 30
Material: Polypropylene.
ERH 21
W1
L1
L W
28 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 31
Material: Concrete.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 29
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 32
Insulators
These Wallis insulators are supplied with or without studs and locking
nuts.
Type Thread W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
Insulator only 0.08 EBI 001
Insulator with 2 M10 40 40 10
studs & 3 nuts 0.16 EBI 002
EBI 001
EBI 002 Material: Reinforced Polyester.
Thread Size
Material: Plastic.
30 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 33
Material: Gunmetal.
L
EGP 04
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 31
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 34
Earth Bars
Earth bars are available in a variety of sizes and specifications. Our
standard earth bars are shown in the tables below. Special earth
bars manufactured to customer requirements are also available.
Recommended fixing by countersunk wood screw 11/2” x No. 12
and No. 12 wall plug.
Earth Bars
No. L W H Unit Pack Part
Terminations mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
6 400 2.00 EBC 006
8 500 2.30 EBC 008
L W
32 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 35
Material:
Bar: 50 x 6mm hard drawn copper bar to BS EN 13601.
Base: Plastic.
Fittings: M10 Hexagon Head Set Screws, Nuts & Washers.
Disconnecting Link
The disconnecting link provides a temporary break in the earth
connection to allow inspection and testing of the earth electrode.
W
L
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 33
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 36
Earth Blocks
These Wallis blocks allow earth conductor termination, or live conductor
termination with a suitable, fully insulated housing.
Earth Bosses
The earth boss is designed to provide an earth connection point on a
steel structure. The boss is welded onto steel vessels, tanks and other
structures
D L Thread Unit Pack Part
mm mm Size Weight Quantity Number
kg
50 50 0.77 EPB 5050
50 40 0.62 EPB 5040
50 30 M10 0.47 1 EPB 5030
40 40 0.47 EPB 4040
40 30 0.35 EPB 4030
Thread
D Size
34 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 37
Material: Gunmetal.
H
L
Material: Gunmetal.
H
W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 35
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 38
W
B
W
BFE 300
BFE 200
H
36 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:44 Page 39
Material: Gunmetal.
Eyebolts
Provides a static earth point when attached to the top of a threaded
copperbond earth rod.
Thread H Unit Pack Part
Size mm Weight Quantity Number
(UNC-2A) kg
5/8” 0.62 EYE 058
135 1
3/4” 0.55 EYE 034
Material: Gunmetal.
Thread
Size
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 37
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 40
CCC 070
50 16 - 50 20 17 27 0.07 50 CCC 050
70 1.5 - 25 20 17 27 0.07 25 CCC 050
50 - 70 4 - 35 28 21 33 0.09 25 CCC 70-35
50 - 70 35 - 70 28 21 34 0.10 25 CCC 070
70 - 95 35 - 70 30 26 41 0.10 25 CCC 075
95 4 - 35 30 26 41 0.11 25 CCC 95-35
70 - 95 95 30 26 41 0.12 25 CCC 095
120 35 - 120 30 28 45 0.12 25 CCC 120
150 6 - 70 30 28 45 0.12 25 CCC 120
150 95 - 150 30 28 45 0.15 10 CCC 150
CCC 240
120 - 185 95 - 185 35 33 54 0.20 10 CCC 185
150 - 185 70 - 150 35 33 54 0.20 10 CCC 185
240 95 - 120 37 34 54 0.24 10 CCC 240-120
240 150 - 240 40 34 54 0.24 10 CCC 240
Material: Copper.
L
B H
38 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 41
Compression Terminals
Wallis cable terminals are manufactured from high-conductivity seamless
copper tube and feature bell mouth entry for cables up to 500mm2 and
chamfered entry for cables 500m2 to 1000mm2.
All terminals are annealed, to avoid cracking and splitting when crimped,
and electro-tin plated to combine maximum electrical conductivity with
mechanical strength. An inspection hole is provided to check cable
location prior to crimping.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 39
Wallis Cat 08 Pt1 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 12:45 Page 42
40 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Introduction 42 – 43
Miscellaneous Products 79 – 83
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 41
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 2
Structural Lightning Protection termination; the “zone of protection” is used for buildings up
to 20 metres; for buildings above this height the “rolling
Introduction sphere” method is used.
If correctly installed, fitting a lightning protection system
Down Conductors
(LPS) will minimise the risk of damage to structures and
injury to personnel by conducting high discharge currents The recommended spacing between down conductors
safely to earth. Protection against the secondary effects of varies according to risk and is detailed in internationally
lightning to internal electrical equipment, known as transient recognised European and British lightning protection
over voltage protection is achieved by the use of transient standards. E.g., conductors may be spaced at 20 metres for
over voltage protectors; this is in addition to the LPS. some buildings but this distance could be reduced to 10
metres for tall or high risk buildings. Down conductors
A LPS cannot protect against over voltage transients. Over
should be positioned as evenly as possible around the
voltage transient protectors cannot protect against direct
outside walls of the structure, starting from the corners.
lightning strikes. Both are required for total structural and
equipment protection. Minimum distances must be maintained to prevent side
flashing. Re-entrant loops are also to be avoided.
Lightning Protection Strategy
Earth Terminations & Networks
The normal strategy in
achieving protection is to The information contained in this section primarily refers to
capture the lightning at a Lightning Protection Earthing Systems (LPS) and does not
preferred point by the use of detail all earthing requirements for electrical wiring, although
air terminations and there are some similarities. Please refer to the IEE 16th
conducting it via low edition wiring regulations for more details.
impedance down conductors An earth electrode should be connected to each down
and earth electrodes to a low conductor of a lightning protection system (LPS). Earth rods
resistance earth of less than may need an earth inspection housing for periodic testing of
ten ohms. Air terminations earth resistance.
and down conductors are
Earth rods are used in most applications and are driven into
spaced at regular intervals to
the ground as close as is practicable to the structure and the
form a mesh of conductors around the perimeter of the
down conductor. They are normally spaced at specified
building and roof, known as a Faraday cage, and are joined
intervals corresponding to the spacing on the down
together by specially produced clamps and fixings or
conductors.
welding.
Resistance to Earth
Lightning Protection System Design Considerations
For an LPS the earth termination network as a whole should
An LPS is designed according to geographical location, local
have a combined resistance of not more than ten ohms,
terrain, soil conditions, size and height of building, type of
before bonding to building metalwork. However, the
material used in construction, type of material stored in the
maximum resistance value for earthing systems is
building, use of building and is based on established
application specific.
standards for risk assessment.
42 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 3
A single earth rod may not achieve the required resistance clamps are tight and well
figure and several may be need to be fitted to achieve this; protected from corrosion, which
their combined resistance is proportional to the reciprocal of can occur if dissimilar metals are
the individual rod resistances to earth. This rule holds true as joined. Ideally there should be as
long as each rod is situated outside the resistance area of few joints as possible in an LPS
any other. To ensure this is the case, it is generally accepted design.
that the minimum spacing between rods should not be less
than their driven length. Maintenance & Life of an LPS
The expected number of rods It is important to properly maintain
required to obtain a particular an LPS to ensure it retains its
resistance value, e.g. ten ohms, can ability to conduct the same current carrying capacity as it did
be roughly calculated. To do this when it was originally installed. Earth rod resistances should
the soil resistivity needs to be taken be regularly checked. Corrosion and fault currents can cause
into consideration. A soil resistivity high resistance joints leading to overheating. However, if an
test will need to be performed. LPS is correctly installed and maintained it should last for
many years.
There are several methods used to
obtain a lower resistance value: The information contained in this section is intended as a
guide and should not be used to perform designs. A.N.Wallis
More rods can be driven. does not accept responsibility for errors or omissions.
Rods can be driven deeper. Detailed information on LPS design is contained in
Rods of a larger diameter can be used. internationally recognised European
and British LPS standards.
Ring conductors connecting rods together
underground can be used.
Where deep driving is not possible shorter rods with a larger
diameter can be used; copper earth mats and earth plates
can be used in place of earth rods.
A “crow’s foot” configuration can be used where parallel
connection is not possible.
Where high resistance soil conditions are a problem soil
conditioning agents can be used to backfill rod holes.
Conductive concrete can be used to backfill an earth mat.
Both effectively increase an electrodes cross sectional area
and therefore reduce its resistance to earth.
The international standards also specify the recommended
materials used for all earthing conductors and their
dimensions.
Equipotential Bonding
It is common practice to use the buildings natural structural
steelwork and bonding it to the LPS to further improve its
ability to conduct lightning and fault currents to earth; prior
permission may be required.
Joints
Joints should be mechanically effective, all joints other than
welded ones are a potential discontinuity, and care should
be taken to ensure contact surfaces are clean and that fixing
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 43
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 4
ATC 120M
Taper Pointed Air Rods
Air rods form an important part of the air termination network of a
lightning protection system. All of our air rods are supplied with a
locknut enabling the rod to be locked tight against the conductor.
ATC 220M Please see pages 45 - 47 for further information on our range of
saddles, brackets and couplings.
Copper Air Rods
Thread L L1 Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
300 0.53 ATC 112M
500 0.85 ATC 120M
M16 1000 41 1.70 5 ATC 139M
1500 2.59 ATC 160M
2000 3.47 ATC 179M
300 0.80 ATC 212M
ATA 120M
500 1.34 ATC 220M
M20 1000 41 2.68 5 ATC 239M
1500 4.02 ATC 260M
2000 5.36 ATC 279M
ATA 112M
Material: Copper.
Material: Aluminium.
Thread Size
L1
44 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 5
Multi-Point
Used in conjunction with the taper pointed copper air rods.
Air H W Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
16 & 20 156 72 0.30 5 MPC 16
Material: Gunmetal.
L
Thread
Size
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 45
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 6
Material: Gunmetal.
Material: Aluminium.
L
Thread
Size
Material: Gunmetal.
Material: Aluminium.
Thread
Size
46 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 7
Material: Aluminium.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 47
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 8
Metallic DC Clips
DCB 253
Metallic DC clips secure the flat tape conductor to the building surface.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
DGG 383
20 x 3 50 10 0.06 50 DCG 203
25 x 3 50 10 0.06 50 DCB 253
25 x 4 50 10 0.06 50 DCG 254
25 x 6 50 12 0.06 50 DCG 256
31 x 3 60 10 0.08 25 DCG 313
DCB 506 31 x 6 60 13 0.09 25 DCG 316
38 x 3 64 20 10 0.08 25 DCG 383
38 x 5 64 13 0.10 25 DCG 385
38 x 6 64 13 0.10 25 DCG 386
50 x 3 80 10 0.10 25 DCG 503
48 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:02 Page 9
Non-Metallic DC Clips
This one-piece clip, with integral hinged lid, means no lost or dropped
lids. The clips are UV stabilised to prevent degradation from sunlight
and are non-brittle to protect against cold weather.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plug.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Colour Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg NP 253 BL
20 x 3 55 18 16 NM 203 B
25 x 3 50 18 16 Brown 0.01 100 NM 253 B
50 x 6 80 25 26 NM 506 B*
Material: Polypropylene.
* NM506B is a two-piece clip
NP 253 W
Material: Polypropylene.
NP 253 S
L W
W H
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 49
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 10
NPP 253 S
L W
H W
50 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 11
Tape Clips
Wallis tape clips hold the flat tape conductor flush to the building surface.
Fix using countersunk woodscrews 11/2” x No. 10 and No. 10 wall plugs.
For use with Bare Copper Tapes
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg MTB 253
20 x 3 68 7 0.03 MTB 203
25 x 3 70 20 7 0.03 50 MTB 253
50 x 6 73 8 0.05 MTB 506
Material: Copper.
Material: Aluminium.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 51
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 12
Slate Holdfasts
Wallis slate holdfasts provide a method for fixing the tape above the
roof tiles without any drilling.
The aluminium tail slides underneath the tile and is fixed to the wooden
beam with a nail, the non-metallic DC clip then protrudes from under
HSAL 253BL the tile and offers a fixing for the tape.
For use with Bare Copper & Aluminium Tapes
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HSAL 253 BM
25 x 3 300 50 16 0.04 50
Grey HSAL 253 GM
HSAL 253S
HSAL 253W
W
L
H
52 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 13
Weldable DC Clips
Comprises a weldable base assembled with a non-metallic DC clip. For
use on PVC roofing membranes. See page 55 for details of Universal
Welding Solvent.
For use with Bare Tape
Conductor D H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
25 x 3 65 23 Grey 0.03 50 WDC 080
WDC 120
H D
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 53
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 14
Adhesive DC Clips
Comprises an adhesive base assembled with a non-metallic DC clip.
For use on surfaces other than PVC roofing. See page 55 for details of
Surface Primer.
ADC 180
ADC 120
ADC 160
H D
54 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 15
UWS 001
CSA 001
L
H
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 55
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 16
HGA 253
L W H Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
35 22 20 0.04 10 HGA 253
Material: Aluminium.
H W
56 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 17
25 x 3 50 50 13 0.07 25 JA 253
Material: Aluminium.
W W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 57
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 18
JPBO 253 L
JAO 253
58 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 19
Material: Aluminium.
Material: Gunmetal.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 59
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:03 Page 20
Bimetallic Connectors
These connectors are used to join aluminium and copper tapes
together. They are a neat and practical jointing method without the
need for tinning, riveting or wrapping the joint.
Fix using countersunk woodscrew 11/2” x No. 10 wall plug.
BIM 253
L W
‘B’ Bonds
This Wallis ‘B’ bond is used for bonding aluminium and copper tapes to
flat metal surfaces.
For use with Copper Tapes
BBG 253 SS Material: Gunmetal with M10 x 35mm Stainless Steel Set Screw.
60 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 21
W L
H
W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 61
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 22
Air Rods
These air rods are used as part of the lightning protection system. They
are manufactured from 10mm diameter rod and are supplied with a
locknut.
Copper Air Rods
Thread L Unit Pack Part
Size mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
500 0.35 ARC 102
M10 5
ARC 102 1000 0.70 ARC 105
Material: Copper.
Thread
Size
Material: Gunmetal.
For use with Aluminium Air Rods
Thread L W H Unit Pack Part
UAA 253 Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
M10 54 54 38 0.10 5 UAA 253
Material: Aluminium.
W
H
L L
62 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 23
Slate Holdfasts
Wallis slate holdfasts provide a method of fixing solid circular conductor
above roof tiles without any drilling.
The aluminium tail slides underneath the tile and is fixed to the wooden
beam with a nail, the push-in roof clip then protrudes from under the
tile and offers a fixing for the conductor.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Clip Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Colour Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
Brown HA 08 B
8 320 18 14 0.04 50
Grey HA 08 G
HA 10 G
HA 10 S
HA 10 W
W
H
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 63
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 24
Material: Copper.
PCA 001
For use with Solid Circular Aluminium Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size & mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
Type kg
8mm Bare 31 12 12 PCA 001
0.01 50
8mm PVC 41 20 15 PCA 002
Material: Aluminium.
L W
Material: Gunmetal.
DCA 810 For use with Solid Circular Aluminium Conductors
Conductor Unit
Size & L W H Weight Pack Part
Type mm mm mm kg Quantity Number
Material: Aluminium.
H W
L
L
64 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 25
Brown CP 08 B
Black CP 08 BL
8 34 23 33 Grey 0.01 100 CP 08 G
Stone CP 08 S
White CP 08 W
Material: Polypropylene. L
H
W
Material: Polypropylene. W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 65
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 26
‘MV’ Clamps
MVG 08
These Wallis four-way connectors are suitable for crossing over, making
straight joints and tee connections in solid circular conductor.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Copper Conductor
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 40 40 18 0.05 10 MVG 08
Material: Aluminium.
66 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 27
Material: Aluminium.
H
H
W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 67
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 28
Material: Copper.
Material: Aluminium.
Bimetallic Connectors
BIM 25308
These connectors are used to join 8mm aluminium and copper solid
circular conductors together. They are a neat and practical jointing
method without the need for tinning, riveting or wrapping the joint.
H L
H
L W
68 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 29
W
H
Material: Gunmetal.
Material: Aluminium.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 69
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 30
W
H
70 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 31
Pyramid Holdfast
The Pyramid Holdfast is designed to support 8mm diameter bare solid
circular conductors on flat roofs.
Manufactured from black weather-resistant plastic and filled with frost-
proof concrete. The lip around the base enables the holdfast to be
installed onto bitumen type roofs.
For use with Bare Solid Circular Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
8 180 130 70 1.00 12 HPY 008
Material: Plastic filled with Concrete.
W L
H W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 71
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 32
Thread Size
L1
Multi-Point
Used in conjunction with the taper pointed copper air rods.
Air H W Unit Pack Part
Rod Ø mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm kg
16 156 72 0.30 5 MPC 16
72 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:04 Page 33
W W
Material: Gunmetal.
AOG 070
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 73
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 34
ASGF 050
L
H
Cable Shoes
Used to bond stranded copper conductors to metal surfaces.
H W
74 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 35
Material: Copper.
Material: Copper.
L W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 75
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 36
Material: Gunmetal.
DCG 150
For use with PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Conductors
Conductor L W H Unit Pack Part
Size mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
mm2 kg
6 35 15 14 0.03 50 DGP 006
10 35 15 14 0.03 50 DGP 010
16 35 15 17 0.04 50 DGP 016
25 35 15 17 0.04 50 DGP 025
35 46 17 19 0.05 50 DGP 035
50 46 17 19 0.05 50 DGP 050
70 46 17 21 0.06 25 DGP 070
95 46 17 23 0.06 25 DGP 095
120 60 20 25 0.07 25 DGP 120
150 60 20 26 0.07 25 DGP 150
185 60 20 28 0.08 25 DGP 185
240 60 20 31 0.09 25 DGP 240
300 60 20 33 0.09 25 DGP 300
Material: Gunmetal.
H W
L
L
76 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 37
Material: Gunmetal.
JGC 070
L
H
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 77
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 38
BTC 070
H
L
Material: Gunmetal.
H
H
W
78 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 39
Strike Pads
This Wallis strike pad is used where it is not possible to install conductor
on the roof or side of a building. A typical application would be on the
roof of a car park where the conductor is laid underneath the tarmac SC 01
and the strike pads fitted on top. Supplied with a 40mm dowel and nut.
For use with Copper Conductor
D H Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
122 40 0.60 5 SC 01
SA 01
Material: Gunmetal.
Interceptor Plates
These Wallis interceptor plates fit under the roof tile and are connected
into the lightning protection system. The square plate protrudes from the
tile and provides the interception point.
For use with Copper Conductor
L L1 W Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
500 50 50 0.40 5 SPC
Material: Aluminium.
L1
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 79
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 40
Puddle Flanges
The puddle flange is used where the down conductor must pass
through a roof or waterproof membrane. The flats of the flange are
made waterproof by fixing with glue, concrete or specialist roofing
materials. See page 20 for our range of clamps suitable for use with
puddle flanges.
For use with Copper Conductor
L W Unit Pack Part
mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
600 150 x 150 1.68 1 PFC 01
Material: Aluminium.
W L
80 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 41
Silfos
Silfos is an alloy of silver, phosphorous and copper. It is used to braze
copper to copper in air without the use of flux.
Description Unit Pack Part
Weight Quantity Number
kg
50mm x 0.12 x 8m length roll 0.50 1 SILFOS
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 81
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 42
82 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 43
Tinmans Solder
Tinmans commercial grade solder supplied by the kilogram
(4 sticks).
Flux
A well-established and reliable multi-purpose flux paste. It is designed
for engineering and sheet metal work, and is equally as effective for
soldering of copper products. Use with Tinmans Solder.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 83
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 44
84 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 45
Tripod Supports
For use with air terminals between 4.5m and 10m. Used in conjunction
with round concrete bases.
Terminal Terminal Required No. of Unit Pack Part
Height Barrel Ø Mounting Concrete Weight Quantity Number
m mm Space Supports kg ATT 001
mm
4.5 - 5.5 42 1350 x 1350 3 8 ATT 001
6.0 - 8.0 60 1850 x 1850 6 25 1 ATT 002
9.0 - 10.0 60 1850 x 1850 10 40 ATT 003
Material: Stainless Steel.
Quad Support
For use with air-terminals between 11m and 12m. Used in conjunction with
round concrete bases. ATT 002
ATT 003
ATQ 001
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 85
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 46
Concrete Bases
Square
Used in conjunction with the Square Plate Support.
Base Size Height Pack Part
Weight mm mm Quantity Number
kg
12 60 SCB 012
SCB 012 300 x 300 1
16 80 SCB 016
Material: Concrete.
Round
Used in conjunction with the Tripod and Quad Supports. Integral M16
Thread.
Base Ø Height Pack Part
Weight mm mm Quantity Number
kg
SCB 016
12 380 75 RCB 012
16 380 93 RCB 016
1
20 380 105 RCB 020
25 420 105 RCB 025
Material: Concrete.
Protective Roof Pad
Suit all sizes of round and square concrete bases. Protects waterproof
PRP 001 roofing membrane from damage.
Size Pack Part
mm Quantity Number
Ø 445 / 300 x 300 1 PRP 001
Material: Rubber.
Wind Speeds
Terminal Terminal
Height Part Up to 130 kmh (81 mph) Up to 150 kmh (93 mph) Up to 170 kmh (106 mph) Up to 190 kmh (118 mph)
m Number
Support Concrete Support Concrete Support Concrete Support Concrete
Bases Bases Bases Bases
3.0 ATF 030 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4
3.5 ATF 035 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4
4.0 ATF 040 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 4 ATS 001 SCB 012 x 8 ATS 001 SCB 016 x 8
4.5 ATF 045 ATT 001 SCB 016 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
5.0 ATF 050 ATT 001 SCB 016 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
5.5 ATF 055 ATT 001 SCB 020 x 3 ATT 001 RCB 025 x 3 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6
6.0 ATF 060 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6
6.5 ATF 065 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6
7.0 ATF 070 ATT 002 RCB 012 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 * *
7.5 ATF 075 ATT 002 RCB 016 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6 * *
8.0 ATF 080 ATT 002 RCB 020 x 6 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 6 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 * *
9.0 ATF 090 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 003 RCB 025 x 10 * *
10.0 ATF 010 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 10 ATT 002 RCB 025 x 10 * * * *
11.0 ATF 011 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 * * * *
12.0 ATF 012 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 ATQ 001 RCB 025 x 17 * * * *
*Please contact our sales office for information and advice.
86 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 47
CONDUCTORS CONTENTS
CONDUCTORS
Introduction 88 – 89
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 87
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 48
CONDUCTORS INTRODUCTION
88 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:05 Page 49
CONDUCTORS INTRODUCTION
STONE 08B23*
WHITE 10B15*
BROWN BS 6746C
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 89
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 50
90 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 51
Brown TP 253 B
Black 25 TP 253 BL
Grey & TP 253 G TP 253 W
25 x 3 75 0.77
Green 50 TP 253 GR
Stone TP 253 S
White TP 253 W
25 x 6 Green 150 1.33 40 TP 256 GR
TP 253 BL
50 x 3 Green 150 1.33 40 TP 503 GR
50 x 6 Green 300 2.68 20 TP 506 GR
TP 506 GR
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 91
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 52
TP 253 GRLSF
W
92 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 53
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 93
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 54
HD 5006 H
HDT 2506
HDT 5006
94 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 55
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
95
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 56
96 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:06 Page 57
W1
H
W
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 97
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 58
D D1
D
98 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 59
D
D
D D1
D
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 99
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 60
Hard Drawn
C.S.A. Stranding Nominal Maximum Weight Part
mm2 No. x Ø Ø Resistance per Metre Number
mm mm @ 20oC Ω/km kg
35 7 x 2.52 7.65 0.540 0.32 CHS 035
50 7 x 3.00 8.90 0.399 0.43 CHS 050
70 7 x 3.55 10.72 0.276 0.62 CHS 070
95 37 x 1.78 12.60 0.199 0.86 CHS 095
100 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 61
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 101
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 62
CTS 185
102 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 63
CLS 240
Material: Plastic.
For installation on wooden telegraph poles
These guards have angled flanges and are supplied with screw fixing
holes for ease of installation.
L W D Colour Unit Pack Part
mm mm mm Weight Quantity Number
kg
3000 95 50 Black 2.40 1 AVC 002
Material: Plastic.
L
D
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 103
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 64
RBB 035
RBB 050
RBT 035
RBT 050
104 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 65
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 105
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 66
Brass
Thread Length Weight Pack Part
Size mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
10 1.20 OSB 0610
12 1.30 OSB 0612
M6 100
16 1.50 OSB 0616
20 1.90 OSB 0620
16 1.75 OSB 0816
20 2.00 OSB 0820
M8 100
25 2.30 OSB 0825
30 2.90 OSB 0830
16 1.95 OSB 1016
20 2.20 OSB 1020
M10 25 2.75 100 OSB 1025
30 3.10 OSB 1030
35 3.40 OSB 1035
25 4.50 OSB 1225
30 4.75 OSB 1230
M12 35 5.00 100 OSB 1235
40 5.70 OSB 1240
50 6.30 OSB 1250
Material: Brass.
106 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:07 Page 67
Hexagon Nuts
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.35 ONP 06
M8 0.90 ONP 08
100
M10 1.15 ONP 10
M12 1.65 ONP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Brass
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.25 ONB 06
M8 0.80 ONB 08
100
M10 1.15 ONB 10
M12 1.65 ONB 12
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.25 ONS 06
M8 0.80 ONS 08
100
M10 1.15 ONS 10
M12 1.65 ONS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 107
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 68
Flat Washers
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWP 06
M8 0.15 OWP 08
100
M10 0.25 OWP 10
M12 0.50 OWP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Brass
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWB 06
M8 0.15 OWB 08
100
M10 0.25 OWB 10
M12 0.50 OWB 12
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.05 OWS 06
M8 0.15 OWS 08
100
M10 0.25 OWS 10
M12 0.50 OWS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.
Spring Washers
Phosphor Bronze
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.04 OTP 06
M8 0.10 OTP 08
100
M10 0.20 OTP 10
M12 0.20 OTP 12
Material: Phosphor Bronze.
Stainless Steel
Thread Weight Pack Part
Size per 100 Quantity Number
kg
M6 0.04 OTS 06
M8 0.10 OTS 08
100
M10 0.20 OTS 10
M12 0.20 OTS 12
Material: Stainless Steel.
108 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
FASTENERS & FIXINGS
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 OAS 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 OAS 133
1 1 /2 ” x No. 10 0.50 OAS 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 OAS 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 OAS 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 OAS 152
Material: Brass.
Stainless Steel
Size Weight Pack Part
per 100 Quantity Number
kg
11/4” x No. 10 0.20 ORS 132
11/4” x No. 12 0.30 ORS 133
1 1 /2 ” x No. 10 0.50 ORS 138
100
11/2” x No. 12 0.60 ORS 139
2” x No. 10 0.80 ORS 151
2” x No. 12 1.00 ORS 152
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 109
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 70
Material: Plastic.
110 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 71
Material: Copper.
Material: Copper.
Aluminium
Size Weight Pack Part
mm per 100 Quantity Number
kg
5 x 12 0.12 ORA 512
100
5 x 20 0.15 ORA 520
Material: Aluminium.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 111
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 72
112 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 73
CPS 010 . . . . . 101 DCG 240. . . . . . 76 EBC 100 . . . . . . 33 EMP 603. . . . . . 25 ERC 318 . . . . . . 14
CPS 016 . . . . . 101 DCG 254 . . . . . 48 EBC 106 . . . . . . 32 EMP 901. . . . . . 25 ERC 324 . . . . . . 14
CPS 025 . . . . . 101 DCG 256 . . . . . 48 EBC 108 . . . . . . 32 EMP 903. . . . . . 25 ERC 330 . . . . . . 14
CPS 035 . . . . . 101 DCG 300. . . . . . 76 EBC 110 . . . . . . 32 EPB 4030 . . . . . 34 ERCD 16. . . 15, 17
CPS 050 . . . . . 101 DCG 313. . . . . . 48 EBC 112 . . . . . . 32 EPB 4040 . . . . . 34 ERCD 20 . . 15, 17
CPS 070 . . . . . 101 DCG 316. . . . . . 48 EBC 114 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5030 . . . . . 34 ERCD 25 . . 15, 17
CPS 095 . . . . . 101 DCG 383 . . . . . 48 EBC 116 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5040 . . . . . 34 ERCS 16 . . . 15, 17
CPS 120 . . . . . 101 DCG 385 . . . . . 48 EBC 118 . . . . . . 32 EPB 5050 . . . . . 34 ERCS 20. . . 15, 17
CPS 150 . . . . . 101 DCG 386 . . . . . 48 EBC 120 . . . . . . 32 EPP 001 W . . . . 27 ERCS 25. . . 15, 17
CPS 185 . . . . . 101 DCG 503 . . . . . 48 EBC 122 . . . . . . 32 EPP 002 W. . . . 27 ERD 01 . . . . . . . 15
CPS 240 . . . . . 101 DCG 504 . . . . . 48 EBC 124 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1625 . . . . . 20 ERD 02 . . . . . . . 15
CPS 300 . . . . . 101 DCG 508 . . . . . 48 EBC 126 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1625A . . . 20 ERD 16 . . . . . . . 17
CPS 400 . . . . . 101 DCG 810. . . . . . 64 EBC 128 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1631 . . . . . 20 ERD 25 . . . . . . . 17
CSA 001 . . . . . . 55 DCG 815. . . . . . 64 EBC 130 . . . . . . 32 ERA 1638 . . . . . 20 ERG 112 . . . . . . 18
CSA 08 . . . . . . . 99 DCL 253 . . . . . . 48 EBC 206 . . . . . . 33 ERA 1650 . . . . . 20 ERH 01W . . . . . 29
CTS 035 . . . . . 102 DGP 050. . . . . . 76 EBC 218 . . . . . . 33 ERB 124 . . . . . . 12 ERR 2095. . . . . 21
CTS 050 . . . . . 102 DGP 070 . . . . . . 76 EBC 220 . . . . . . 33 ERB 130 . . . . . . 12 ERS 010 . . . . . . 24
CTS 070 . . . . . 102 DGP 095. . . . . . 76 EBC 222 . . . . . . 33 ERB 212 . . . . . . 12 ERS 016 . . . . . . 24
CTS 095 . . . . . 102 DGP 120 . . . . . . 76 EBC 224 . . . . . . 33 ERB 215 . . . . . . 12 ERS 020 . . . . . . 24
CTS 120 . . . . . 102 DGP 185 . . . . . . 76 EBC 226 . . . . . . 33 ERB 218 . . . . . . 12 ERSS 16 . . . . . . 24
CTS 150 . . . . . 102 DGP 240 . . . . . . 76 EBC 228 . . . . . . 33 ERB 224 . . . . . . 12 ERSS 20 . . . . . . 24
CTS 185 . . . . . 102 DGP 253. . . . . . 48 EBC 230 . . . . . . 33 ERB 230 . . . . . . 12 ERU 016 . . . . . . 22
CTS 240 . . . . . 102 DGP 256. . . . . . 48 EBC 25 . . . . . . . 28 ERB 412 . . . . . . 12 ERU 025 . . . . . . 22
CTS 300 . . . . . 102 DGP 300. . . . . . 76 EBC 27 . . . . . . . 28 ERB 415 . . . . . . 12 ERU 031 . . . . . . 22
CTS 400 . . . . . 102 DGP 506. . . . . . 48 EBC 35 . . . . . . . 27 ERB 418 . . . . . . 12 ERU 038 . . . . . . 22
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 113
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 74
ERX 525 . . . . . . 19 HA 10 W . . . . . . 63 JSG 253 . . . . . . 59 OAS 139 . . . . . 109 ORS 151 . . . . . 109
ERX 530 . . . . . . 19 HBA 001 . . . . . . 56 JYA 08. . . . . . . . 67 OAS 151 . . . . . 109 ORS 152. . . . . 109
ERY 10 . . . . . . . 37 HBG 001. . . . . . 56 JYG 08 . . . . . . . 67 OAS 152 . . . . . 109 OSB 0610. . . . 106
ERZ 112 . . . . . . 16 HD 10005 . . . . . 94 OCN 050. . . . . 111 OSB 0612. . . . 106
ERZ 115 . . . . . . 16 HD 10006 . . . . . 94 M OMB 0612 . . . 110 OSB 0616. . . . 106
ERZ 118 . . . . . . 16 HD 2003 . . . . . . 94 MAP 253. . . . . . 51 OMB 0616 . . . 110 OSB 0620 . . . 106
ERZ 124 . . . . . . 16 HD 2503 . . . . . . 94 MBA 08. . . . . . . 68 OMB 0620 . . . 110 OSB 0625 . . . 106
ERZ 130 . . . . . . 16 HD 2504 . . . . . . 94 MBG 08 . . . . . . 68 OMB 0816 . . . 110 OSB 0812. . . . 106
ERZ 212 . . . . . . 16 HD 2506 . . . . . . 94 MPB 253. . . . . . 51 OMB 0820 . . . 110 OSB 0816. . . . 106
ERZ 215 . . . . . . 16 HD 3806 . . . . . . 94 MPC 16 . . . 45, 72 OMB 0825 . . . 110 OSB 0820 . . . 106
ERZ 218 . . . . . . 16 HD 5006 . . . . . . 94 MTA 203 . . . . . . 51 OMB 1025 . . . 110 OSB 0825 . . . 106
ERZ 224 . . . . . . 16 HD 7506 . . . . . . 94 MTA 253 . . . . . . 51 OMB 1030 . . . 110 OSB 0830 . . . 106
ERZ 230 . . . . . . 16 HDT 2503. . . . . 94 MTB 203. . . . . . 51 OMB 1035 . . . 110 OSB 1016 . . . . 106
ERZ 312 . . . . . . 16 HDT 2506. . . . . 94 MTB 253. . . . . . 51 OMS 0612. . . . 110 OSB 1020. . . . 106
ERZ 315 . . . . . . 16 HDT 5006. . . . . 94 MTB 506. . . . . . 51 OMS 0616. . . . 110 OSB 1025. . . . 106
ERZ 318 . . . . . . 16 HGA 253 . . . . . 56 MVA 08 . . . . . . . 66 OMS 0620 . . . 110 OSB 1030. . . . 106
ERZ 324 . . . . . . 16 HGG 253 . . . . . 56 MVG 08. . . . . . . 66 OMS 0816. . . . 110 OSB 1035. . . . 106
ERZ 330 . . . . . . 16 HPY 008 . . . . . . 71 OMS 0820 . . . 110 OSB 1225. . . . 106
EYE 034 . . . . . . 37 HSAL 253 B. . . 52 N OMS 0825 . . . 110 OSB 1230. . . . 106
EYE 058 . . . . . . 37 HSAL 253 BL. . 52 OMS 1025 . . . 110 OSB 1235. . . . 106
NM 203 B. . . . . 49
F HSAL 253 BM . 52 NM 203 G. . . . . 49 OMS 1030 . . . 110 OSB 1240. . . . 106
HSAL 253 G. . . 52 NM 253 B. . . . . 49 OMS 1035 . . . 110 OSB 1250. . . . 106
FB 121. . . . . . . . 95 HSAL 253 GM . 52 NM 253 G. . . . . 49 ONB 06. . . . . . 107 OSP 0610 . . . . 106
FB 151. . . . . . . . 95 HSAL 253 S . . . 52 NM 506 B. . . . . 49 ONB 08. . . . . . 107 OSP 0612 . . . . 106
FB 192 . . . . . . . 95 ONB 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0616 . . . . 106
FB 232 . . . . . . . 95 I NMP 203 B . . . 50
FB 253 . . . . . . . 95 NMP 203 G . . . 50 ONB 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0620. . . . 106
IC 08 . . . . . . . . . 80 NMP 253 B . . . 50 ONP 06 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0625. . . . 106
FB 305 . . . . . . . 95 NMP 253 G . . . 50 ONP 08 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0812 . . . . 106
FB 326 . . . . . . . 95 J NP 253 B . . . . . 49 ONP 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0816 . . . . 106
FBT 121 . . . . . . 95 ONP 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0820. . . . 106
FBT 151 . . . . . . 95 JA 253. . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 BL . . . . 49
FBT 192 . . . . . . 95 JAO 253 . . . . . . 58 NP 253 G . . . . . 49 ONS 06 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0825. . . . 106
JG 253 . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 GR. . . . 49 ONS 08 . . . . . . 107 OSP 0830. . . . 106
FBT 232 . . . . . . 95 JG 256 . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 S . . . . . 49 ONS 10 . . . . . . 107 OSP 1016 . . . . 106
FBT 253 . . . . . . 95 JG 313. . . . . . . . 57 NP 253 W. . . . . 49 ONS 12 . . . . . . 107 OSP 1020. . . . 106
FBT 305 . . . . . . 95 OP10 BLU. . . . 110 OSP 1025. . . . 106
FBT 326 . . . . . . 95 JG 386 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 B . . . . 50
FLX100 . . . . . . . 83 JG 503 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 BL. . . 50 OP10 BRO . . . 110 OSP 1030. . . . 106
JG 506 . . . . . . . 57 NPP 253 G. . . . 50 OP10 RED . . . 110 OSP 1035. . . . 106
G JGC 050 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 GR . . 50 ORA 512 . . . . . 111 OSP 1225. . . . 106
JGC 070 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 S . . . . 50 ORA 520 . . . . . 111 OSP 1230. . . . 106
GCS 008 . . . . . . 71 ORB 132. . . . . 109 OSP 1235. . . . 106
GCS 050 . . . . . . 74 JGC 095 . . . . . . 77 NPP 253 W . . . 50
GCS 070 . . . . . . 74 JGO 253W . . . . 58 ORB 133. . . . . 109 OSP 1240 . . . . 106
GCS 095 . . . . . . 74 JGO 506W . . . . 58 O ORB 138. . . . . 109 OSP 1250. . . . 106
GYT 2533. . . . . 82 JOA 253 . . . . . . 67 ORB 139. . . . . 109 OSS 0610 . . . . 107
JOM 050. . . . . . 78 OAB 132. . . . . 109 ORB 151 . . . . . 109 OSS 0612 . . . . 107
H OAB 133. . . . . 109 ORB 152. . . . . 109 OSS 0616 . . . . 107
JOM 070. . . . . . 78 OAB 138. . . . . 109
HA 08 B . . . . . . 63 JOM 095. . . . . . 78 OAB 139. . . . . 109 ORC 512 . . . . . 111 OSS 0620. . . . 107
HA 08 G . . . . . . 63 JOM 253. . . . . . 67 OAB 151 . . . . . 109 ORC 520 . . . . . 111 OSS 0625. . . . 107
HA 10 B . . . . . . 63 JPA 253 . . . . . . 59 ORS 132. . . . . 109 OSS 0812 . . . . 107
HA 10 BL . . . . . 63 JPB 253 L. . . . . 57 OAB 152 . . . . . 109 ORS 133. . . . . 109 OSS 0816 . . . . 107
HA 10 G . . . . . . 63 OAS 132 . . . . . 109 ORS 138. . . . . 109 OSS 0820. . . . 107
JPBO 253 L . . . 58 OAS 133 . . . . . 109
HA 10 S . . . . . . 63 JPG 253 . . . . . . 59 OAS 138 . . . . . 109 ORS 139. . . . . 109 OSS 0825. . . . 107
114 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 75
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 115
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 76
HOW TO ORDER
SALES:
A. N. Wallis prides itself on its ability to respond to customer needs. Whether at the design stage of
a lightning protection system, the ordering of existing products or at the point of despatch, our
sales office staff will always provide the highest level of service.
For all orders, quotations and technical enquiries please contact:
Tel: +44 (0)115 927 1721
Fax: +44 (0)115 875 6630
E-mail: info@an-wallis.com
Website: www.an-wallis.com
Visit www.an-wallis.com for the latest product
and technical information as well as worldwide
distributor details and downloads.
Other Literature
Cu-nnect Surge
Exothermic Protection
Welding Catalogue.
Catalogue. A range of products
A simple and designed to protect
economical sensitive electronic
method of making equipment from
permanent, high damage caused by
quality electrical transient over-voltages.
connections.
116 A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com
Wallis Cat 08 pt2 Singles.qxp 10/12/08 13:08 Page 77
NOTES
Designed and produced by McConnells Advertising & PR, Derby
Copyright: This brochure is Copyrighted to A. N. Wallis & Co. Ltd. Product Development: It is A. N. Wallis’s policy to continuously
Unauthorised reproduction or storage without permission is an improve its products. Accordingly, A. N. Wallis reserves the right to
infringement of that Copyright. Infringement of Copyright will result amend product descriptions, specifications and performance
in legal actions. September 2008. without prior notice.
A. N. WALLIS & Co. Ltd • Tel +44 (0)115 927 1721 • Fax +44 (0)115 875 6630 • E-mail info@an-wallis.com • Website www.an-wallis.com 117
J0902003 Cover 2008 10/12/08 10:35 Page 1
1. PELCO
2. AMERICAN-DYNAMICS
Page 39 of 44
IP Cameras for
Any Application
Limitless Possibilities
Any Lighting Condition. Any Environment. Any Application.
Pelco IP Cameras – Capture With Confidence
With thousands of IP camera options to choose from, there’s a Pelco™ by Schneider Electric™ IP camera suitable for
every lighting condition, environment, and application imaginable. From fixed, entry-level cameras to high-performance
pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) and thermal imaging systems, Pelco has IP cameras that allow you to capture your important video
data with confidence.
Designed for performance, premium experience, and mission-critical applications, the Sarix Enhanced Range with
SureVision™ 2.0 delivers the best possible image when the scene contains difficult lighting conditions such as bright areas,
shaded areas, and intense light. The optimized modular design, motorized zoom, built-in analytics, and advanced features
of the Sarix Enhanced Range provide a best-of-class user experience. Designed with superior reliability and fault
tolerance, these rugged fixed IP cameras ensure you always get the video that you need.
Features:
• SureVision 2.0 technology, including:
• True WDR
↘
• Advanced low-light performance SureVision 2.0 —
• Anti-bloom technology
• Automatic adjustment for above lighting conditions
Box Cameras
For a Higher
• 3D noise filtering Quality Image
• Enhanced tone mapping
• Up to 30 images per second (ips) at 3 megapixel (MPx)
• Up to two 1080p, 30 fps video streams
• Power over Ethernet (PoE), IEEE 802.3af
• Built-in Pelco analytics suite
• Local storage (Micro SD)
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems Indoor Mini Domes
• ONVIF™ Profile S and Profile G conformant With SureVision 2.0
Models:
• Sarix IXE Series box cameras with SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series environmental mini domes
with SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series vandal mini domes with SureVision 2.0
Without SureVision 2.0
• Sarix IME Series indoor mini domes with SureVision 2.0 Environmental/Vandal Mini Domes
Features:
• Up to 5 MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips at 1080p
• Autofocus motorized remote zoom lens
(bullet and mini domes)
• Integrated adaptive infrared (IR) illumination
(bullet and mini domes)
• Multiple CS-mount lens options (box cameras)
Box Cameras Indoor Mini Domes
• Accessible edge storage with Micro SD card
• PoE and 24 Vac power input
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S conformant
Models:
• Sarix IXP Series box cameras
• Sarix IBP Series environmental bullet cameras
• Sarix IMP Series indoor mini domes
• Sarix IMP Series environmental mini domes
• Sarix IMP Series environmental mini domes with IR
Bullet Cameras With Optional IR Environmental Mini Domes With Optional IR
Features:
• 720p (1280x720) MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips
• H.264 compression
• Minimum illumination down to 0.5 lux (color only)
• PoE or 24 Vac power input
• Web-based user interface for easy setup and configuration
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S conformant
Models:
• Sarix IL10 Series indoor mini box cameras
• Sarix IL10 Series indoor micro domes
There really are no limits to how 360-degree technology — coupled with the best patented 3D dewarping technology,
integrated into a video management system (VMS) — can add value. The many facets of the Evolution 360-Degree
camera and its forensic capabilities are literally limitless, ranging in every application imaginable from city surveillance
to retail, gaming, and more.
Features:
• Constant 360-degree surveillance, no blind spots
• Patented client-side 3D dewarping technology
• Compatible with popular VMS platforms
• 5 MPx 1/2.5 CMOS sensor
• 0.2 lux and WDR
• H.264/MJPEG multi-stream
• Silent operation, no moving parts
• PoE or 12 Vdc
• SD card slot, I/O, and audio line-in
• Indoor, IP66 outdoor, black and white options
• Ceiling/wall/table mount
• ONVIF Profile S compliant
Models:
• Evolution 360-Degree indoor camera
• Evolution 360-Degree indoor concealed camera
• Evolution 360-Degree outdoor dome camera
Features:
• Ability to control and monitor video over IP networks
• 9 built-in analytics, including auto tracker and adaptive ↘
motion detection
• Open IP standards
Endless Adaptability
Increased resolution over standard-
• ONVIF Profile S conformant
definition IP cameras delivers
• Two simultaneous video streams: dual H.264 and scalable MJPEG
unmatched forensic detail. An
• Supports: TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, ideal solution to view and identify
DHCP, RTP, NTP, and more specific features such as faces,
• USB expansion slots for Pelco alarm and audio accessories license plates, playing cards (gaming
• 16:9 aspect ratio, 1920x1080 resolution at 30/25 ips (NTSC/PAL) applications), etc.
• 2.0 MPx, 20X or 30X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom
• Commercial
• 360° continuous pan rotation at 280° per second
• Industrial
• 16 preset tours, 255 dome presets, 32 window blanks
• City surveillance
• WDR
• Traffic monitoring
• Gaming
Features:
• Encoder, receiver, PTZ, and enclosure with integrated optics
package (IOP) or pressurized integrated optics cartridge (IOC),
NTSC/PAL
• Tilt range of +36° to -85° from horizontal
• H.264, MPEG-4, and MJPEG compression
• Auto tracking
• Internal scheduling clock
• Horizontal zone and window blanking
• On-screen compass and tilt display
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
The ExSite Series offers network-based, explosion-proof PTZ and fixed camera systems with integrated camera/
lens/receiver for safe and efficient installation in hazardous locations. Featuring low-light technology, multiple
compression formats, and both upright and inverted operation, ExSite IP provides the image quality, performance,
and reliability you demand in the most challenging environments.
Features:
• Integrated Optics Package (IOP) with 36X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom
• H.264, MPEG-4, and MJPEG compression
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
• Up to 2 simultaneous video streams
• Electropolished 316L stainless steel construction
• -60°C to +60°C operating temperature range
• Upright or inverted operation
• Manual 200° pan and 180° tilt adjustments (EHXME Series)
• 360° continuous pan rotation with tilt range +90° to -90° from horizontal
(IPSXME Series)
• Password protection
• Optional window wiper
Features:
• Plug-and-play with the industry’s most common recording
and video management systems
• Fully integrated sensor, camera, enclosure,
and pan/tilt system
• Fixed and pan/tilt models
• Integration into any IP or analog system
• Sun-safe amorphous silicon sensor
• 5 built-in analytics
• Thermography (SMR) Standard Visible Light Camera
• Full and reduced frame rate options
• Multiple resolution options, up to 640x480
• Compatible with Pelco and 3rd-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
Sarix TI Camera
POS
Partner First Integration
IP
With an industry-leading approach to open systems design and the development
of strategic alliances and partnerships, Pelco truly understands the value that
comes with working together to deliver fully integrated video security solutions. Our
groundbreaking Partner First program marks a new level of openness as we work
on a daily basis to identify and bring to market additional features, capabilities, and
solutions to our existing portfolio of video security solutions. Please see
Capture
pelco.com/partnerfirst to see a full directory of integration partners. Network Command and
Control
ONVIF
Support of ONVIF is a key part of our commitment to being an Open and Integrated
company. Pelco is a full member of ONVIF, actively participating in multiple ONVIF
working groups and committees driving interoperability between IP-based physical
security products regardless of manufacturer. ONVIF is a non-profit organization, open
industry forum, promoting and developing global standards for interfaces of Manage
Endura VMS
The Endura IP VMS offers the scalability, performance, and reliability required for
mission-critical surveillance applications. Scalable to thousands of cameras, Endura
is designed to fit a wide range of customer applications — including airports,
casinos, and city surveillance — where unmatched fault tolerance and system
integrity are mandatory.
System Aggregation
With access to any video camera from any location on any device and featuring
a new intuitive desktop client for ease of operation, System Aggregation provides
simplified migration from Pelco VMS platforms. The Aggregation offers flexible
scalability that can empower and enable centrally managed users across
disparate systems.
3D Design Tool
Pelco and Fortem have partnered to offer a unique tool to make 3D facility design and
management of video surveillance systems a reality. Make planning your next project a breeze
with this easy-to-use tool.
©2014 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Schneider Electric, Pelco, Digital Sentry, Endura, B.O.S.S., and Sarix are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric
Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. • www.schneider-electric.com • 998-1239070_GMA-US
security systems coupled with an unparalleled level of customer service and support. From an expanded
selection of IP security cameras and video management systems to full HD displays, traditional surveillance
technologies, accessories and more, Pelco is your trusted video security partner.
As part of Schneider Electric, Pelco connects you to the global specialist in energy and security management,
and has the ability to deliver integrated security and building management solutions that let you control your
entire security landscape across enterprises, from a single user interface.
↘
Be Sure to Ask or Search
Online for the Following:
• PGTI training
• B.O.S.S.™ 5.1 specification tool
• IP products compatibility guide
Capture. Manage. Display. • VMS overview
• Pelco Press case studies
For more information, please visit pelco.com or call (800) 289-9100 (United States and Canada) or
+1 (559) 292-1981 (international). For pricing information or to purchase Pelco products, please contact
your manufacturer’s representative or the Pelco office in your area.
September 2014
A Name You Can Trust - People and Products You Can Count On - American Dynamics
American Dynamics develops some of the world’s most needed video technologies. Technologies that help retailers thwart
organized crime to protect their bottom line, and universities provide peace of mind to parents of incoming students.
Technologies that help our governments secure ports and borders, and hospitals ensure the safety and privacy of their
patients. Technologies that move beyond security to become essential business-enabling tools. From its beginning in the
early 1970s as a DVR and matrix switcher company, to its proud stance today as a leading provider of IP solutions,
American Dynamics has always stood for reliability, customer commitment, and integrity. While technology and products
change at breakneck speeds, those values are steadfast and they are part of the American Dynamics vision.
A vision reflected in the applications engineer who finds a solution to a complex installation by staying on a 4 hour phone
call with a customer, in the product manager who tirelessly studies industry trends to ensure he brings exactly the right
products to market, at the right time. And, in the engineer who miraculously finds a way to make the impossible happen.
American Dynamics may mean cameras and recorders and sophisticated video management. But it’s the dedication and
insight of over 2,000 employees in 9 countries that enable our Dynamic Vision.
American Dynamics, a Tyco International company, embodies the values of trust, respect, innovation and quality, that Tyco is
known for, the world over. Valuing the legacy of a global corporation, American Dynamics is dedicated to providing state-of-
the-art video surveillance products to our customer’s, manufacturer’s representatives, and employees. It is this dedication
that we provide this comprehensive product guide, so that all who require knowledge of our products can obtain it readily,
to help those who are in need of security for their businesses, no matter the size.
Contents
IP Cameras
IP PTZ Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
IP Mini-Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
IP Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IP Bullet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Analog Cameras
IP Domes and Cameras
PTZ Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mini-Dome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bullet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pre-Packaged Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Camera Accessories
IP Dome Housings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Analog Dome Housings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Indoor Mounts and Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Outdoor Mounts and Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dome Drones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Megapixel Rated Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Analog Domes and Cameras Standard Resolution Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Housings, Housing Mounts and Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Controllers and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
IP Video Encoders
IP Encoders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Monitors
Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Video Accessories
Matrix Switcher Solutions
Video Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
American Dynamics 1
IP Cameras
IP cameras are ideal for wide-
rable IP cameras.
American Dynamics 2
A
merican Dynamics’ powerful IP cameras and domes offer a unique blend of high performance
and excellent value. High resolution and true day/night capabilities ensure that the quality you
expect from American Dynamics carries right into the IP era. At D1 resolution, image clarity is superior.
MJPEG and MPEG-4 compression technologies provide flexible bandwidth management, allowing you to
IP PTZ Dome Cameras can be positioned at exactly the angle you need. Choose from the
American Dynamics IP PTZ Domes leverage the best of the Illustra line of IP Mini-Domes for maximum resolution or our ADCIP
analog SpeedDome and add the power of IP. Extensive zooming line for compatibility with Intellex IP. Our economical, high quality
capabilities (up to 420x total zoom 35x optical), superior images line of ACDIP mini-domes for indoor and outdoor applications work
(540 T VL, Electronic Image Stabilization, True Day/Night, and with Intellex IP and feature 540 TVL.
Wide Dynamic Range), provide a superior camera solution that
IP Box Cameras
leverages your existing infrastructure for a low total cost of
American Dynamics IP Box cameras are of superior quality and
ownership.
provide the best image each and every time. Choose from a variety
American Dynamics IP cameras are ONVIF compliant, meeting the of models including the Illustra line with H.264 compression and
open standards criteria for IP-based physical security products. maximum resolution of 2/3 megapixel or the economical ADCIP
This compliance provides customers with greater flexibility in their featuring high D1 resolution and built in local SD card storage.
choice of recording platforms. Access and control your IP box camera from a web browser or the
latest version of NVR, HDVR, or Intellex IP, depending on model.
Unlike many other IP PTZ domes in the industry, our domes support
PoE technology which allows you to use standard category 5 cable
in a typical network environment. Other domes either require you to IP Bullet Cameras
run power cables to the dome or use PoE+, which is a drain on The Illustra 400 Series Bullet Camera has one of the most powerful
power and money. With PoE, a camera can still operate in the event sensor-processor combinations available on the market with a
of a power failure if the network is connected to a centralized power weatherproof IP66 sleek enclosure. Its 896 x 720 resolution sets it
backup. apart as a versatile device, bridging “standard resolution” with 650k
pixels for incredibly high resolution. This powerful resolution and
American Dynamics IP Domes offer full 360° PTZ capabilities, as
H.264 compression creates a blend of image quality and
opposed to most domes in the industry that pan, tilt, and zoom
bandwidth-friendly performance.
“almost” all the way around (355°), but leave just enough
unmonitored area (5° worth) to cause a lot of problems. They
support H.264, MJPEG, MPEG-4, and Active Content Compression
(ACC) technology and are compatible with VideoEdge Network
Video Recorder v3.0 and higher, as well as Intellex IP.
IP Mini-Domes
Our IP Mini-Domes deliver real value with a wide range of features
at bid-winning prices. High-resolution, vandal-resistant housings, IR
illuminators, and true day-night capabilities ensure that the quality
you expect from American Dynamics carries right into the IP era. IP
Mini-Domes feature an advanced pivoting three-axis gimbal that
American Dynamics 3
IP PTZ Dome Cameras
IP SpeedDome:
Day/Night No Yes
Programmable patterns 16 16
Programmable sequences 16 16
American Dynamics 4
IP Mini-Domes
A D C i4 0 0 - D 014 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 52
W h i te s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L S i l ve r c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L
A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 31 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 5 3
B l a c k c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C S i l ve r s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r N TS C
A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 32 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 5 4
B l a c k c l e a r I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L S i l ve r s m o ke I R I l l u m i n ato r PA L
American Dynamics 5
IP Mini-Domes
ADCi400-D024 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 6 3
Outdoor white smoke IR illuminator PAL S i l ve r s m o ke I R i l l u m i n ato r N TS C
ADCi400-D041 A D C i4 0 0 - D 0 6 4
Outdoor black clear IR illuminator NTSC S i l ve r s m o ke I R i l l u m i n ato r PA L
ADCi400-D042
Outdoor black clear IR illuminator PAL
ADCi400-D043
Outdoor black smoke IR illuminator NTSC
American Dynamics 6
IP Mini-Domes
IP Mini-Domes:
• ADCIP IP Mini-Domes (Indoor and Outdoor) for use with Intellex IP
Model NumberS
• D1 resolution
INDOOR OutDOOR
• Offers true day/night functionality for low light conditions ADCIPE3312ICN ADCIPE3712OCN
• Built-in IR illuminator for no light conditions
ADCIPE3312ISN ADCIPE3712OSN
• Supports MJPEG and MPEG-4 compression technologies
• Outdoor model features vandal resistant housing ADCIPE3712OCPE
ADCIPE3312ICPE
• Access and control the mini-domes from a web browser or the latest
version of VideoEdge NVR or Intellex IP ADCIPE3312ISPE ADCIPE3712OSPE
• Multiple level password-protected user access
ADCIPE3312ICPU ADCIPE3712OCPU
• USB interface for browser-based IP configuration
• Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) for cost-savings and ease of ADCIPE3312ISPU ADCIPE3712OSPU
installation
American Dynamics 7
IP Mini-Domes
Housing Non Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Non vandal resistant Vandal resistant
Compression
S/N Ratio 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB
Bubble F-stop F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear) F1.0 (tinted); F0 (clear)
Housing Color White White White, black, or silver White, black, or silver
American Dynamics 8
IP Box Camera
• 3.5 mm in/out audio jacks for external microphone 1.7mm wide angle auto iris lens TDN WDR POE NTSC
ADCi400-X202
1.7mm wide angle auto iris lens TDN WDR POE PAL
American Dynamics 9
IP Standard IP
Resolution Box Camera
Box Cameras
aD = C IP e b P = Poe N = NTSC E = Eu
american {blank} = non-Poe P = PAL U=U
Dynamics
American Dynamics 10
IP Bullet Camera
American Dynamics 11
Analog Cameras
Over 175 SpeedDome
of an accident or suspicious
commutes.
Analog Cameras
P
TZ, programmable dome cameras give you a comprehensive view that you simply cannot get
from a fixed camera. Our technology delivers the details of your target, zooming in or out in
less than a second to capture the image you need the instant an alarm goes off. Our innovative Zoom-
Adjusted Programming (ZAP) lets you pan, tilt, and zoom in every direction, automatically adjusting the pan
and tilt speed in proportion to the zoom. Additional features enable you to conduct a virtual patrol of your
facility whether or not someone is manning the controls. Auto-focus with manual override renders a clear
picture every time. From the most distant corner of a parking garage to the maze of hallways throughout a
building, SpeedDome programmable dome cameras take you everywhere you need to see.
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras Unlike other dome housings in the industry, which are made of
SpeedDome Ultra 8 Programmable Dome Cameras are metal, the Discover series housing is made with extremely durable
equipped with Wide Dynamic Range, True Day/Night, and Electronic composite and polycarbonate materials that have “shape memory”.
Image Stabilization (EIS). With 35x and 540 TVL allows users to see An advanced pivoting axis lets you position the camera at exactly
farther and clearer than ever before. A 12x digital magnifier with 35x the angle you need, while optimal white balance provides the
optical zoom yields a total zoom of 420x. This series also features clearest, most color-perfect images possible.
privacy zones, on-screen programming, alarm inputs, and DirectSet
540 TVL and True Day/Night cameras provide super high resolution
for fast access to the most frequently used functions. A choice of
images in a variety of lighting conditions. The models with Night-
black or white camera assemblies is available.
Saver mode are the ideal choice for applications requiring 540 TVL
SpeedDome Ultra 8 with 22x delivers excellent color images in to provide super, high resolution images and true color rendition.
scenes as dim as .02 lux. This series combines 22x optical zoom The Night-Saver mode automatically switches the cameras to quasi
and 11x digital zoom for 242x total zoom and has low-light capability black and white in scenes with low lighting to provide better
of .004 lux. Like the SpeedDome Ultra 8 with 35x, this series also low-light detail performance. Internal and phase adjustable line lock
includes DirectSet, privacy zones, on-screen programming, and options are also included for roll-free switching. True Day/Night
alarm inputs. models include a moving mechanical IR cut filter and advanced
features such as on-screen menu programming, advanced pixel
SpeedDome Optima is powered with 22x optical zoom and 11x
correction, a focus adjust mode for focus accuracy, selectable
digital zoom for a total of 242x zoom, producing high quality color
4-zone Back Light Camera, manual shutter mode, and a monitor
images. The series includes an alarm input, 96 user-programmable
mode to optimize the camera output for CRT or LCD monitors.
presets three patterns, and a pre-wired harness for easy installation
and servicing. Compatible with any American Dynamics controller CCD Standard box cameras are ideal for a multitude of applications.
system, Optima is available in outdoor models only. We offer economical, efficient models for entry level and general
purpose installations where cost and reliability are paramount.
Optima LT includes many of the same features as the standard
Optima dome - all for an impressively low price.
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
Standard Pre-Packs include color, black & white, and
Analog Mini-Domes + Box Cameras
True Day/Night cameras (product dependent) with a choice of
The Discover series of Mini-Domes delivers a vandal resistant
lenses, as well as indoor and outdoor housing mounts. A variety of
camera solution at a non-vandal resistant price. This series of high
other Speciality Pre-Packs are also available.
performance mini-domes includes high impact, vandal resistant
dome housings built to withstand even the harshest environments.
American Dynamics 13
Analog Cameras
SpeedDome Optima +
SpeedDome Ultra 8 22x SpeedDome Ultra 8 35x
Optima LT
Total zoom 242x 420x 242x
Optical zoom 22x 35x 22x
Day/Night No Yes No
Programmable sequences 16 16 No
Privacy zones Up to 8 Up to 8 No
Up to 4 inputs & outputs, base Up to 4 inputs & outputs, base
Alarm inputs & output One for Optima & N/A for Optima LT
dependent dependent
Auto focus/iris Yes Yes Yes
CCD imager (CCD center) 1/4 in, 470 TVL 1/4 in, 540 TVL 1/4 in, 470 TVL
Day Mode - 0.24 lux (AGC on) / 0.028
0.3 lux (AGC on) / 0.02 lux with 1/4 lux with 1/4 sec. open shutter B/W IR
Minimum illumination 1.5 Lux (AGC on)
sec. open shutter mode – 0.021 lux (AGC on) / 0.00041
lux with 1/2 sec. open shutter
Lens focal length 4 to 88 mm 3.4 to 119 mm 4 to 88 mm
American Dynamics 14
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
* Compatibility with other manufacturers is based upon known current protocols and controllers at time of test. However, compatibility may be affected if other manufacturers make changes to their products.
American Dynamics 15
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
22x Zoom, Housing /Eyeball Assembly without I/O Mounting Base ADSDU835ION
ADSDU822N ADSDU835WION
ADSDU822WN ADSDU835IOP
ADSDU822P ADSDU835WIOP
ADSDU822ION ADSDUIOBW
ADSDU822WION Accessories
35x Zoom, Housing /Eyeball Assembly without I/O Mounting Base > Controllers
ADSDU835WP
American Dynamics 16
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
SpeedDome Ultra 8 preconfigured Kits
2) Environmental
(Indoor & Outdoor)
ADSDU822IHN ADSDU835I2X2N
ADSDU822IHP ADSDU835I2X2P
ADSDU822IHSN ADSDU835I2X2SN
ADSDU822IHSP ADSDU835I2X2SP
ADSDU822I2X2N 35x Zoom, Outdoor Dome Kits, (with 540 TVL WDR,
ADSDU822I2X2SN ADSDU835OPCN
ADSDU822I2X2SP ADSDU835OPCP
ADSDU822OPCN ADSDU835OPCWP
ADSDU822OPCP Accessories
ADSDU822OPCWN > Controllers
32x Zoom, Indoor Dome Kits, (with 540 TVL WDR, Day/Night + EIS) > Installation/Removal tool
ADSDU835IHP
ADSDU835IHSN
American Dynamics 17
Dome Assembly
communication, and
desired location. 3
routine.
American Dynamics 18
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
American Dynamics 19
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
RASONPC RASONPS
O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C)
RASONPC-1 RASONPS-1
O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L ) O u td o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L )
RASELHC I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L )
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) RASELPS
RASELHC-1 I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C)
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( PA L ) RASELPS-1
RASELHS I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L )
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( N TS C) Accessories
RASELHS-1 > Controllers
I n d o o r C e i l i n g M o u n t, S m o ke d B u b b l e ( PA L ) > J-Boxes
RASELPC > Installation/Removal tool
I n d o o r Pe n d a n t M o u n t, C l e a r B u b b l e ( N TS C) > Power supplies
RASELPC-1
American Dynamics 20
Analog PTZ Dome Cameras
AD-UTC 96 96
MegaPower LT
SensorNet 96 96
SensorNet 96 96
MegaPower 48 Plus
Manchester 64 64
RS-422 96 96
Manchester** 64 64
RS-422 †
60 60
SensorNet ‡
96 96
Intellex
RS-422§ 96 96
TVR RS-422 96 96
supported protocols
NTCIP Yes No
AD-UTC Yes No
* Using SensorNet-to-RS-422 converter (model number RCSN422). ‡ Using USB CCTV Control Module (Model number ADACSNET).
** Using Sensornet/Manchester code dist Model # ADACSNETD § Requires USB to RS-422 adaptor.
† Using RS422/485 code dist model # ADAC422D
American Dynamics 21
Analog Mini-Domes
Non-vandal Non
Housing Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal-resistant
resistant vandal-resistant
Imager Pixim orca sensor 1/3 in CCD 1/3 in CCD 1/3 in CCD 1/3 inch CCD 1/3 inch CCD
1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75-ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75 ohm, 1.0 Vp-p/75 ohm,
Video Output
BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC
Active Pixel Count Universal: 720 x NTSC: 768 x 494 NTSC: 768 x 494 NTSC: 768 x 494 768 x 494 NTSC 768 x 494 NTSC
(H x V) 540 (PAL: 752 x 582) (PAL: 752 x 582) (PAL: 752 x 582) 752 x 582 PAL 752 x 582 PAL
Digital Slow
2x (default) – 32x N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Shutter (DSS)
Automatic white
balance (AWB),
White Balance AWB AWB AWB AWB AWB
One-touch &
manual
AWB Ranges- 2200 – 7500 K 2700 – 11000 K 2700 – 11000 K 2700 – 11000 K
2500 - 9500 K 2500 - 9700 K
Normal (Extended) (2000 – 11000 K) (2000 – 18000 K) (2000 – 18000 K) (2000 – 18000 K)
WDR Metering
1-zone adjustable N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Zone
Flickerless Mode Selectable on/off Selectable on/off Selectable on/off Selectable on/off On/Off N/A
Night-Saver Selectable on/off Selectable on/off N/A Selectable on/off On/Off On/Off
DVR-Saver Mode Selectable on/off N/A Selectable on/off N/A N/A N/A
Housing Color Black or White Black or White Black or White White White White
Environmental
Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Only Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Only
Rating
American Dynamics 22
Analog Mini-Domes
• Super high resolution 540 TVL NTSC True Day/ Night (520 TVL PAL)
• Removable IR Cut Filter Model Numbers
A D C D 6 0 0 - D 0 0 01
• 3X vari-focal lens
Va n d a l re s i s t a n t m i n i d o m e,
• Auto Iris, IR corrected, 3.7 - 12 mm varifocal lense 5 4 0T V L, 3.7-12m m, I R , 12 /24V,
Ac c e s s o r i e s
A D C1121A
Powe r s u p p l y 12V D C/1 a m p
A D C124
Powe r S u p p l y 24VAC
American Dynamics 23
Analog Mini-Domes
A D C D201- D 0 0 01
4” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12 /24V, c l e a r, w h i te, N TS C
A D C D201- D 0 0 02
4” m i n i - d o m e, 4 8 0T V L, 4- 9 m m, 12 /24V, c l e a r, w h i te, PA L
ADCPWMPEND No Yes
ADCPWMRMK No Yes
ADCPWMPWM No Yes
ADCPWMCRNR No Yes
American Dynamics 24
Analog Mini-Domes
Vandal-Resistant
The vandal resistant Indoor/Outdoor
Discover Mini-Domes are ideal for
areas where surveillance equipment is
subject to abuse. Three camera types
are available, Wide Dynamic Range,
High Resolution, and True/Day Night.
Accessories
American Dynamics 25
Analog Mini-Domes
Mounts
4S electrical box
ADCPWMELEC
adapter
Accessories
American Dynamics 26
Analog Bullet Cameras
bullet cameras
Video Output 1.0 Vp-p / 75 Ohm, composite 1.0 Vp-p / 75 Ohm, composite
Active Pixel Count NTSC 768 x 494 pixels 768 x 494 pixels
Active Pixel Count PAL 752 x 582 pixels 752 x 582 pixels
Min. Scene Illumination 0.0 lux (f/2.0 lens, AGC on, IR on) 0.0 lux (f/1.6 lens, AGC on, IR on)
S/N Ratio 48 dB 48 dB
American Dynamics 27
Analog Bullet Cameras
American Dynamics 28
Analog Bullet Cameras
Accessories
A D C11211A
P o w e r s u p p l y 12 V D C, 1 a m p
American Dynamics 29
Analog Box Cameras
ADCTDN ADCSHR
ADC733 ADC660N/P
Series Series
Format 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD 1/3 in interline CCD
Light Level 0.04 lux 0.7 lux 0.5 lux 0.03 lux
Automatic Backlight
Yes, plus 4-zones Yes Yes Yes
Compensation
Body Color Light Gray Light Gray Light Gray Light Gray
American Dynamics 30
Analog Box Cameras
Super High Resolution, True Day/Night Camera, 1/3 in, 540 TVL, 0.02 lux:
• 5
40 TVL True Day/Night with • A
uto white balance (AWB)
moving mechanical IR cut adjusts for accurate colors MODEL NUMBERS
filter across a multitude of lighting
ADCTDN2412N
conditions
• A
vailable in 24 VAC/12 VDC
NTSC, 24 VAC/12 VDC PAL • A
utomatic gain control ADCTDN2412P
or mains 230 VAC PAL (AGC), automatic electronic
shutter (AES), and backlight
• F
ocus adjust mode for ease ADCTDN0230P
compensation (BLC)
of installation and focus
accuracy • P
hase adjustable line-lock or
internal synchronization
• O
n-screen menu display for
easy programming (such as • C
ompatible with C/CS
camera titles) lenses, video or DC auto Iris
versions, including American
• M
onitor mode to optimize
Dynamics IR corrected
output for CRT or LCD
lenses (vari-focal length)
monitors
• A
vailable as camera pre-
• Advanced pixel correction
packs for easy ordering and
• Factory default settings installation
• 5
40 TVL with Night-Saver • C
ompatible with C/CS
mode lenses, video or DC auto iris MODEL NUMBERS
versions
• A
vailable in 24 VAC/12 VDC ADCSHR2412N
NTSC, 24 VAC/12 VDC PAL • A
vailable in camera pre-
or mains 230 VAC PAL packs for easy ordering and ADCSHR2412P
installation
• Superior low-light
performance • A DCSHR2412 series: ADCSHR0230P
Dimensions:
• A
uto white balance adjusts
52 x 58 x 126 mm
for accurate colors across
(2.0 x 2.28 x 4.96 in)
a multitude of lighting
Unit weight: 370 g (0.82 lbs)
conditions
• A DCSHR0230 series:
• A
utomatic gain control,
Dimensions:
automatic electronic shutter,
67 x 63 x 126 mm
and backlight compensation
(2.56 x 2.48 x 4.96 in)
• P
hase adjustable line-lock or Unit weight: 713 g (1.57 lbs)
internal synchronization
American Dynamics 31
Analog Box Cameras
Standard Resolution Camera, 1/3 in, 330 TVL, 0.5 lux, CCD, DSP:
Black & White Camera, 1/3 in, 580 TVL, 0.03 lux:
• 1
/3 in interline black & • 24 VAC or 12 VDC input
white CCD MODEL NUMBERS
• D imensions:
• 580 TVL resolution 55 x 55 x 120 mm ADC660N
(2.16 x 2.16 x 4.72 in)
• .03 lux low light sensitivity
• Unit weight: .400 kg (0.9 lbs ADC660P
• Sensitive to IR illumination
• S
upports DC-type or
EE-type auto iris lenses
• CS lens mount
• A utomatic backlight
compensation
and the DVR have been instrumental to the success of the surveillance
-Dennis Painter
Surveillance Manager
American Dynamics 32
When custom camera
hardware.
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
Integrated Camera,
Housing & Lens Saves
You Money
Pre-packs save you time and money.
Arriving at your door pre-assembled
and ready to go, they offer high level
performance and advanced camera
features.
• C
hoice of camera, lens, housing, and • Assembled, adjusted, and tested • NTSC and EIA (Electronic Industries
mount combinations Association) versions only
• Quick and easy installation
• S
ome versions also available without • S ome versions include heater and blower
• Indoor and outdoor versions
housing
A Camera
B Lens
C Housing (either indoor or
outdoor environments)
C Mount
American Dynamics 34
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
American Dynamics 35
Analog Pre-Packaged Cameras
Micro-Camera Pre-Pack:
• N
on-functional PIR detector • Automatic electronic shutter
housing MODEL NUMBER
• Automatic gain control
• 1
/3 in interline color imager, ADC723PIR
• For indoor use only
NTSC format
• Auto tracing white balance
• 330 TVL - color
• 1
2 VDC input via included
• 1
/3 in, 3.7 mm lens;
regulated power supply
90˚ horizontal FOV
• D imensions:
• 2.0 lux - color
70 x 110 x 49 mm
• Sharp picture (2.7 x 4.3 x 1.9 in)
• For indoor use only • Weight: .18 kg (.40 lbs)
Warehouse managers can watch loading docks and platforms - the places
most vulnerable to theft - 24/7 with fixed cameras from American Dynamics,
American Dynamics 36
Camera Accessories
Even the very best cameras can
best images.
IP Dome Housings
IP SpeedDome Outdoor Housings:
• P recision-crafted bubbles • R
einforced high impact design
maintain the integrity of light and with vandal resistant option MODEL NUMBERS
image
• D imensions: A DV ES D H I C
• Four alarm inputs, one output Height: 321 mm (12.64 in) A DV E S D H I S
Diameter: 244 mm (9.61 in) A DV E S D H I C V R
• S
urge and lightning protection
of video, data, alarm input and • Weight (ADVESDHIC, A DV E S D H I S V R
output, and power ADVESDHIS):
With dome: 2.86 kg (6.3 lbs)
• P
lug and play connectors enable
Without dome:1.7 kg (3.75 lbs)
easy servicing of environmental
board • Weight (ADVESDHICVR,
ADVESDHISVR):
• C
eiling, pole, roof, wall, and
With dome: 3.46 kg (7.63 lbs)
corner mounts available
Without dome: 2.3 kg (5.07 lbs)
A DV E S D B A S E
D i r e c t to C e i l i n g
American Dynamics 38
Analog Dome Housings
SpeedDome Ultra Pressurized Outdoor Housings*:
• D
urable engineered plastic top, • Includes integrated I/O base
UV protected with diagnostic power and MODEL NUMBERS
communications LEDs (Note: I/O
• Temperature-controlled interior RHODULP-01
base used does not currently
environment R H O D U L P- 0 2
support storage of presets/
• Heater and blower standard patterns/programming)
Accessories
• IP67/NEMA 4x • S
urge and lightning protection
of video, communications, alarm W M 2 0 G ( Wa l l m o u n t)
• P
ressurized to 5 psi with a input and output, and power AC A 2 (C o r n e r m o u n t)
Schrader valve A P M 3 ( P o l e m o u n t)
• C
hoose from clear or smoked
• Low pressure alarm bubble RHONKIT**
( N i t r o g e n r e c h a r g e k i t)
• P
endant, wall, or corner mount • D imensions:
available RHONREG
Pressure relief valve Height: 325 mm (12.8 in)
Diameter: 409 mm (16.1 in) ( R e g u l a r & H o s e)
• B
ubble assembly affixed to the top
R H O N TA N K
with nine screws • Weight with dome: 3.63 kg (8.0 lbs)
(Nitrogen recharge tank)
Outdoor Housings:
* Note: For proper performance, this dome housing must be pressurized using 99.998% dry nitrogen.
** Contact your salesperson for recharge kit availability in your geographic region.
American Dynamics 39
Analog Dome Housings
Indoor Housings:
American Dynamics 40
Indoor Mounts and Mount Adapters
American Dynamics 41
Indoor Mounts and Mount Adapters
4 inch x 4 inch
Mounting Plate This mounting plate attaches the
dome to a standard 4 in x 4 in duplex
electrical box that is installed in SpeedDome Ultra 2 x 105 x 105 mm .14 kg
Galvanized steel RHIU4X4
the ceiling. The Top Hat housing/ Series (.08 x 4 x 4 in) (.3 lbs)
dome assembly also mounts to the
structure.
American Dynamics 42
Outdoor Mounts and Mount Adapters
outdoor mounting options
Model
Mount Description Compatibility Construction Dimensions Weight
Number
Short Wall This mounting structure attaches
Mount with directly to a flat wall. When used with
End Cap the RHOWCA corner bracket adapter Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra With dome installed
Assembly or RHOWPA pole strap adapter it aluminum, ABS 1.3 kg
Series and IP 366 x 218 x 282 mm RHOSW
can be affixed to corners as well as plastic, and fiber- (3 lbs)
SpeedDome (14 x 9 x 11 in)
poles. A mounting cover conceals the filled PVC
mounting plate for a more attractive
appearance.
Long Wall This mount attaches directly to a
Mount with flat wall, positioning the dome away
End Cap from the wall, so that it can see over
Assembly furniture, shelving, and displays. Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra With dome installed
When used with the RHOWCA corner aluminum, ABS 1.7 kg
Series and IP 366 x 218 x 587 mm RHOLW
bracket adapter or RHOWPA pole plastic, and fiber- (3.9 lbs)
SpeedDome (14 x 9 x 23 in)
strap adapter it can be affixed to filled PVC
corners as well as poles. A mounting
cover conceals the mounting plate for
a more attractive appearance.
Outdoor This mount suspends an outdoor
Pendant dome housing from an outdoor
Mount ceiling or horizontal surface. It can be SpeedDome Ultra Powder-coated
115 x 120 x 120 mm 1.8 kg
installed using either new or existing Series and IP aluminum, ABS RHOPN
(4.5 x 5 x 5 in) (4 lbs)
1.25 inch NPT threaded pipe or rigid SpeedDome plastic
conduit up to 3 meters (10 feet) in
length.
Over-the -Roof
Mount This mount affixes directly to any wall,
with rooftop wall, or parapet, positioning
End Cap the dome away from the wall, so that Powder-coated
SpeedDome Ultra
Assembly it can see over awnings, soffits, and aluminum, ABS 1098 x 243 x 473 mm 5.7 kg
Series and IP RHOTR
landscaping. Opposing wing brackets plastic, and fiber- (43 x 10 x 19 in) (12.7 lbs)
SpeedDome
secure installation to the roof filled PVC
surface, while allowing the pole to be
repositioned for easy service access.
American Dynamics 43
American Dynamics SpeedDomes
costs.
Dome Drones
Analog SpeedDome Ultra Fixed Camera Drone 3 (with Camera/Lens):
• T
hree auto iris lens options: 2.5 to 6 mm,
ADSDUDH2506PTN ADSDUDH0922P
3.8 to 9.5 mm and 9 to 22 mm
• .65 lux minimum illumination ADSDUDH2506PTP ADSDUDH0922ION
• D imensions:
Total height: 205 mm (8 in) ADSDUDH3895N ADSDUDH0922IOP
Eyeball diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in)
• Weight with chassis and camera: 1.36 kg (3 lbs) ADSDUDH3895P ADSDUDPTB
ADSDUDH3895ION ADSDUIOB
cameras, creating the same deterrence for less money. Install them
American Dynamics 45
Dome Drones
Analog SpeedDome Optima Fixed Camera Drone Housing Ceiling Mounts:
• S
ingle fixed camera • Indoor only
applications MODEL NUMBERS
• H
ard ceiling and drop
• Smoked bubble ceiling mount versions RHDR2X2
• S
imple installation and
camera positioning
• S
ingle fixed camera • S
imple installation and
applications camera positioning MODEL NUMBER
• Smoked bubble • Indoor only R H D R PEN10
American Dynamics 46
MegaPixel-Rated Lenses
MegaPixel-Rated Lenses:
ADSY125M ADSL940A
Theia SY125 1.3mm lens manual iris CS Theia SL940 auto-iris 9-40mm day/night
mount 5MP corrected lens 5MP
ADSY125A ADSL940M
Theia SY125 1.3mm lens auto iris CS mount Theia SL940 manual-iris 9-40mm day/night
5MP corrected lens 5MP
American Dynamics 47
Standard Resolution Lenses
Auto Iris Lenses:
• 1/3 in formats
• CS mounts 5-50 mm lens
• A
dvanced optical design eliminates shifts of
focus in near infrared range Normal to telephoto lens appropriate for
viewing large areas and zooming in for
• M
ulti-layer coating prevents transmittance greater detail.
fall off in the infrared range
• S
pecifically designed for True Day/Night
The importance of selecting the right lens for
cameras and any high optical performance
color camera
any application is often overlooked. The rule
• A
spherical lens design provides
outstanding image quality of thumb: shorter focal length or wide lenses
• B
uilt-in slip mount and ring locking (2 mm) provide wide angle views. Longer focal
mechanisms
• IP + Analog compatible length or telephoto lenses (16 mm or greater)
American Dynamics 48
Standard Resolution Camera Lenses
American Dynamics 49
American Dynamics fixed cameras
wrongdoing.
Housings, Housing Mounts, and Adapters
Indoor Wedge Camera Housing:
• A
D1301 has 231 mm (9.1 in) • A
D1303 series dimensions:
maximum camera/lens length Total: Mounts
208 x 158.8 x 377.8 mm AD1301DCM
• A
D1303 has 304 mm (12 in)
maximum camera/lens length (8.19 x 6.25 x 14.88 in)
Above ceiling: AD1303DCM
• Tamper-resistant 102 x 127 x 317.5 mm
(4.0 x 5.0 x 12.5 in) AD1303RK
• D
istortion free Lexan ® viewing Below ceiling:
window 106 x 158.8 x 377.8 mm
• A
D1301 series dimensions: (4.25 x 6.25 x 14.88 in)
Total: 165.1 x 120.7 x 295.3 mm
(6.6 x 4.75 x 11.63 in) • Weight: 3.75 kg (8.25 lbs)
• C
over opens 180° for • U nit weight:
easy camera access W ithout sunshield: ADch10B ADch10HBMT8
1.4 kg (3 lbs)
• Tough high-impact
W ith sunshield: ADch10H Accessory
polymer construction
1.9 kg (4.4 lbs)
ADCH10SS
• IP4/NEMA-3R protection
ADch10HB
• 2
4 VAC blower and
heater options available
American Dynamics 51
Housing Mounts
Indoor/Outdoor 12 in (304 mm) Universal Camera Housing:
• Indoor/outdoor housings • 2
4 VAC blower and
heater options available MODEL NUMBERS
• A ccommodates
most camera/lens • Tamper-resistant Housings
combinations AD1314
• D imensions:
• C
over opens 180° for 41 x 158 x 449 mm
easy camera access (5.56 x 6.2 x 17.68 in) AD1314-HB24
AD1314-SS
Housing Mounts:
• I ndoor/outdoor mounts • B
eige or black enamel
finish to complement MODEL NUMBERS
B C • L
oad capacity: up to 8
housing
A kg (18.6 lbs) ADCHMTCRNR
• C oncealed cabling
• Adjustable swivel head
ADCHMTPED
ADCHMTWALL
• I ncludes universal • C
over opens 180° for
camera housing, wall easy camera access MODEL NUMBER
mount, 120 VAC to
• Tough high-impact RTHOUTDR
24 VAC transformer,
polymer construction
mounting hardware, and
cable • IP4/NEMA-3R protection
• A ccommodates • 2
4 VAC blower and
most camera/lens heater included
combinations
• Tamper-resistant
American Dynamics 52
Mounts and Mount Adapters
American Dynamics 53
Camera Accessories
ADCD(B)W ADCDMWALL
153.8 x 112.5 x 222.9 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(6.055 x 4.430 x 8.775 in) ADCBMWALL
ADCD(B)T
ADCD(B)W ADCDMPEND
68.6 x 140.5 x 140.5 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(2.7 x 5.53 x 5.53 in) ADCBMPEND
Pendant Cap, ADCD(B)T
Three-Quarter
Inch Thread
ADCD(B)W
169.5 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black ADCDMELEC
(6.67 in)
ADCD(B)T
4S Electrical Box
Adapter
ADCD(B)W ADCDMPOLE
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black N/A
ADCD(B)T ADCBMPOLE
Pole Mount
Adapter
ADCD(B)W ADCDMCRNR
221.60 x 33.79 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(8.725 x 1.330 in) ADCBMCRNR
ADCD(B)T
Inside Corner
ADCD(B)W ADCDMCRNRO
192.53 x 131.57 x 93.47 mm
ADCD(B)EH Indoor/Outdoor White or Black
(7.58 x 5.18 x 3.68 in) ADCBMCRNRO
ADCD(B)T
Outside Corner
Pendant Wall
Mount Cap
Recessed Mount
American Dynamics 54
Mounts and Mount Adapters
19 cm (7.5 in)
Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1365
adjustable swivel head
J-type Ceiling
American Dynamics 55
Mounts and Mount Adapters
20.3 cm (9 in)
Black up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1361
adjustable swivel head
Wall-Long
Wall-Short
Wall-Telescopic
19 cm (7.5 in)
Beige up to 2.2 kg (5 lbs) ADMC1362
adjustable swivel head
Wall/Ceiling
Box Camera
Mount Kit
American Dynamics 56
Our video solutions are built to
depend.
Controllers and Accessories
Maximize your
Surveillance
You can operate as many as 64
domes from one central point with the
ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller,
maximizing your surveillance while
keeping capital costs to the bare
minimum.
American Dynamics 58
Controllers and Accessories
SensorNet J-Boxes:
RS-422 J-Boxes:
Note: Use the RPPJ-M to adapt older series SpeedDomes to current J-Boxes.
RJ856UD
Adapter:
• K
it for adapting older series SpeedDomes to
current J-Box MODEL NUMBER
RPPJ-M
American Dynamics 59
Accessories
SpeedDome Ultra Bases:
• A
ttaches to hard ceilings, tile ceilings, or • Includes I/O base for use with SpeedDome
mounting structures Ultra 8 and SpeedDome Ultra Fixed Camera MODEL NUMBERS
Drone 3 ADSDUIOB
• C ompact and attractive design
Black Base
• Available in a white or black base
ADSDUIOBW
White Base
Surge Protectors:
• P rotect your systems against failures • L ightning surge protector for power (RXPP)
• L ightning surge protector for video (RXVP) • L ightning surge protector for data (RXDP)
LED Kit:
• P
rovides additional visual deterrent (for
SpeedDome Ultra series, indoor only) MODEL NUMBERS
RHIULED
Bubbles:
• F
or use with SpeedDome Ultra • D iameter: 176 mm (6.93 in)
series domes (Indoor only) MODEL NUMBERS
• Depth: 86.5 mm (3.4 in)
• R
equires RHIUTH Top Hat indoor ADSDUCLR
• Weight: 13 kg (4.4 oz) with trim
housing Clear Bubble
ring
• P rovides attractive finish ADSDUSMK
Smoked Bubble
• A
vailable in clear, silver, smoked
RUGIDGold Bubble
and gold finishes
RUSW
Silver Bubble
American Dynamics 60
IP Video Encoders
IP Encoders allow you to
American Dynamics 61
Encoders
8-Channel 4-Channel
Number of channels Eight composite video inputs Four composite video inputs
H.264 (ADEIP8H)
Compression (Model) Active Content Compression (ACC)
MPEG-4, MJPEG (ADEIP8M)
Frame Rate 1-30 ips on each channel + dual encode 4CIF NTSC up to 30 ips per channel
Supported Recording Devices VideoEdge NVR, Intellex IP, HDVR HTTP, TCP, DHCP, (client)
Supported Protocols RTP, RTSP, HTTP, UDP, TCP/IP HTTP, TCP, DHCP (client)
62
American Dynamics 62
IP Encoders
8-Channel:
• H
.264
• 1Uand MPEG-4/MJPEG
19 in rack mount models
available
American Dynamics 63
IP Encoders
4-Channel:
• D
eveloped to leverage Active • Video loss detection
Content Compression (ACC) MODEL NUMBERS
• C
amera PTZ, focus, aperture
technology
adjustment, preset, and pattern ADEIP4
• Power over Ethernet controls for selected cameras 4- C h a n n e l I P e n c o d e r
• M
anage network bandwidth • Text stream input
usage through individual stream ADEIP4PS
• M
ulti-level password protected user
configuration 4- C h a n n e l I P e n c o d e r w i th p owe r s u p p l y
access
• Compatible with Intellex IP and the
• 10Base-T/100Base-TX network Accessories
Intellex Management Suite (Network
support
Client, Intellex Policy Manager, ADEIP4RM
Intellex Archive Manager, and • 1
U form factor for shelf, wall, or rack Rack mount kit
Browser Client) mounting
• 30 ips NTSC/25 ips PAL at 4CIF ADEIP4WM
• A
ccess and control the IP encoder Wa l l m o u n t k i t
from a web browser or Intellex IP
user interface ADEIP4PWRS
• W
atchdog system monitoring with 12V D C Powe r s u p p l y k i t
auto-reset
ADEIP4RS232
R S -232 C a b l e Ad a pte r
American Dynamics 64
Network Video Recorders
The National Policing
V
ideoEdge is a high-performance NVR that supports multi-channel audio and dual streaming for
a robust enterprise video management solution. Pre-configured bundled server solutions utilize
an embedded Linux operating system, web server, as well as user, camera, network and storage
management applications. The unique victor unified video management solution allows you to view and
manage all of your VideoEdge NVRs, as well as any Intellex DVRs you may have, all from one intuitive
interface.
American Dynamics 66
Network Video Recorders
Meta-Data for
Mega-Fast Results!
Unlike many NVRs in the
market, VideoEdge uses
meta-data to deliver
lightning-fast, on-the-fly
searches of recorded video on
IP and analog cameras in the
same interface
VideoEdge NVR:
• Essential part of the victor unified video • Synchronizes live and recorded audio
management system and video streams, supports G.726, MODEL NUMBERS
G.711, and AAC audio compressions A l l m o d e l n u m b e r s fo r V i d e o Ed g e
• Supports H.264, MPEG-4 N V R b e l ow i n c l u d e 16 I P c a m e r a
and MJPEG compression and dual- • Email notification of health l i c e n s e s, 1T B b o ot d r i ve, p l u s:
streaming cameras alerts directly from NVR to assigned
personnel
• Generates and analyzes video motion A DV E4 0 R 01D710
scene meta-data for forensic victor • Integrates with a variety of applications 1T B v i d e o s to r a g e
unified client Smart Searches including Software House C∙CURE
9000 access control systems
• Supports dual streaming cameras A DV E4 0 R 0 3 D710
enabling multiple video streams to be • Open platform supports many third 3T B v i d e o s to r a g e
used for live, record, alarm bump and party devices and hardware
meta-data collection optimization
• Remote management from standard A DV E4 0 R 0 5D710
• Embedded Linux® kernel provides web browsers or client software 5 T B v i d e o s to r a g e
the highest level of security and
• Scalable architecture supports
performance in tandem with low total
on-demand upgrades for additional A DV E4 0 R10 D710
cost of ownership
video and storage devices 10T B v i d e o s to r a g e
• Internal storage up to 10 TB or
• Chain-of-custody feature provides
expandable with external storage up to
indisputable video evidence
104 TB per NVR
• Live and recorded streaming video
American Dynamics 67
Digital Video Recorders
Performances at the 293,000
up to 10,000 attendees.
Management Software,
safeguards them.
Digital Video Recorders
A
merican Dynamics offers the most comprehensive range of digital video recorders on the
system tailored to fit nearly any application. Both the Intellex and ADTVR are integrated with Software
American Dynamics 69
Intellex
American Dynamics 70
Intellex Ultra
Forward/Reverse
Playback
Closely examine recorded video of
suspicious activities one frame at a
time, forward or reverse-something
that is difficult to do with MPEG-4
solutions.
Intellex Ultra:
• G
ain the ability to multiplex, detect alarms and • U
se 3rd party applications-such as access
events, record video, audio and text, and much control from Software House and Kantech as Model Numbers
more well as video forensics, virtual matrix, remote
Desktop/Rack Mount Models
monitoring, and more-integrated with Intellex
• S
et dome presets, patterns, and ADD600ULPV100
via the powerful application programming
configurations right from the Intellex GUI
interface (API)
• S
earch for specific clips using video analysis ADD600ULPV200
• W indows XP Professional operating system
tools and advanced text
• 4CIF at 480 ips** ADD600ULPV300
• O
perate Intellex like a virtual matrix via Network
Client with CCTV keyboard-based camera • S eparate solid-state system drive
control and an expanded capacity to stream ADD600ULPV400
• Front accessible, swappable drives
video simultaneously from multiple cameras*
• S pace-saving 3U chassis
• R
eact faster to potential emergencies with RAID 5 Model
immediate email notification of system events • O ptional RAID 5 protection ADD600URP300
and alarms
• S
teel-reinforced door provides unsurpassed
• C ustomize camera views for flexible monitoring durability and drive protection A D D 6 0 0 U R P V3 0 0
• R
espond to events with alarm-triggered dome • Includes one license of Network Client
positioning
• D esktop/rack mount configurable
• R
ecord higher frame rates per second for
certain cameras and assign the remainder to • D imensions:
less critical cameras 130 x 429 x 546 mm (5.125 x 16.895 x 21.5 in)
• E
asily export video, audio, and text to CD-RW • Weight: 17.3 kg (38 lbs)
or DVD-RW with one click of the mouse
• S
tore more video than MPEG-4 and MJPEG-
based systems using patented American
Dynamics Active Content Compression (ACC)
technology
* Requires Network Client v4.04 or higher and supports the ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, ControlCenter 1100, ControlCenter 200, 300, AD2088 and AD2089.
** All ips measurements reflect NTSC format 120 ips NTSC=100 ips PAL.
American Dynamics 71
Intellex DVMS
Intellex DVMS:
Standard: • U
se 3rd party applications-such as access Deluxe:
• S et dome presets, patterns, and control from Software House and Kantech Includes ALL the Standard features PLUS the
configurations right from the Intellex GUI as well as video forensics, virtual matrix, following:
remote monitoring, and more-integrated
• O
perate Intellex like a virtual matrix via with Intellex via the powerful application • Fourth monitor output
Network Client with CCTV keyboard-based programming interface (API) (analog call/spot monitor)†
camera control and an expanded capacity • Export capabilities to CD-RW/DVD-RW
to stream video simultaneously from multiple • Smart Search (motion, perimeter, light)
cameras* • S earch based on date, time, camera, alarm Premier:
• R
eact faster to potential emergencies with • W indows XP Professional operating system Includes ALL the Deluxe features PLUS the
immediate email notification of system following:
events and alarms • Covert camera
• Includes one USB to RS-232 converter
• C
ustomize camera views for flexible • Includes one license of Network Client
monitoring • V
ideo analysis tools (size, speed, direction
• Supports up to 20 Network Client users of motion)
• R
espond to events with alarm-triggered
dome positioning • C
ontrol domes from Intellex and • S ingle channel of live and recorded audio
Network Client**
• R
ecord higher frame rates per second for • T
ext-based searching and exception
certain cameras and assign the remainder • D esktop dimensions: recording
to less critical cameras 172 x 432 x 464 mm
(6.75 x 17.0 x 18.25 in) • S upport for remote text-based searching
• E
asily export video, audio, and text to Weight: 14.50 kg (31.90 lbs) • S upport for remote video analysis tools
CD-RW/DVD-RW with one click of the
mouse • R
ack mount dimensions: • S
ingle channel of RS-232 text recording
175 x 432 x 521 mm (expandable to 8 with additional hardware)
• S
tore over 9 times more video than MPEG-4 (6.875 x 17.0 x 20.5 in)
and MJPEG-based systems using patented Weight: 20.39 kg (44.95 lbs) • Export capabilities to DVD-RW
American Dynamics Active Content
Compression (ACC) technology
OA 100
D UL
OA = Desktop/ V 100 = 1 TB
Example AD Digital Video 6 UL = Ultra P
Rack V = Enhanced 200 = 2.0 TB
Ultra AD Management 6 = 16 Channels UR = Ultra P = Premier
Mount Video Card 300 = 3.0 TB
Systems RAID13
Configuration 400 = 4.0 TB
02514
S
6 OA 025 = 250 GB
Example DV S = Standard
AD D 8 = 8 Channels OA = Desktop V 050 = 500 GB
DVMS DV = DVMS D = Deluxe
6 = 16 Channels RA = Rack Mount 100 = 1.0 TB
P = Premier
150 = 1.5 TB
4
025
Example 4 = 4 Channels OA LT
AD D P V 025 = 250 GB
LT 8 = 8 Channels OA = Desktop LT = LT
050 = 500 GB
6 = 16 Channels
* Requires Network Client v4.04 or higher and supports the ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, ControlCenter 1100, ControlCenter 200, 300, AD2088 and AD2089.
** Requires ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller, AD168, AD1024, MP48, MP3200, or USB Control Module.
† Available only with 16 channel systems.
American Dynamics 72
Intellex LT
Intellex LT:
• M
ultiplex, detect alarms and • C
onnect up to three External
events, record video, audio and Storage Modules (ESM) to expand MODEL NUMBERS
text, and much more the local storage capacity 4-Channel
ADD400LTPV025
• S
et dome presets, patterns, and • U
se 3rd party applications-
configurations right from the such as access control from ADD400LTPV050
Intellex GUI Software House and Kantech as
well as video forensics, virtual 8-Channel
• S
earch for specific clips
matrix, remote monitoring, and
using video analysis tools and ADD800LTPV025
more-integrated with Intellex
advanced text ADD800LTPV050
via the powerful application
• R
eact faster to potential programming interface (API)
emergencies with immediate 16-Channel
• C
ontrol domes from Intellex and
email notification of system ADD600LTPV025
Network Client
events and alarms ADD600LTPV050
• S
ingle channel of live and
• C
ustomize camera views for
recorded audio
flexible
monitoring • S
ingle channel of RS-232 text
recording (expandable to 8 with
• R
espond to events with alarm-
additional hardware)
triggered dome positioning
• T
hird monitor output (analog call/
• E
asily export video, audio, and
spot monitor)
text to CD-RW/DVD-RW with one
click of the mouse
• S
tore over 9 times more video
than MPEG-4 and MJPEG-based
systems using patented American
Dynamics Active Content
Compression (ACC) technology
American Dynamics 73
Intellex LT
Desktop Models
8-Channel: 16-Channel:
Deluxe Premier
ADD6R0DVDV050 ADD6R0DVPV050
ADD6R0DVDV100 ADD6R0DVPV100
ADD6R0DVDV150 ADD6R0DVPV150
Streaming Playback:
American Dynamics 74
Intellex IP
Intellex IP:
• S
upports IP cameras and the • T
hird party applications such as
4-channel IP encoders, allowing you access control from Software House MODEL NUMBERS
to plug analog outputs into the units and Kantech can be integrated with
ADDIP100
surveillance environment Intellex via application programming
interface (API)
• C apture up to 4CIF resolution ADDIP200
• A larm notification to remote software
• D ual embedded Gigabit NIC
• P
re-alarm recording and activity
• Integrated recording and storage in a
logging
1U rack mount chassis
• Image printing and enhancement
• K
eyboard, video, monitor (KVM) port
tools
on front
• Individual camera settings for
• W indows XP operating system
sensitivity, quality, and scheduling
• 1
.0 TB, 2.0 TB, and 4.0 TB SATA hard with IntelleCord (record all, alarmed
drive configurations recording, and so on)
• S
imultaneously record, play back, • C overt camera
view remotely, conduct a search, and
• S electable frame rates
more
• S
upports external storage (via
• T
ext-based searching and exception
FireWire ®) or iSCSI
recording
• S
eamless integration with other
• S
earch based on date, time, camera,
Intellex products
alarm
• Includes one license of Network
• S
mart Search (motion, perimeter,
Client Remote Management Software
light)
• S
upport for up to 20 simultaneous
• S
ingle channel of live and recorded
Network Client users
audio
• C
ontrol domes from Intellex and
• S
ingle channel RS-232 text recording
Network Client*
(expandable to 8 with additional
hardware) • D imensions:
44 x 447 x 546 mm
• C D-RW/DVD-RW combo drive
(1.75 x 17.6 x 21.5 in)
• M ulti-screen playback
• Weight: 11.82 kg (26 lbs)
American Dynamics 75
Intellex Ultra, DVMS and LT
S ystem D iagram
Audio
In/Out
Printer
Intellex
(Ultra, DVMS & LT) I/O Alarm Devices
USB Control
Module
USB Devices
(CD-RW or Thumbdrive)
Whatever platform you choose, Intellex lets you customize your system. Add fixed cameras and SpeedDomes and operate them with the
ADTT16E Touch Tracker Controller. Display video on a variety of monitors, integrate I/O alarm devices, stream in audio or ASCII text from cash
registers. Even add a printer. Need more storage capacity? Install up to three External Storage Modules (ESMs) for each Intellex DVMS or LT, or
the RAID Storage System for Intellex Ultra. Want to integrate your video with 3rd party software? The Intellex API provides a set of programming
interfaces that enable interoperability with access control and business management software applications.
* ESM compatible with only Intellex DVMS, LT, or IP; RAID Storage System is compatible with Intellex Ultra v4.0 Service Pack 1 (v4.03) or higher.
American Dynamics 76
Intellex IP
System Diagram
4-channel IP Encoder
IP Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes
Switch Analog Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes
Network Client
Intellex API
Intellex IP
With Intellex IP, you can connect both IP cameras and - via video encoders - analog fixed cameras and SpeedDome programmable dome
cameras. Network Client lets you access surveillance video directly from your computer network while a switched network minimizes the impact
on bandwidth by segregating the traffic generated by the cameras and video encoders from the rest of the system. You can expand your storage
capacity by adding up to three ESMs and get interoperability with 3rd party software for access control, point of sale systems, and other
applications that integrate with the Intellex API. Intellex IP is compatible with all Intellex platforms and the Intellex API.
* ESM compatible with only Intellex DVMS, LT, or IP; RAID Storage System is compatible with Intellex Ultra v4.0 Service Pack 1 (v4.03) or higher.
American Dynamics 77
Intellex Accessories
Rack Mount Kits:
Looping Panels:
Intellex Accessories*:
• U
pgrades provide an ever-increasing return on your initial investment; visit
www.americandynamics.net
* Check the data sheet at www.americandynamics.net for the current minimum requirements.
American Dynamics 78
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders
ADTVR ADTVR-VS
Alarm Inputs 4 Ch 4
4
Alarm Inputs 8 & 16 Ch 16
Alarm Outputs 4 Ch 2
1
Alarm Outputs 8 & 16 Ch 4
USB 2.0 3 1
DVD RW Yes No
HDD 4 Ch 4 SATA
1 SATA
HDD 8 & 16 Ch 8 SATA
American Dynamics 79
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders
ADTVR:
• 4, 8, and 16 video input models • Local or remote PTZ control,
available (NTSC/PAL)* multiple dome protocols available MODEL NUMBERS
• Each channel has independent, • TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, DNS, ADTVR04050 ADTVR16050
H.264 hardware compression DDNS, NTP, and SADP 4 channel, 500GB 16 channel, 500GB
support
• Audio for all channels
• Supports unicast & multicast IP ADTVR04100 ADTVR16100
• Multi-zone motion detection
technologies 4 channel, 1TB 16 channel, 1TB
• Email alarm image upon motion or
• Web client operator interface using
alarm ADTVR16200
Internet Explorer ADTVR08050
• Option to select the number of days 8 channel, 500GB 16 channel, 2TB
• ADTVR Viewer iPhone Mobile Client
to retain recorded video
Application
• Lock and unlock option to secure ADTVR08100 ADTVR16400
• Full featured remote client software
critical video events 8 channel, 1TB 16 channel, 4TB
• Centralized alarm interaction at
• Simultaneous playback - upto
remote host PC
8 cameras from local interface ADTVR08200
8 channel, 2TB
• Export video clips with player
• Export and import configuration
settings
• Log management system with
powerful query options
American Dynamics 80
ADTVR-VS
ADTVR-VS:
American Dynamics 81
ADTVR Embedded Digital Video Recorders
System Diagram
ADTVR or ADTVR-VS
2-Way
Audio
Support
Common Remote
Client for TVR Series
I/O Alarm of Products
Analog Fixed Cameras, Devices
Ethernet Mobile
SpeedDomes, or
TCP/IP Export to USB Devices
Mini-Domes
IE Web Devices (SATA
Browser DVD-RW)
• Common Remote Client for entire TVR series • Live viewing of up to 64 cameras from single Remote Client
• Multiple camera playback of recorded video • Manage up to 256 TVR devices from single Remote Client
• Centralized remote alarm monitoring • Interactive electronic maps (add camera icons, monitor alarms)
• Popup live camera view on event • Dual LCD display support from single Remote Client
• 2-way audio support • Upload event triggered video recording to centralized Remote Client
• Remote configuration and maintenance • Remote export / import system configuration files
• Advanced H.264 based network optimization tools • Main Stream and Sub Stream encoding parameter support
American Dynamics 82
Hybrid Video Recording
Solutions
Retailers around the world
together.
HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders
A
merican Dynamics Hybrid Video Recording Solutions protect your customers’ analog camera
investment while they either consider transitioning to IP cameras, or enjoy the benefits of a
mixed environment. HDVR supports a long list of IP and analog cameras and uses H.264 compression on
both analog (one of the only in the industry!) and IP inputs, providing customers with superior storage
capabilities. HDVR is integrated with both Kantech and Software House access control solutions.
HDVR
Protect your analog investment with HDVR hybrid video recording Each HDVR server includes up to 32 analog inputs and 8 IP inputs,
solutions from American Dynamics. HDVR provides seamless which can be easily expanded to up to 64 IP cameras per server.
integration and recording of both analog and IP video surveillance The unique hardware platform supports H.264 technology on all
cameras on an enterprise class chassis. analog channels and MJPEG, and MPEG-4 on IP channels. A RAID
5 option on the 4U model provides additional storage capacity.
The powerful, yet easy to operate client user interface installs on
HDVR features a removable backplane, making it extremely easy to
any standard computer running Windows, Linux, or Mac OS X and
perform maintenance on the server without disrupting service.
can connect to multiple servers. A single HDVR client license can
BNCs remain intact by removing the backplane; allowing you to
be deployed on multiple computers. Each HDVR client can support
replace only the front of the unit. HDVR provides a powerful security
up to 4 monitor displays to support cameras or maps in a variety of
solution that protects your entire business.
user specified configurations. Video from all HDVR systems can
also be accessed with web browsers and mobile dev ices with
access to the Internet.
Video from all HDVR systems can also be accessed with web
browsers and mobile devices with access to the Internet. The
optional Enterprise software license enabled at the server level,
adds unique user administration functionality that is useful in an
enterprise deployment. Supported features include: Active
Directory Integration, Multi-Level Mapping, and Enterprise User
Administration.
American Dynamics 84
HDVR Hybrid Video Recorders
American Dynamics 85
Hybrid Video Recording Solutions
System Diagram
IP Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes Analog Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes
Audio
In/Out
Printer
HDVR
I/O Alarm
Devices
Remote Client
and Web Client USB Joysticks
Cell Phones
Cash Register and PDAs USB Devices
Ethernet TCP/IP
API (CD-W or
Thumbdrive)
Whether you use IP cameras, analog cameras, or a mixture of both, HDVR brings it all together in one seamless interface. Each HDVR supports
up to 32 analog inputs and 8 IP inputs, which can be easily expanded to up to 64 IP cameras per server.
American Dynamics 86
Video Management Systems
American Dynamics offers the
more intuitive.
Video Management Systems
A
network or digital video recorder is only as powerful as the applications that allow you to
monitor and control the video data. American Dynamics’ video management applications make
your VideoEdge or Intellex recorders important business-enablers. The intuitive client interfaces provide
tiled displays of multiple video feeds and allow you to configure the viewing panes in different sizes to
display some cameras in a larger resolution than others. Our feature-rich applications offer remote
management, multi-monitor, user-specific layouts and innovative smart search and investigation tools.
American Dynamics 88
victor Unified Video Management Systems
U
nifying Video Platforms. The victor is a unified interface that lets you manage and control your
Intellex DVRs, VideoEdge NVRs, and associated IP and analog cameras. It is a platform for the
future that will unify other security and business applications such as access control, intrusion, fire, and more.
IP Cameras
Analog Cameras
Intellex
VideoEdge
American Dynamics 89
victor Unified Video Management System
FO R V ID EO ED G E A N D IN T EL L E X
Intuitive Operator
Experience
Easily create multi-monitor,
user-specific layouts to
increase operator efficiency.
With one click of the mouse,
you can switch to a different
layout that better suits the
needs of a new situation.
• Manage live and recorded video • Create, store, and manage camera
from Intellex* DVRs and VideoEdge views Model NumberS
NVRs; analog and IP cameras all ADVC10S05SQL
• Organize and customize screen ADVC10S02
from one intuitive client
layouts for different operators’ victor site manager/ victor site manager/client
• Robust motion-based smart needs client sof t ware base base-5 connections w/SQL
search uses meta-data to Ser ver 20 08
• Built using Microsoft WPF with 2 concurrent client
provide fast video searching
(Windows Presentation Foundation) connections
and analysis
ADVS10S01
• Supports XP, Vista, and Windows 7
• Display H.264, ACC, MJPEG, victor site manager, 1
(32 / 64 bit support) ADVC10S05
MPEG-4 video simultaneously
victor site manager/client additional concurrent client
• Conduct time and date search sof t ware base with 5 connection
on up to ten cameras across
concurrent client connections
ten Intellex/VideoEdge recorders
ADVS10S05
at once
ADVC10S02SQL victor site manager, 5
• Includes advanced integrated
victor site manager/client base- additional concurrent client
policy management to control
2 connections w/SQL Ser ver connections
access to cameras, recorders, PTZ
controls, search, export, and more 20 08
American Dynamics 90
Network Client for Intellex
Network Client:
• R eceive alarm • V iew recorded video
notifications from several in streaming playback MODEL NUMBERS
Intellex units regardless of without having to ADDSNC43 ADDSNCSI
whether Network Client download individual video N e t wo r k C l i e n t m g t /c o n f i g.v i ew i n g, N e t wo r k C l i e n t, S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
is active clips Single license single license
• R
emotely use video • S
imultaneously view live
analysis tools for or recorded video from ADDSNC43UL ADDSNCSIUL
scheduling cameras to multiple cameras on one N e t wo r k C l i e n t m g t /c o n f i g / v i ew i n g, N e t wo r k C l i e n t, S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
record and specifying or more Intellex units u n l i m i te d l i c e n s e c o r p o r ate l i c e n s e
search criteria based
• P
lay back video from one
on the size, speed, and A D D S N CV M K A DAC K B P C20 0 0
or multiple cameras with
direction of an object in N e t wo r k C l i e n t, v i r tu a l m ati r i x / Key b o a rd a c c y, key b o a rd to P C
both audio and text
motion key b o a rd c o n tro l w i th M e g a Powe r c o n n e c ti o n k i t, fo r A D20 0 0 s e r i e s
• U se the network m atr i x sw i tc h e r i n te g r ati o n, s i n g l e key b o a rd s
• R emotely use the
bandwidth limiter to license
advanced text tool for
download or transfer A DAC K B P C M P C C
scheduling cameras to
video without overtaxing A D D S N CV M K U L Key b o a rd a c c y, key b o a rd to P C
record and specifying
your system N e t wo r k C l i e n t, v i r tu a l m atr i x / c o n n e c ti o n k i t, fo r M e g a Powe r
search criteria based on
the contents and contexts • R emotely synchronize key b o a rd c o n tro l w i th M e g a Powe r C o n tro l C e n te r key b o a rd s
of a text transaction all Intellex units on your m atr i x sw i tc h e r i n te g r ati o n, c o r p o r ate
network by the hour, license ADDSNCICB
• R emotely search for video N e t wo r k C l i e n t, I n c i d e n t C l i p B u i l d e r,
minute, and second
using standard or Smart single license
ADDSNCSIVMK
Search tools • E mail or export video N e t wo r k C l i e n t S n a p - I n M a n a g e r
segments on CD and
• O rganize camera icons w i th v i r tu a l m atr i x key b o a rd ADDSNCICBUL
DVD in AVI or proprietary
on your computer screen a n d M e g a Powe r m atr i x sw i tc h e r N e t wo r k C l i e n t, I n c i d e n t C l i p B u i l d e r,
format converted via
as easily as you would i n te g r ati o n c o r p o r ate l i c e n s e
Network Client
arrange files and folders
on a PC • S upports video analytics ADDSNCSIVMKUL
with integrated snap-in N e t wo r k C l i e n t S n a p - I n M a n a g e r,
• C reate video incident
interface w i th v i r tu a l m atr i x key b o a rd
storyboards with the
incident clip builder a n d M e g a Powe r m atr i x sw i tc h e r
feature for video evidence i n te g r ati o n
or auditing
American Dynamics 91
Intellex Applications
Intellex Archive Manager:
• M
anages the storage of • S
pecify archive data (alarms,
video, audio, and text data schedules, specific cameras) MODEL NUMBERS
to network-attached storage
• P
rovides Network Client ADDSAM43U10
devices
access to network stored ( U p to 10 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• Integrates with Intellex Policy data
Manager for securing access
• U
ser interface provides ADDSAM43U25
to network stored data
real-time storage status and ( U p to 25 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• Increases storage capacity, reports
allowing you to retain video
• L everages Microsoft ADDSAM43UUL
longer
Management Console (MMC) ( U n l i m i te d I n te l l ex U n i ts)
• P
rovides the ability to assign technologies Upgrades provide an ever-
storage space per Intellex
increasing return on your
unit and controlwhich
storage devices are online initial investment; visit www.
americandynamics.net
• E
nables advanced security • S implified configuration
for Intellex Ultra, DVMS, by applying security MODEL NUMBERS
LT, or IP templates to multiple
ADDSPM43U10
Intellex systems
• T ighter access ( U p to 10 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
management of Intellex • M
onitor availability of
functions with login Intellex units and access
ADDSPM43U25
credentials and access violations by using the logs
( U p to 25 I n te l l ex U n i ts)
privileges per user per in Windows Event Viewer
group generated by Intellex
Policy Manager ADDSPM43UUL
• Integrate physical security
with IT security via • L everages Microsoft ( U n l i m i te d I n te l l ex U n i ts)
Windows network security Management Console Upgrades provide an ever-
(MMC) technologies increasing return on your
• C entral management
of security accessible initial investment; visit www.
anywhere through the americandynamics.net
Admin Client
American Dynamics 92
Storage Solutions
As demand for digital video
24 hours a day.
Video Storage
I
ntegrated and scalable, our storage solutions offer the best-in-class system fault tolerance, and
include an intuitive and integrated browser-based storage interface. Our high-performance storage
solutions can store video from HD or megapixel cameras. Choose the storage solution that is right for you
NVR and HDVR Video Storage Solutions Digital Video Storage Solutions
The second generation American Dynamics iSCSI and Fibre RAID The American Dynamics RAID Storage System is a highly reliable
Storage solutions are designed for high-performance recording storage device that offers high-density, high-performance storage
devices such as the VideoEdge Network Video Recorder or HDVR. expansion for Intellex Ultra digital video management systems. This
They are secure and highly scalable storage solutions that provide low-cost-per-terabyte storage solution features high drive density in
SAN storage for virtually any network and application. a rack-mountable 2U form factor complete with twelve (12) hot-
swappable drive bays. Powerful direct attached storage (DAS) or
The new RAID Tower models are designed for projects requiring a
storage attached network (SAN) configurations provide scalable,
smaller amount of iSCSI storage. They are available in three
high-availability video storage for Intellex Ultra.
different capacities and all come standard with an LCD monitor plus
eight hot-swappable drives that can be locked to provide additional Retain more video over a longer period of time with an Extended
security. Storage Module (ESM). Ideal for Intellex DVMS and LT systems,
each ESM seamlessly expands your database capacity by an
The new Rack Mount models are available in a variety of
additional 640 GB or 1000 GB. You can triple the capacity by
configurations and capacities. There are iSCSI RAID, 4 GB Fibre
cascading up to three ESM units per Intellex DVMS or LT. Both
RAID, and Expansion models which have been uniquely designed to
ESM640 and ESM1000 are compatible with desktop and
utilize the same 3U chassis. These storage solutions come standard
rack-mount installations.
with robust power supplies and fans, and nearly every component
is hot-swappable, including sixteen lockable drives. An optional
battery backup module is also available for the iSCSI and Fibre
RAID units.
American Dynamics 94
NVR and HDVR Video Storage Solutions
LED Indicators HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSU HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs HDDs, LCD, Fans, PSUs
(4) 1 GbE iSCSI (Data)
(2) 4 Gb Fibre Channel (Data)
(2) 1 GbE iSCSI (Data) (1) 100 Mbit (Management) (2) 12 Gb Mini-SAS (In-RAID)
(1) 100 Mbit (Management)
External Interfaces (Rear) (1) 100 Mbit (Management) (1) 12 Gb SAS (1) 12 Gb Mini-SAS
(1) 12 Gb SAS (Out-Expansion)
(1) RS-232 (Out-Expansion) (Out-Expansion)
(2) RS-232
(2) RS-232
160 TB RAW
Maximum Expansion Capacity 160 TB RAW Up to 4 Managed by
N/A 80 HDDs with (4)
(Rear) 80 HDDs with (4) ADERS2Rxxx ADxRS2Rxxxx
ADERS2Rxxx
Hot-Swappable & Lockable Hard Drives Hard Drives Hard Drives Hard Drives
Hot-Swappable & Redundant N/A Power Supplies & Fans Power Supplies & Fans Power Supplies & Fans
Power Supply Single 300W Dual 500W Dual 500W Dual 500W
Battery Backup Module N/A Optional Accessory Optional Accessory Optional Accessory
185 x 315 x 335 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm 447 x 498 x 116 mm
Dimensions (W x D x H)
(7.3 x 12.4 x 13.2 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in) (17.6 x 19.6 x 4.6 in)
Weight (with Maximum Drives) 15.4 kg, (34 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs) 29.5 kg, (65 lbs)
100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC, 100-240 VAC,
Voltage
50-60 Hz, 4-2A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A 50-60 Hz, 7-4A
BTU 1,800 BTU 2,400 BTU 2,400 BTU 2,400 BTU
American Dynamics 95
Network Video Storage Solutions
RAID RackRAID
5-Drive and 3Tower
Expansion Mount Units
• S upports up to 8 drives (Racks) • iSCSI 1 Gb/s ports (Dual for Towers & Quad • U
p to 160 TB of RAW Storage per Server
for Racks) Connection (Racks with 2 TB HDDs)
• W
rites data to a SAN at block-level for
superior performance • T
hree configuration options: iSCSI, Fibre or • R
ack models support daisy-chaining up to
Expansion four Expansion Units for a scalable storage
• L
everages industry-standard Intel ®
solution
architecture • D edicated fast Ethernet management port
• Q
uad iSCSI ports or Dual 4 Gb/s Fibre
• D
esigned with latest high-performance • E
asy-to-install setup wizard with common
ports for main RAID unit
hardware RAID controller GUI (Tower & Racks)
• 16 and 32 channel HDVR support*
• M
ultiple RAID levels for robust fault • R
edundant and modular design with hot-
tolerance swappable components (Racks)
* Note: Additional Model Numbers will be added to the Price List to offer additional RAID Set and Virtual Disk configuration options to support HDVR, Intellex, VideoEdge NVR, as well as other
products that require reliable and high-performance storage at competitive prices.
American Dynamics 96
Digital Video Storage Solutions
iSCSI RAID Storage (RSS) IEEE 1394 Extended Storage Modules (ESM)
Direct Attached Storage (DAS) or
Drive Type Extended Storage Module
Network Attached Storage (SAN)
• O
ffers high-density, high-
performance storage MODEL NUMBERS
expansion for Intellex Ultra ADRSS090TBHPH
ADRSS030TB
and Intellex IP digital video
management systems
ADRSS060TB ADHDRSS750
• Low cost per terabyte
• H
igh drive density in a rack- ADRSS030TBH ADHDRSS1000
mountable 2U form factor
complete with twelve (12) hot-
ADRSS060TBH ADHDRSS250
swappable drive bays
• P
owerful direct attached ADRSS120TBHP ADHDRSS400
storage (DAS) or storage
attached network (SAN)
ADRSS120TBHPH ADHDRSS500
configurations
ADRSS090TBHP
• E
xpands the Intellex Digital • Rack mount or desktop
Video Management System MODEL NUMBERS
• T
he ESM allows you to
database capacity
cascade up to 3 units per ESM640
• A
vailable in either 640 GB or Intellex for a total of 1,960
1000 GB models GB for the ESM640 and ESM1000
3,000 GB for the ESM1000 **
• A
single ESM640 provides
an additional 350 days • 1U rack height
of recording and a single
• H
igh-speed IEEE 1394
ESM1000 provides an
(FireWire) interface
additional 545 days of
recording*
* Assumes 30 ips NTSC and 25 ips PAL at minimal activity in all cameras. Actual record duration will vary based on Intellex settings such as motion within the scene and video quality.
**
Each Intellex requires a minimum of 512 MB of RAM.
American Dynamics 97
Matrix Switcher Solutions
“The capital expenditure is not the
and technical
immensely.”
- Ron Ackerman
Security Consultant
O
ur matrix switchers give you the basic building blocks for developing a video surveillance
system tailored to the dimensions your situation dictates. Every one of our matrix switchers
are full cross point, equipped with dome control and sophisticated alarm handling. You can program a
variety of responses from one or multiple alarms to include any combination of salvos, presets, patterns,
auxiliary actions, and more. The greatest strength of our matrix switchers besides proven reliability, lies
with in their scalability, they start as small as 16 inputs by 4 outputs and grow your system to
We also provide a complete selection of keyboards, from basic to the most feature-rich. Macros,
multifunction keys, and smart cards make them easy to use. Whether you prefer a small footprint or a
American Dynamics 99
Matrix Switchers
Macro Control Via ADCC1100 & AD2089 Via ADCC1100 & AD2089 Via ADCC1100 & AD2089
Universal Tours 16 64 64
Salvo Switching No 64 64
Priority Levels 8 8 8
User Passwords No 64 64
MegaPower LT:
• E
mbedded menus support English, • N
etwork up to three matrix systems
French, Spanish, German, and Italian on ADnet (RS-485) bus MODEL NUMBERS
• 16 x 4 or 32 x 8 models • D ome ping test ADMPLT16 ADMPLT32
• 1
28 views (camera/preset and • F ive alarm display modes
camera/pattern)
• T hree alarm response modes
• 16 sequences/tours
• S
end alarm messages to other
• A
Dnet (RS-485) and RS-232 networked matrix systems
communication protocols
• 255 event messages
• K
eyboard generated (soft alarm) and
• D imensions:
RS-485 network events
90 x 445 x 185 mm (3.5 x 17.5 x 7.3 in)
• U
p to eight keyboards with priority
• Weight: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
settings
• Password protection for menu entry
Matrix Switchers
MegaPower 48 Plus:
• 3
flexible expansion modes using a • O
ptional Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
primary/secondary configuration of up adapter module allows installation with MODEL NUMBERS
to 7 systems and 288 cameras simple UTP cable for video
ADMP48-E
• Ethernet
Cat 5 IP connection for multi- • F
ull embedded system menus for easy
matrix communications and system system setup Accessory
setup
• R
emovable flash memory module for VR48KIT
• E
ASY 48 configuration and monitoring data backup without a PC ( R a c k m o u n t k i t fo r M e g a Powe r 4 8)
software for Windows based systems
• User-defined macros
• D ome ping test and status display VRCMKIT
• S
upports wireless text messaging on
( M atr i x c a b l e m a n a g e m e n t k i t, r a c k o r
• Improved legacy RS-422 dome alarm for pagers and cellular phones
support, including simplex RS-422 wa l l m o u n t a b l e, i n c l u d e s 3 b r a c ke ts)
• 4096 preset titles, 250 alarm titles
• S
ensorNet/RS-232 command for
• D
edicated alarm programming tables
DirectSet dome control menu with
that differentiate between alarm
ControlCenter 200 and 300 series
sources
keyboards
• E
ight flexible RS-232 inputs,
• M
odular microprocessor-based, high-
expandable to 32 (per system)
density matrix
• 64 system tours and 64 salvos
• 4
8 video inputs by 16 video outputs, 8
video outputs with text overlay • D imensions:
508 x 438 x 89 mm
• S
upports both NTSC and PAL video
(20 x 17.3 x 3.5 in)
standards
• Weight:
• S
lim, vertical wall-mount design;
Main Electronics Unit: 2.72 kg (6 lbs)
optional rack mount kit available
Wall Bracket: 1.54 kg (3.4 lbs)
• T
ool-free removability of main Patch Panel Assembly: 1.72 kg (3.8 lbs)
electronics unit (MEU) keeps system
wiring intact
MegaPower 3200:
• S
ingle CPU with 16 RS-232 ports • 1
0/100 Base-T Ethernet network connection entries for inputs or optional Internal video
supporting up to 64 keyboards via for PC - based configuration, firmware loss detection
American Dynamics port expanders updates, activity logging, snapshot, and
• 1
28 alarm text messages can be defined
email text messaging
• D
ual units connected together via cross with 25 alarm display/clearance modes, and
over cables provide 32 RS-232 ports • A
ctivity logging and reporting of user 16 email messages
supporting up to 128 keyboards with control, alarms, and configuration changes
• L
CD for CPU status and LED indicators for
American Dynamics port expanders to a network PC
port activity
• D
ual CPU mode provides redundant CPU • S
ingle CPU systems with up to 128 video
• E
asy swap out of CPU modules without
backup protection with fault detection and outputs and dual CPU systems of up to 256
removing system cables
hot-switch failover to ensure uninterrupted video outputs
system operation • S
tore snapshot of important scenes to
• U p to 3200 video inputs
network PC upon request
• E
nhanced Administration SYstem (EASY)
• S
atellite-connection of up to 30 systems
configuration and monitoring software • M
ultilingual software supports English,
provides full cross-point video matrix of up
tool to retrieve, archive, and load back French, Italian, German, Spanish, and
to 38,528 video inputs by 256 video outputs
MegaPower CPU data Portuguese
• A
utomatic call-up of alarms defined by four
time-controlled tables each with 4,096
Switcher Bays
• Matrix standard bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS & AD2010DB, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010N
• Matrix bi-level bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS & AD2010DB, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2020N
• Matrix standard bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS, AD2010PS-1 & AD2010DB, 100-240 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010P
• Matrix bi-level bay for MP3200 system, includes AD2010PS, AD2010PS-1 & AD2010DB, 100-240 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2020P
Video Input
• Matrix input card for MP3200 systems (no back panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016PC
• Matrix input module for single level MP3200 systems, w/back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-1*
• Matrix input module for level 1 of multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-2
• Matrix input module for level 2 of multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-3
• Matrix input module for additional multi-level MP3200 systems, w/back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016AVIM-4
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-1 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-1*
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-2 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-2
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-3 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-3
• Matrix back panel for AD2016AVIM-4 for MP3200 systems (no input card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016BP-4
Video Output
• Matrix output module for 960 input MP3200 system, w/single-width back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-1*
• Matrix output module for 1920 input MP3200 system, w/double-width back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-3
• Matrix output module for 3200 input MP3200 system, w/double-width back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BVOM-4
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-1, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-1*
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-3, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-3
• Matrix back panel for AD2024BVOM-4, for MP3200 systems (no output card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BP-4
• Matrix output card for AD2024BVOM, for MP3200 systems (no back panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2024BPC
Data Buffers
• Matrix data receiver/buffer module for MP3200 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010DB
• Matrix video loss detector module for 256 inputs for MP3200 (upgrade kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010DBVLKIT
Power Supply
• Matrix power supply module for MP3200 systems, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010PS
• Matrix power supply module for MP3200 systems, 100-240 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010PS-1*
Upgrade Kits
• Matrix upgrade for 8 input cards, AD2016PC/VIM-x, for more than 1024 inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2016FWKIT
• Matrix upgrade for 2 DBVL cards, AD2010DBVL, for more than 1024 inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2010VLFWKIT
• Expansion labels for VOM-1 systems greater than 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-1LABEL
• Expansion labels for VOM-3 systems greater than 1024 input x 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-3LABEL
• Expansion labels for VOM-4 systems greater than 1024 input x 128 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADVOM-4LABEL
ADTTE
AD2089
• C
amera, monitor, and satellite site • C
amera, monitor, recorder, and satellite
selection site selection AD2089
• D imensions: • D imensions:
130 x 194 x 260 mm 76.2 x 419 x 133 mm AD2089R-1
(5.12 x 7.63 x 10.24 in) (3 x 16.5 x 5.25 in)
• Weight: 1 kg (2.2 lbs) • Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
Double Duty
You can use ControlCenter
200 & 300 Keyboards with our
MegaPower Matrix Switcher/
Controller systems. Get all of the
basic functions at an affordable
price plus the versatility to control
all system activities from one
keyboard.
ADCC0200 series
ADCC0300 series
• C
hoice of models with variable- • P
asscode protection for
speed and vector solving joysticks programming functions MODEL NUMBERS
• S
electable keyboard protocols, • D
irect control of RS-232 devices via ADCC0200
RS-232 or ADnet (RS-485) for remappable keys (ADnet – RS-485 N o p owe r s u p p l y
control of various matrix switching Mode)
systems
• M
egaPower 3200, 48, 168, and ADCC0200P
• LCD with adjustable contrast 1024 control (RS-232 Mode) I n c l u d e s p owe r s u p p l y
• T
actile, color-coded elastomeric • C
ontrolCenter 200 allows no
keys programming access – “operate ADCC0300
only” (RS-232 Mode) N o p owe r s u p p l y
• P reset, pattern, and auxiliary control
• D imensions:
• L ens, alarm, tour, and salvo control
80 x 340 x 132 mm ADCC0300P
• N
ew DirectSet dome function (3.1 x 13 x 5.2 in) I n c l u d e s p owe r s u p p l y
control
• Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)
Remote Kits
ADCCACPSP
Alarm Devices
• Matrix alarm interface unit, provides 64 alarm inputs, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2096A
• Matrix alarm interface unit, provides 64 alarm inputs, 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2096-1
• Matrix alarm responder, provides 32 relays to follow alarm monitor, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2032
• Matrix alarm responder, provides 32 relays to follow alarm monitor, 230 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD2032-1
Power Supply
• Additional power supply120/230 VAC for ADAC1100, ADMPLT16/32, ADMP48-E or ADMPCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP-PSU
Video Outputs
Fixed Cameras,
Intellex Digital Video
SpeedDomes, or
Management Systems
Mini-Domes
MegaPower LT
Integrate up to three MegaPower LT units and control everything from any keyboard on the network. By forming a distributed system, you can
view and control cameras installed at different points throughout your property as well as receive and acknowledge any alarm events that they
generate.
Video Outputs
Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Intellex Digital Video Mini-Domes
Management Systems
MegaPower 48 Plus
RS-232 Inputs
Alarm Inputs ADTTE Touch Tracker,
System Setup
MegaPower 1100,
and Programming
ControlCenter 200 & 300,
& AD2089 Keyboards
Choose from one of three expansion modes that increase your system’s capacity by up to 288 cameras and 8 monitors using 8, 12, or 16 video
trunks. The MegaPower 48 Plus can function either as a standalone unit or as part of a network, making it the perfect choice for anyone who
needs flexibility for future growth.
Video Outputs
Fixed Cameras,
SpeedDomes, or
Mini-Domes
MegaPower 3200
Enhanced Administration
System (EASY) Configuration and Monitoring
ADTTE Touch Tracker,
Software
MegaPower 1100,
ControlCenter 200 & 300,
& AD2089 Keyboards
Alarm Inputs
The MegaPower 3200 matrix switcher supports up to 3200 video inputs, 256 video outputs, 128 keyboards, 4096 alarms, and 30 satellite
systems. The MP3200 provides Intellex DVR control using the AD2089 keyboard and Network Client software, and hot switch capabilities using
a second MPCPU unit with no hot switch accessory unit required. The EASY CPU configuration and monitoring software allows remote
configuration and monitoring.
SpeedDomes,
Mini-Domes,
& Fixed Cameras
Live
Recorded
Video
Video Intellex Policy
CCTV Keyboards
Video Analytics Manager, Intellex
Archive Manager
& Browser Client
POS Integration
Challenge: The casino wants to add the ability to play back recorded Challenge: The security administrator wants to be able to
video on analog monitors and control cameras via a matrix keyboard simultaneously display as many cameras from remote locations as
without having to retrain the operator (no PC keyboard or mouse). possible. However, because each location only needs to monitor a
few areas, installing a matrix switcher at each location is not a
Solution: Add a PC running Network Client and use a serial
cost-effective option.
connection for the AD2089 keyboard – a powerful, easy to use
solution that’s transparent to the operator. Solution: Network Client displays up to 64 cameras with four monitors
using the customers existing network infrastructure on which the
Intellex digital video management systems are installed. A single
mouse-click or stroke of the keyboard will manage the “wall of
monitors” via Network Client.
technology.
LCD Monitors
W
e provide a comprehensive range of monitors. Our screen resolution and crystal clear
imaging make surveillance easier to perform and more accurate. Whether you require
single or multiple inputs, a shallow profile or heavy duty metal cabinet, American Dynamics can deliver the
right monitor for the job. Every monitor we offer complies with universal mounting standards so you can
Type Screen Size Resolution Video Interface VESA Mounting Monitor Model
General
Purpose 17 in 1280 x 1024 VGA & DVI 75 mm ADCMLCD17
LCD
General
Purpose 19 in 1280 x 1024 VGA & DVI 75 mm ADCMLCD19
LCD
VGA, looping
Multiple
15 in 1024 x 768 Composite (BNC), 75 mm ADMNM1LCD15
Input LCD
looping S-Video
VGA, looping
Multiple
17 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm ADMNM1LCD17
Input LCD
looping S-Video
VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
17 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm & 100 mm ADMNM17LCDP
Input LCD
S-Video
VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
19 in 1280 x 1024 Composite (BNC), 75 mm & 100 mm ADMNM19LCDP
Input LCD
S-Video
VGA, DVI, Composite
Multiple
20 in 1600 x 1200 (RCA), S-Video, 100 mm ADDELL2007
Input LCD
Component
HDMI, DisplayPort,
Multiple VGA, DVI, Composite
24 in 1920 x 1200 100 mm ADDELL2410
Input LCD (RCA), S-Video,
Component
VGA, 2 looping
Multiple
20 in 800 x 600 Composite (BNC), 100 mm ADMNLCD20RK
Input LCD
looping S-Video
Public View
LCD with VGA, 2 looping ADMCA1LCD20B
Integrated 20 in 800 x 600 Composite (BNC), 100 mm
Auto-Iris looping S-Video ADMCA1LCD20W
Camera
disappear
Video Accessories
Video Line Amplifier
• Video accessory, video line amplifier, 120 VAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD1422
Video Adapters
• Cable accessory, twisted pair to BNC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADACTP01BNC
on the job.
© 2011 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved.
The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco International Ltd. will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution
wherever necessary. All trademarks not owned by Tyco International Ltd. are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws.
Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your sales representative.
AD0200-PG-201101-R01-LT-EN
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 10: METEO STATION DATASHEETS
1. MET ONE
2. STEVENS
Page 40 of 44
MSO Weather Sensor
Wind Speed and Wind Direction are measured using
conventional cup and vane techniques. All other
measurements are housed in a multi-plate naturally aspirated
radiation shield to reduce solar radiation errors. The shield is
constructed of a series of concentric white aluminum plates,
which allow air to flow through the shield, while blocking
direct solar rays.
Options:
-- 10600 USB and power interface.
-- WMO compliant external tipping bucket rain gauge
connects simply and allows for correct installation
and siting per industry guidelines.
-- Solar radiation sensors are connected easily and integrate
seamlessly into the SWS data record.
Key Features
• Wind Speed and Direction
• Rugged All Metal Housing
• Temperature
• SDI12, RS232, RS485 Outputs
• Humidity
• Met One 7500 Protocol
• Barometric Pressure
• Integrated Mount and 50ft Cable
• Rain and Solar Radiation Options
sales@metone.com
MSO Weather Sensor
Measurements & Specifications (continued)
Temperature
Range: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
Accuracy: ±0.4°C
Resolution: 0.1°C
Relative Humidity
Range: 0 to 100%
Accuracy: ±4% (1)
Resolution: 1.0%
Pressure
Range: 500 to 1100 hPa
Accuracy: ±2 hPa (3)
Resolution: 0.1 hPa
Electrical
Measurement Rate Output: 1 Hz
Signal Output: RS-232C, RS-485, SDI-12
8-36 VDC Supply, 10mA typical @ 12VDC, option dependent
Environmental
Temperature: -40°C to +60°C (-40 to +140 °F)
Humidity: 0 to 100%
Notes:
1. At 25°C
sales@metone.com
Met Station One (MSO)
Five Parameter Weather Station
Features
• Five Weather Parameters:
• Wind Speed
• Wind Direction
• Air Temperature
• Barometric Pressure
• Relative Humidity
• Built-in solar radiation shield
• English or Metric unit outputs
• SDI-12 or RS-232 outputs standard
• RS-485 or RS-422 outputs optional
• Pre-assembled and ready to deploy
out of the box
Applications
Description • Weather stations
• Site surveys
The new Met Station One (MSO) weather station combines five of the most popular
meteorological measurements into one simple, economical package, allowing for • Mobile weather measurement
efficient and accurate comprehensive weather monitoring to be added to any exist- • Verification of weather data from
ing site or new installation. other instruments
The MSO features wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity,
and barometric pressure sensors. A rainfall measurement option can be added by
integrating a tipping bucket rain gage directly into the serial message being output-
ted by the MSO, or by simply connecting it to another port on a data logger shared
with the MSO.
The pre-assembled MSO is ready for immediate deployment and includes u-bolt
hardware for mounting to a pole, mast, or pipe. The air temperature, humidity, and
barometric pressure sensors are housed in a solar radiation shield positioned below
the mechanical wind direction and speed sensor.
www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
Met Station One (MSO)
Corporate Headquarters
12067 NE Glenn Widing Drive
Technical Specifications
Suite 106
Portland, Oregon 97220
Power Requirments
800.452.5272 Tel 9 to 17 VDC @ 4 mA
503.445.8000 Communications
503.445.8001 Fax SDI-12 and RS-232 standard
info@stevenswater.com (RS-485 and RS-422 optional)
www.stevenswater.com
Operating Temperature
-40°C to +60°C
Since 1911, Stevens Water
Monitoring Systems, Inc. has Wind Speed and Direction Specifications
provided complete water Speed Range: 0 – 50 m/sec (111.8 mph)
Speed Resolution: 0.1 m/sec (0.22 mph)
monitoring solutions including:
Speed Accuracy: ± 2%
• Water Level Sensors Direction Range: 0 – 360°
• Water Quality Sensors Direction Resolution: 1°
• Soil Moisture Sensors Direction Accuracy: ± 5°
• Chart Recorders Threshold, both Speed & Direction: 1 m/sec (2.23 mph)
• Staff Gages Temperature and Humidity Specifications
• Telemetry Systems Temperature Range: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
• Data Collection Platforms Temperature Resolution: 0.1°C
Temperature Accuracy: ± 0.5°C
Relative Humidity Range: 0 - 100%
Relative Humidity Resolution: 1%
Relative Humidity Accuracy: ± 4%
Barometric Pressure Specifications
Range: 500 – 1100 mbars (14.76 - 32.48 inHg)
Resolution: 0.1 mbar (0.002 inHg)
Accuracy: ± 2 mbars (0.059 inHg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part # Description
Met Station One, SDI-12 and RS-232 output
51127
Includes 50 feet of cable and mounting hardware
Met Station One (MSO)
Installation Instructions
Siting
• Find suitable location within cable length of recording electronics / display.
• Locate true north.
Mounting
• Use quick mount u-bolts to install on vertical or horizontal mast, pole or pipe.
• Tighten nuts, keeping sensor level.
Direction Alignment
• Install alignment shoulder screw into wind direction vane hub.
• Align sensor so wind direction counterweight is to the South, vane tail is to true North.
Check Operation
• Check that the vane and cups rotate freely.
RS-232 Configuration
• 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control
SDI-12 Configuration
• Default address 0
• Conforms to SDI-12 V1.3
www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
Met Station One (MSO)
Installation Instructions
Connections
• Run cable to recorder or computer
• Connect using included screw-terminal DB-9 adaptor or solder DB-9 or DB-25.
Wiring
• RED +9 TO +17 VOLTS DC @ 4mA
• BLK POWER COMMON
• WHT RS-232 TX
• BRN RS-232 RX
• GRN RS-232 / SDI-12 COMMON
• BLU SDI-12
• WHT/BRN SHIELD (must be grounded for transient protection to function)
www.stevenswater.com 1.800.452.5272
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 11: PROJECT SCHEDULE
Page 41 of 44
C100-1 Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau - - Tender Schedule - Print Date : 26-Sep-18 18:59 Page 1 of 2
Activity ID Activity Name Orig Month
Dur
-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau 304 Photovoltaic power station 20 MW Project - Guinea-Bissau
A1000 LNTP 0 LNTP
A1020 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates 7 Site Boundries With Co-ordinates
A1030 Geotech Survey 35 Geotech Survey
A1010 Receiving of NTP 0 Receiving of NTP
DESIGN & ENGINEERING
E SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS 214 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS & APPROVALS
DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS 87 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SUBMISSIONS
A1050 MDL Finalization 7 MDL Finalization
A1060 Bill of Material Finalisation 11 Bill of Material Finalisation
A1070 Desing & Engineering Submissions 30 Desing & Engineering Submissions
A1140 Authority Approvals & Permits 40 Authority Approvals & Permits
A1080 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions 30 Priority-1 Drawing Submissions
A1090 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals 30 Priority-1 Drawing Approvals
A1100 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions 30 Priority-2 Drawing Submissions
A1110 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals 30 Priority-2 Drawing Approvals
A1120 Technical Submissions based on Geotech 30 Technical Submissions based on Geotech
A1130 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech 30 TechnicalApprovals based onGeotech
A1150 IFC Drawing Release 30 IFC Drawing Release
ORDERING OF MATERIAL 35 ORDERING OF MATERIAL
A1170 MMS 7 MMS
A1190 String Combiner Box 7 String Combiner Box
A1210 Inverters 7 Inverters
A1180 Solar Cable 7 Solar Cable
A1200 PV Module 9 PV Module
A1220 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 7 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1230 MV Panel & RMUs 7 MV Panel & RMUs
A1240 DC, LT & HT Cable 7 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1250 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 14 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1260 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 14 Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
SUBCONT 57 SUBCONTRACTING AND SERVICES ORDERING
A1280 Order for Tempory Works 15 Order for Tempory Works
A1290 Order for Execution Work 7 Order for Execution Work
MC , MANUFACTURING,
MANU INSPECTION & MDCC 118 MC , MANUFACTURING, INSPECTION & MDCC
A1310 MMS 100 MMS
A1330 String Combiner Box 60 String Combiner Box
A1350 Inverters 85 Inverters
A1320 Solar Cable 50 Solar Cable
A1360 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 65 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1370 HT Panel 90 HT Panel
A1380 RMUs 80 RMUs
A1340 PV Module 80 PV Module
A1390 DC, LT & HT Cable 70 DC, LT & HT Cable
A1400 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system 90 Scada, Controlling and Weather monitoring system
A1410 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items 65 AC & DC Components & Accessories, FFP, Earthing & other Miscellaneous items
TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
TRANSPO 145 TRANSPORTATION FROM EX-WORKS TO ON-SITE STORE DELIVERY
A1460 String Combiner Box -1s Lot 35 String Combiner Box -1s Lot
A1480 PV Module- 1st Lot 45 PV Module- 1st Lot
A1450 Solar Cable 35 Solar Cable
A1470 String Combiner Box Final Lot 35 String Combiner Box Final Lot
A1510 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer 35 Inverter &Auxilary Transformer
A1540 DC, LT & HT Cable 35 DC, LT & HT Cable
Page 42 of 44
2018
Safety Management
1x30 (Bula) + 1 x 20 (Mafanco) MWAC PV
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
(September 2018)
1
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Index
GENERAL
SAFETY POLICY
1) HSE POLICY OF HASSAN ALLAM CONSTRUCTION
2) H. A. CONSTRUCTION GOALS
3) ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSABILITIES
SAFETY Training
1) EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION
2) HSE PRE-MEETINGS
3) HSE MEETINGS
CHEMICAL HAZARDS
1) CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
2) MATERIALS SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS)
FOCUS ON AREAS
1)
FABRICATION AND ERECTION STEEL WORKS
2) CIVIL WORK
3) FINE TRADES
4) METAL TRADES
5) PAINTINGS
6) INSULATION
7) WASTE HANDLING
HSE NOTES
1) LIFTING OPERATIONS
2) MOTOR VEHICLES AND HEAVY EQUIPMENT
3) HAND TOOLS AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS
4) SCAFFOLDS
5) EXCAVATION
6A) GAS WELDING AND CUTTING
6 B) ARC WELDING AND CUTTING
7) DEMOLITION WORK
8) CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
9) ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION AND OTHER TECHNICAL ROOMS
2
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
RADIOGRAPHY
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
1) IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES
2) RECORDS
3) COLOR CODE DESIGNATION
EMERGENCY/FIRE PROTECTION
1) INTRODUCTION
2) FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
3) EMERGENCY ALARM /SIGNALS
ACCIDENT REPORTING
1) ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE
2) COLLECTING FACTS
MEDICAL CARE
3
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
GENERAL
Hassan Allam Holding is one Egypt’s largest and best known construction and property groups, serving customers at home and
throughout the region. We operate through two distinct and wholly-owned subsidiaries, H. A. CONSTRUCTION and Hassan
Allam Properties, with a successful network of subsidiaries in strategic regional markets such as the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
Libya and Algeria.
Renowned Egyptian entrepreneur, Hassan Mohamed Allam, founded the company in the 1930s as a fledgling construction
business serving the Egyptian market. Today, the group is a household name in Egypt and a strong and rapidly growing player
in the Arab regions.
All Hassan Allam employees who work for and with H. A. CONSTRUCTION are considered responsible for health, safety and
environment.
SAFETY POLICY:
H. A. CONSTRUCTION has formulated its own HSE policy taking into consideration the international standards and worldwide
codes applied. Also the “Owner’s Health, Safety and Environment Policy” stated in Section 6.4 of the Owner’s EPC Contract
Technical Specification. Company is always keeping to:
Comply with Egyptian regulation and legalizations as regards to health, safety and environment protection so as to
achieve owner’s requirements.
Get both management and employees committed to health, safety, and environment protection.
Put all HSE matters in line with other such critical business activities as production, Q.C, cost control…etc.
Conform to HSE standards and codes of storage and transportation as regards chemical substances, materials and
equipment.
Assure minimization of environment pollution and the effective use of all energy resources.
Consult with, listen, and respond openly to our clients, employees and/or neighbor companies.
Establish an effective HSE management system, which sets and manually review HSE objectives and targets with the
purpose of continual improvement of our performance.
4
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
NO ACCIDENTS
NO HARM TO PEOPLE
NO DAMAGE TO THE ENVIRONMENT
The success of our business is completely tied to distinguished HSE performance in all our operations and provides health,
safe (physically and emotionally) and secured workplace for everyone who works with us. We also commit to produce
products that can meet the required standards by using hazards-free means of production and can be used safely by our
customers. We committed to align and comply with all HSE legislations specially the Egyptian OHS & environmental laws.
We will work in continues improvements to spare no efforts to eradicate the harmful impacts of occupational health, work
incidents on our people and our operations by adopting appropriate action that leads to manage and control the risks, reduce
wastes, emissions and discharges, and using energy rationally and efficiently.
Fully participate in pinpointing, assessment, eliminating and managing risks as well as giving high concern to potential
hazards and near miss reports and removing their risks as quickly as possible.
Activating safety audits and safety self-inspection programs and will be prompt and immediately responsive to their results
and recommendations.
Ensure that all our employees, contractors and others are well informed, well trained and committed continually to HSE
improvement process.
Use clean technology and improve the efficiency of our older facilities.
Periodically do internal self-assessment and external assessment to assure that the HSE process is working effectively and
use results to improve our HSE performance.
Recognize those who contribute to improve HSE performance.
Maintain accurate information and documentation on all our activities.
5
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
2) H. A. CONSTRUCTION GOALS:
No harm to people
No property damage
No damage to the environment
In order to attain aforementioned goals, H. A. CONSTRUCTION committed itself to develop Health and safety programs and
procedures (HSE Manual) based on personnel selection, training employees and enforcing safety regulations.
H. A. CONSTRUCTION has got a joint responsibility for health and safety between managers, supervisors and employees. It is
a responsibility on all levels to support and promote programs which prevent accidents, to maintain safe working conditions, to
protect the surrounded environment, to give proper safety instructions on every job assigned so as to be acquainted with hazards
and potential hazards relevant to the job; thus avoids injury.
Every employee is responsible for the safety of work, materials and equipment. He has to follow this policy.
Everybody working for H. A. CONSTRUCTION and with H. A. CONSTRUCTION has the authority to stop any
unsafe act.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This Company Safety Procedure describes the structure and responsibilities for the management of health, safety
and the environment within the Company.
2.0 SCOPE
This procedure shall apply to all activities and places of work under the control of the company.
3.0 DEFINITIONS
HSE - Health, Safety and Environment
LEL - Lower Explosive Limit
HEL - Higher Explosive Limit
PPE - Personal Protective Equipment
6
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
3.4 HAZARDS
Source or situation with a potential harm in terms of injury or ill health, damage to property, damage to work place
environment, or a combination of these.
3.6 RISK
It is the chance low or high which somebody or something can be harmed by the hazard and it's the combination of
the like hood and consequences.
However, other types of assessment methods must be used to cover work situations where the permit is either not
appropriate, or the hazard associated with the risk is such that the permit has to be supplemented by a more
comprehensive approach.
3.7.4 Most jobs contain tasks which are normally carried out without the need for a permit. Routine operating tasks,
Housekeeping, catering and cleaning, are example. In this type of work, Risk is usually assessed through day to day
supervision and periodic general analysis of Training needs.
4.0 REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The Company recognizes and subscribes to the belief that Safety is a line management responsibility and an essential
function of organizational management. Accordingly, key personnel within the organizations management team are
assigned particular Safety responsibilities.
4.2 An overview of the functional and reporting structure for Safety is described within an organizational chart provided.
Similarly, the functional and reporting structure for Safety for individual Projects shall also be described in an
appropriate organizational chart.
7
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
5.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
The following statements are provided to summaries individual Safety responsibilities.
Executive Management
Project Managers
Construction Managers
Discipline Engineers
8
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Demonstrate a personal commitment to Safety and by example encourage others to work safely.
Be conversant with their responsibilities under Safety regulations relevant to their work.
Ensure that works are carried out in accordance with any relevant plans, procedures or instructions and
prohibit any non-technical improvisations.
Incorporate Safety instructions when giving orders.
Assess the risks in any design for which they are responsible with the objective of eliminating or mitigating
potential hazards which otherwise will be carried forward to construction.
Ensure that relevant personnel are notified of known hazards.
Safety Officers
Safety Representatives or officers (where appointed or elected) will be recognized by the Company and are
encouraged to participate in appropriate consultation. The Company shall provide appropriate assistance and
facilities.
9
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Site Supervisors
Site Employees
Introduction
Members of the Project Team in areas such as have already undertaken significant HSE Awareness training:
Project staff Induction,
Fire Warden Duties,
Safety Representative Duties,
Pre-job Planning,
HSE Management System,
HSE Risk Assessment / Hazard Spotting,
Manual Handling,
Slips Trips & Falls,
Environmental Aspects,
Waste Management,
PPE - Use & Maintenance,
Office Fire Safety Training.
HSE Construction Training Programmers
Covering Managerial and Supervisory legal responsibilities related to the health and safety of the employees require that the
following is known and understood as part of their competencies:
10
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
This HSE Orientation / Induction will be developed and implemented by HSE Department and taking place in a suitably
equipped training facility within the workplace, all attendees will be assessed to ascertain their level of understanding of the
Induction content and will sign an attendance log following satisfactory completion of the induction program.
The program will be repeated at a minimum of 6 monthly intervals or following major changes to legislative or on-site
condition / working arrangements, whichever is the sooner.
Subjects to be covered in the H&S Orientation / Induction and ongoing work related training will include:
Overview of the project and scope of work
The organization on site
The main site HSE hazards
Site Rules
The HSE Policy and Objectives of the safety program - Zero Accident Performance,
Behavior Based Safety – Employee involvement in safety and process improvement,
The role of the individual in the Toolbox Talk and Post Task briefing program,
South Hook Project’s expectations of employees, - Alcohol and substance abuse policy.
PPE, including clothing, minimum requirements and maintenance,
Reporting of incidents, personal injury and near-misses,
Medical facilities & Personal Health,
Fire prevention and suppression,
Housekeeping,
HSE signs,
Safe access and egress,
Noise,
Manual Handling,
Fire precautions and procedures,
First aid (basic),
Waste management,
Permit to Work systems,
Hot work, Welding, Burning and Grinding,
Hazardous materials (COSHH – Control of Substances Hazardous to Health),
Portable tools and equipment,
Radiation hazards,
Working in Confined Spaces,
Excavations,
Operating equipment i.e. cranes, forklift trucks etc.
Office & Site Environment,
11
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Notes: No visitor(s) will be allowed onto the site unless accompanied at all times. There will be no dispensation for this
rule, should a visitor attend site on a regular basis he/she will attend the site’s full HSE Orientation / Induction.
As all sites will have specific differences, visitors will attend each site’s limited or full HSE Orientation / Induction
program. Regular visitors will be issued with permanent ID cards’ while irregular visitors will be issued with ‘Temporary’
Passes.
Note: Due to the amount of training to be provided it is imperative that training is scheduled and coincides with the scope of
work to be performed.
General:
Personal protective equipment is the last defensive line after the engineering protection so the personal protective equipment
must be met with requirement of ANSI or equivalent standards.
a. Safety Helmets
Safety hats or helmets are rigid headgear made of materials designed to protect the head from impact, flying particles, electric
shock, etc and each helmet consists of a shell, a suspension cradle, and a chin strap.
Employees working in areas where there is danger of head injury from impact; from failing or flying objects; or from electrical
shock and burns, shall be protected by protective helmets.
Ancillary equipment such as ear muffs, welder's shields, etc. can be obtained to fit on helmet shells and holes should not be
drilled into helmet to facilities use of such equipment as this can seriously impair both the mechanical strength and the
electrical resistance of the helmet.
Safety hats or helmets shall not be painted.
The complete helmet should be cleaned regularly with soap and water.
Helmets should be scrapped following any penetration, high impact, or subjection to extreme heat.
Should be worn by all persons at all times when on a construction job site, in an operation plant area, or whenever there are
overhead hazards.
Metal hard hats do not afford proper impact or electrical protection and, therefore, are prohibited from all clients from all client
work areas.
Helmet color coding:
White color helmet for engineer and visitors.
Red color helmet for safety and security staff.
Green color helmet for supervisor and foramens.
Yellow color helmet for all other workers on site.
12
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
b. Foot Wear
Foot protection used must be met with American national standardization institute (ANSI) standard.
Comfort is particularly important for the wearer, so safety footwear must fit properly.
Approved safety footwear is sturdy work shoes with leather uppers and/or leather composition with steel toe
caps.
c. Eye Protection
The most common occupational hazards to the eye are the risk of foreign bodies’ intrusion.
As a minimum standard for eye protection, safety glasses with side shields are required. For further eye protection, extensive
safety equipment must be provided and used for any operation whenever significant risks are recognized such as goggles and
full-face visors used in welding during grinding.
d. Ear Protection
Exposure to high noise can cause hearing loss or impairment. There is no cure for noise-induced hearing loss, so the prevention
of excessive noise exposure is the only way to avoid hearing damage. Specifically designed protection is required, depending
on the type of noise encountered and the auditory condition of the employee.
Some earplugs are disposable, to be used one time and then thrown away. The non-disposable type should be cleaned after each
use for proper protection. Plain cotton is ineffective as protection type against hazardous noise.
Earmuffs need to make a perfect seal around the ear to be effective. Glasses, long sideburns, long hair, and facial movements,
such as chewing, can reduce protection. Special equipment is available for use with glasses.
e. Welders Protection Clothes
Clothes being worn during welding operations must be resistant to heat, free from oil, grease, or any other flammable material.
f. Hand Protection
Wearing correct type of gloves is mandatory whenever required.
Types of gloves are:
1. Fabric gloves: These gloves can protect against dirt, slivers, chafing, and abrasion. These
gloves do not provide sufficient protection, however, to be used with rough, sharp, or heavy
materials.
2. Leather gloves: Leather gloves protect against sparks, moderate heat, blows, chips, and rough
objects. Welders in particular need the durability of higher-quality leather gloves.
3. Insulated rubber gloves provide protection against electricity.
4. Chemical-and liquid-resistance Gloves : made of rubber (latex, nitrite, or butyl), plastic, or
synthetic rubber-like material such as neoprene protect workers from burns, irritation, and
dermatitis caused by contact with oils, greases, solvents, and other chemicals..
13
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Combination-air purifying and air supplying devices: Which used for both (deficient of oxygen or contaminated air).
Respirators shall be used in the following circumstances:
Types of respirator and their cases
Where exposure levels exceed the permissible exposure limit (PEL), during the time period necessary to install or
implement feasible engineering and work practice controls.
In those maintenance and repair activities and during those brief or intermittent operations where exposures exceed
the PEL and engineering and work practice controls are not feasible or are not required.
Where the employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not
sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL
6) PERMIT TO WORK
The permit to work is a means of giving approval for specific work to proceed, safely, involved the protection of the environment
and the prevention of damage to Client assets and production.
The PTW system is intended to ensure:
Tasks are clearly defined.
The risks associated with a task are identified by competent persons (from the department which required the permit).
Suitable precautions to manage those risks are identified.
Potential clashes with other ongoing work are considered.
14
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
7) CHEMICAL HAZARDS
H. A. CONSTRUCTION projects are executed in accordance with the Egyptian Environment Laws and the project
environment protection system. Management of wastes and pollution control plans are being recognized with extreme
emphasis on:
Assessment of potential impact of work activities on environment.
Complying with the environmental protection measures listed in environmental law.
Site Management
Site is managed to ensure pollution at any stage during execution of the project. Precautions are taken to prevent soil, air,
plant, and water pollution. Any accident caused contamination is to be reported under accident/incident report.
Compulsory Product Label
To prevent injury or damage caused by chemical substances. The system comprises, but not limited to, the following:
Marking/turnover requirements stated for chemical substances and other hazardous products, which can be a health
risk.
Lists of contents, regulations, and safety measures...etc. required for minimizing relevant risks. Depending on the
MSDS of each chemical substances handling at the site.
Labeling regulations for products containing organic solvents.
Labeling regulations for flammable and explosive materials
15
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Housekeeping is closely aligned with HSE performance, which is considered as a parameter to the success of a project.
Good housekeeping is derived from good pre-work planning. All appropriate facilities are available to support the
work activities. Such facilities require good planning.
Good housekeeping is fundamental for the safety of working area. It ensures all operations carried out safely.
Locations of work, equipment, must be kept clean and tidy all the time.
Cables and hoses must not be left randomly through the work place causing accidents.
EACH PERSON IS RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING HIS OWN AREA CLEAN AND TIDY
FOCUS ON AREAS
16
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. RESPONSIBILITIES
2. REFERENCES
3. GENERALS
4. RISKS RELATED TO THE SPECIFIC ACTIVITY
5. SAFETY PROCEDURE
6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
7. HEALTH MONITORING
RESPONSIBILITIES
The person in charge of supervising production activities (workshop manager, erection supervisor, foreman, shift foreman,
yard manager, persons in charge of specific activities, etc.) is responsible for correctly arranging working activities and
proper working tools and personal protective equipment (PPE).
The person in charge of maintenance operations shall make sure that equipment, plants and working premises are kept in
perfect working conditions.
Every worker is responsible for using working tools and PPE supplied by the Company to the best effect and for complying
with this procedure and with work instructions received from their supervisors.
Moreover, all workers are responsible for notifying any anomalies concerning machines, plant, equipment, work procedures
or anything else that might endanger safety at work.
Reference
GENERALS
Structural steel works (welding activities excluded) include several working phases such as:
• Handling of pipes, plates, structural shapes, flanges, etc.
• Cutting and flame-shaping of pipes, structural shapes and plates
• Plates shearing
• Bending and forming by means of bending presses
• Rolling
• Assembly and tack-welding
• Grinding
• Chipping, brushing, and hammering by means of pneumatic tools.
Said activities, depending on the specific case, may be carried out either at workshop or in the open air, at heights or in
confined spaces, etc.
As to problems related to the specific activity or work place, reference should be made to relevant specific procedures.
17
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
The main hazards related to structural steel works are the following. The main risks for the operators include:
• Risk of fingers or limbs being crushed during bending, shearing, rolling, handling and lifting of work pieces
• Risk of sprains caused by the operator moving between work pieces or climbing up to/descending from work stations
• Risk of electric shocks caused by faulty insulation of parts carrying live voltage
• Risk of being struck by flying chips during grinding or chipping operations using electric or pneumatic tools
• Risk of caused by noise produced during grinding, chipping, hammering operations, etc.
• Risks stemming from the use of gas for oxy-cutting or from the use of compressed air
• Risk of cutting or abrasion of the limbs or body due to the use of grinding machines or due to manual handling of
materials or tools, etc.
• Risk of irritation or respiratory pathologies caused by fumes and dust produced during operations execution
• Risk of disturbances or pathologies arising from the use of vibrating tools, in general pneumatic tools (neurological
disturbances in the feet and hands, Reynaud’s symptom, “hand-arm vibration” syndrome)
• Risks arising from bad posture during the performance of particular tasks due to the weight of tools.
SAFETY PROCEDURE
To minimize the risks involved in structural steel works always adopt the following preventive measures:
• use working equipment and devices prescribed by the manufacturer and avoid, in any case, modifying them, removing
parts (functional, structural or protective) or exceeding the prescribed performance limits;
• keep the work place free from foreign materials;
• wear, according to the different kinds of risks, the proper personal protective equipment provided by the company;
• make sure that the item has been correctly positioned and that it is held firmly in place in the prescribed manner;
• make sure that only specialized operators carry out the most hazardous handling operations; always check the weight
of the items to be lifted or moved;
• in order to prevent flying chips, never clean the items by blowing;
• When using abrasive portable grinders or cutting grinders, special attention should be paid when fitting the grinding
wheel and checking the relevant specifications. All grinding wheels shall be made to rotate at the maximum speed
before coming into contact with the work piece. Grinding wheels shall never be used for operations for which they
have not been designed.
In particular, the following safety precautions shall be adopted when using portable grinding machines:
Never use grinding machines unless guards have been fitted. This precaution does not apply if the grinding wheel is
entirely contained in the item (e.g. internal grinding of pipes);
always use goggles and gloves during grinding;
never accidentally knock the grinding wheels against obstacles or allow them to bounce;
do not knock the grinding wheel against the item, against edges or on the floor in order to dress it;
18
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
do not drop the grinding machine on the floor or on the work bench and do not carelessly lay it aside during work breaks
or after completing the task;
never use the grinding wheel under uncertain balance conditions;
whenever it is not possible to adopt an effective suction and aeration system, masks or respiratory protective equipment
shall be worn;
if the plug (for electrically driven grinding machines) is in poor conditions, or if the power cable is not insulated, inform
the person in charge so that the situation can be restored;
at the beginning of the task, do not apply all the pressure on the cold grinding wheel;
do not press the item down on one side of the grinding wheel in order not to break it as fragments might be projected;
hold the item firmly so that it is not pulled away by the rotating wheel;
A use proper plier to hold the item in the case it is very small-sized.
the use of vibrating tools shall be kept to the absolute minimum; proper gloves shall be used (that is to say that gloves
shall not increase vibrations);
when using compressed air tools, check that the quick-release hoses are properly fitted;
consult the area supervisor (department head, foreman, workshop manager, etc.) if a non-routine work situation arises;
wherever possible, fit protective screens around each work station in order to prevent flying chips from reaching
neighboring work stations and to stop noise from spreading throughout the workplace;
When using light tools (hammers, mallets, chisels, spanners, metal saws, files, cutting nippers, square and compass) pay
the greatest attention. In particular:
before beginning a job, place yourself in such a position so that if the tool does slip it will not hit the person using it or a
colleague;
Always use the right tool for the job. Never adopt makeshift solutions;
always keep the tools in a state of perfect working efficiency and cleanness and have unsuitable tools replaced;
make sure that tools handles are not dirty with oil or grease;
do not use tools with makeshift extensions;
for all tasks in which there is a risk of flying chips, the use protective equipment such as: goggles, screens, gloves, etc.
is compulsory;
when approaching the work area, especially if it is in an elevated area and during work on ladders, keep hand tools in
appropriate bags or fasten them to prevent them from falling;
when using spanners and pipe wrenches:
Make sure that they are in perfect working order and intact. Reject, therefore, spanners with welded handles or in poor
conditions;
check that they are the right size for the job in hand;
never use them as hammers;
Never hit the arm of a spanner and never stand on an extension used to increase pressure on the tool.
when using hammers and mallets:
make sure that the handle has been well fixed in order to prevent the metal body from slipping out;
check that the head of the mallet or hammer does not have dangerous burrs;
19
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Check that the handles of the hammers and mallets are intact. Replace cracked or chipped hammers and mallets that have
been repaired with strips of wire or nails;
Never use the hammer on tools that are harder than it because it could bounce back dangerously or chips could fly off it.
when using chisels, make sure that:
they have been properly sharpened and that the head is not excessively dented;
the heads are free of burrs because if they break off they could cause serious injury;
They are kept in the tool-box and that the cutting parts are, if possible, protected in order to remove a potential
hazard for those who have to use them.
HEALTH MONITORING
Operators in charge of structural steel works ding, arc-air gouging and flame cutting shall undergo a general periodical
medical check-up carried out by the company physician at least every twelve months.
An audiometric test shall be carried out once a year and a chest X-ray taken every four years.
The company physician is responsible for requesting any in-depth follow-up specialist medical examinations. He is also
responsible for issuing certification regarding total/partial/temporary or definitive suitability for a specific task.
20
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
1) Civil work
Spoils not required after re-instatement are removed from the job site at the end of each working day.
2) Fine trades
All cable tie trimmings are collected and removed from job location at the end of each work period.
When installed, cables are to be trimmed off the rest, coiled up and securely tied.
Only materials required for each work are to be taken to job site.
Cable drum is to be removed from job site as soon as possible.
3) Metal trades
Such consumable materials and small particles, which are no longer required as old bolts and gaskets etc. are to be
placed in suitable containers and removed till the end of the work period.
Large components such as equipment parts, piping parts, steel parts etc. are to be stacked neatly to facilitate the
movement at the work site
Wastes containing hazardous materials are to be segregated from other kinds of waste.
Welding consumables are to be kept in appropriate containers and all used rod ends are to be collected and disposed of
at the end of each work period.
When not in use, pneumatic tools are to be turned off, depressurized and the hoses coiled neatly.
After consultation with the construction manager, consideration is to be given to lay down areas in large jobs.
4) Paintings
Paints and solvent must be stored in separate storages, all installation should be explosion-proof and far from any
ignition source like welding.
Only the needed amounts of painting substances are to be brought in work place, (no storage at the work place).
The work place & storage places must be kept clean from any spillage of the painting materials and cleaned immediately.
The storage area must be surrounded with barriers.
5) Insulation
All new bulk insulation materials such as claddings are to be stored neatly in the work place without blocking access or
egress.
Once removal is taken place, areas are to be taped off with barriers and insulation and cladding is to be bagged up and
removed at the end of the work period.
All off-cuts and bonding materials ends are swept up and disposed of at the end of the work period.
After consultation with operation department, consideration is to be given to lay down staging areas for large jobs.
Left over bandages will be removed at the end of each work period.
21
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
6) Waste Handling
Non hazard waste: This section covers types of waste to be derived from offices like paper card board plastics etc.., and
wasted without special requirement (office - cleaning)
Hazardous waste: Batteries, oil, filters, and other equipment which can contain even traces of hazardous substances are
classified and treated as hazardous waste. These are kept in specified close places according to their risk until sending
to the main office.
HSE NOTES
1) Lifting Operations:
Lifting equipment may be categorized as follows:
Lifting appliance includes any machine which, by means of lifting gear can raise, lower or suspend a load (e.g.
crane, side boom, fork lift truck or boom truck). Lifting appliances may be fixed or portable.
Portable lifting gear includes any device which is used directly or indirectly to connect a load to a lifting appliance, and
which does not form part of the load (e.g. rope sling, chain
Sling, ring, link, hook, plate clamp, shackle, swivel, or eyebolt. Periodically lubricating and greasing for all lifting
tackles must be applied.
Fixed lifting gears such as pad-eyes, runway beams, etc, must be designed according to a specific safe working load
(SWL), all welds to be according to standard welding safe instruction, NDT inspection must be considered. Pad-eyes
holes to be machined according to the designed diameters.
22
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Never use slings for more than SWL (SAFE WORKING LOAD) rating. Each sling should have an SWL
approximately equal to the gross weight of the load.
Ensure the hook is positioned above the load's centre of gravity.
Only one container is lifted at each time.
Slings of equal length shall be used when handling tubular.
Tag lines are utilized where appropriate.
All lifting equipment which inspected must have the current color code.
23
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
addition someone will also need to be in control of the toolbox talk/ pre-job meeting to ensure all personnel are aware of the
task, the documented safe instructions to be followed and their responsibilities.
* Tubular Slinging:
The slings should be double wrapped with a choke hitch taking care not to cross over the wires on the bottom of pipe
or tubular bundle. The choke hitch should be pulled tight (never use anything to hammer hitch down tight). And a
bulldog clip fitted. Secure the hitch with a tie to prevent eye slipping over bulldog clip during transit.
Never sling different sizes (mixture) of tubing, or items. Of different shapes together. Smaller items will tend to slip
out.
Do not pull a sling from under a load while load is resting on the sling.
When using multi-legged slings the maximum recommended angle between the two legs is 90 degrees.
When racking pre slung tubular, use stripping between layers to prevent slings from being crushed.
* STORAGE:
Should be stored by hanging up in a warm dry place, not in the sling cargo basket.
Wire rope along with end attachments should be slightly oiled.
* CRANES PRECAUTIONS:
Only persons with good sight (corrected by spectacles if necessary) and good hearing shall be selected for employment
as Crane Drivers.
Cranes shall only be operated by persons properly trained, qualified and authorized.
The hoisting mechanism of a crane shall not be used for any purpose other than raising or lowering a load vertically.
Cranes must not be used to transport loads, unless specifically designed for this purpose.
A crane shall not be used unless a pre-use inspection of the crane has been carried out by a Crane Driver within the
previous 24 hours. This inspection should cover electrical cables, wire ropes, fittings, drums, brakes, hooks and guards,
etc limit switches must be tested to ensure that they are operating correctly.
Cranes shall not be operated in wind speeds in excess of manufacture's recommended limitations. Installations may
impose lower limits as a result of operating experience. These limitations will be conspicuously displayed in the crane
cabin.
A table, showing the safe working load/radius limitations of the crane, shall be available in every crane cabin and at
every site and installation.
The crane driver/operator must be advised of the weight of each load be lifted and shall operate within the limits
mentioned by the safe working load/radius tables displayed within the crane cabin. Drivers/Operators must use the
load/radius alarms as indication of working within safe limits.
24
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Crane activities shall stop (even the load has been made safe) in the event of a general alarm or emergency.
Whilst the crane is in operation, the Crane Driver/Operator must not perform other work, and must not leave his position
at the controls until the load has been safely landed.
Man-riding on loads, hooks or buckets intended for general cargo movement is not permitted.
Before being brought onto site, must have applicable licenses, certification and/or other documentation required by law
(Such licenses are kept in the vehicle /equipment at all times) .and must be inspected so as to make sure that they are
in good and safe working condition.
Persons ride on fixed seats. Riding on forklifts, tailgates, etc. is completely prohibited.
All machinery and equipment are being inspected and maintained by competent persons periodically. Inspection results
are recorded in documents where defects are recommended for reparation and/or replacement.
General requirement:
All hand tools and portable power tools are to be maintained for a safe and proper condition.
New employees are trained and instructed for the proper use of tools.
25
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Extension cords and air hoses are being protected from damage and routed in such a way as not causing a hazard of
trimming or being subject to damage by vehicles or construction activities.
4-Scaffolds
Storage
All scaffolding equipment shall be stored in a central compound and returned when dismantled and not in use
All scaffold boards shall be stored flat to prevent warping.
Ladders should be stored correctly, either flat or hung on suitable hook straining.
Erection of scaffolds
Only competently trained (scaffold operators) scaffolders and supervisor shall erect or dismantle any scaffold.
A continuing training shall be implemented for all operators to ensure their competency, and familiarity with the
standards required.
Each scaffold platform shall be fully board with no gaps between boards to prevent persons or tools falling through
and the boards secured against movement.
a suitable ladder shall be fitted to every scaffold and should be secured be positioned at an angle of 14 against the
scaffold the head of the ladder shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent movement the head of the ladder shall extend
at last 1 meter above the landing platform for safe access.
guard rails and toe boards shall be fitted to all open edges of the scaffold platform
Were a guard rail on a leading edge cannot be maintained operators working on the platform shall wear suitable fall
protection equipment.
scaffold platforms shall be kept free of waste materials and should be kept clean by a persons required to work on
them
no person shall interfere with a scaffold once it is erected, and any modifications shall only be carried out by trained
competent scaffolding operators ( scaffolders) and it must done according to the project documentation .
It is the ultimate responsibility of the scaffolding supervisor to ensure that all scaffold platforms are erected to the
required standard.
Scaffold platform MUST NEVER be overloaded with materials, tools or other equipment
The Scaffold Must Be Braced To Prevent Lateral Movement.
5) Excavation
This procedure means any man-made cut, trench, or depression in an earth surface formed by earth removal
26
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
The following specific site conditions should be taken into accounts for safe excavations (Traffic, Soil , Surface and ground
water , Overhead and underground utilities, Weather
Before any excavation actually begins, the standard requires the employer to determine the estimated location of utility
installations: sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water lines or any other underground installations that may be encountered
during digging
No employee should operate a piece of equipment without first being properly trained to handle it and fully alerted to its
potential hazards
The standard requires that a competent person inspect, on a daily basis, excavations and the adjacent areas for possible
cave-ins, failures of protective systems and equipment, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions
Adequate protective systems will be utilized to protect employees. This can be accomplished through sloping, shoring, or
shielding
Workers must be supplied with and wear any personal protective equipment deemed necessary to assure their protection
All spoil piles will be stored a minimum of two (2) feet from the sides of the excavation. The spoil pile must not block the
safe means of egress
If a trench or excavation is 4 feet or deeper, stairways, ramps, or ladders will be used as a safe means of access and egress.
No employee will work in an excavation where water is accumulating unless adequate measures are used to protect the
employees.
A competent person will inspect all excavations and trenches daily, prior to employee exposure or entry, and after any
rainfall, soil change, or any other time needed during the shift. The competent person must take prompt measures to
eliminate any and all hazards.
Excavations and trenches 4 feet or deeper that have the potential for toxic substances or hazardous atmospheres will be
tested at least daily. If the atmosphere is inadequate, protective systems will be utilized.
All personnel near the road must wear orange reflective vests. Signs and barricades need to be provided.
Soil classification:
Soil of excavation classified depending on the stability from the high stability to low stability as following:
Stable rock: Is defined as natural solid mineral matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while
exposed. (Example: granite or sandstone).
Type a soil:
Are cohesive soils with unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square foot or greater. (Example: clay, silty clay,
sandy clay, clay loam)
Type b soil:
Are cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tons per square foot but less than 1.5tsf
(example: angular gravel, silt, silt loam)
Type c soil:
Are cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 t/sf or less. (Example: gravel, sand and loamy sand,
submerged soil, soil from which water is freely seeping.
27
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
At operational units/sites, all tanks vessels and equipment on which welding cutting, burning , brazing and soldering work is
carried out, must be either free from flammable gases and vapors, and cleaned of all traces of liquid, wax or solid
hydrocarbons.
Consideration should be given to the build-up of toxic or flammable gases when vessels and tanks are being welded or burned
on the outside and suitable precautions taken.
Where flammable materials may be found inspection by the operating authority will be necessary including the need to gas
test to ensure it is gas free.
Before cutting the bottom plates of any tanks, test holes must be first drilled and gas tests taken, to ensure that conditions are
safe under the tank floor.
No welding or burning will be permitted on pipelines where mechanical seal plugs are to be used, or where hot tapping Safe
Instructions are to be employed on live lines, without written authorization.
All welding, burning and cutting shall be carried out only by suitable qualified personnel, using only equipment of an approved
type, which must be in a serviceable condition.
Where gases/fumes are produced. They must be effectively disposed of either by natural ventilation or forced mechanical
extraction ventilation the aim being to draw away the gas/fume from the operator. Suitable respiratory protection should be
28
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
available as a backup to the ventilation system employed, in case of inadequate air mixing or the failure of the forced
ventilation system.
No fuel or oxygen gas cylinders shall be taken into any confined space. Cylinders, hoses and fittings must be checked for leaks.
Work must be screened to prevent sparks from flying outside the immediate welding area and all combustible material must
be removed if there is danger of ignition. Any drains in the area must be covered with fire resistant material. And loop seal
stopped up with water.
In addition to the color coding, cylinder and cylinder fittings are different for the oxygen and fuel gases.
- Oxygen fittings have right-hand threads, and the cylinder fitting has a plain hexagon nut; whereas:
- Fuel gas fittings have left-handed threads, and cylinder fitting has a grooved hexagon nut. Oxygen and fuel gas hoses and
their associated equipment are designed for safety with their own gases and are not interchangeable.
Safety Features That Must Be Incorporated In Gas Burning/Welding Equipment.
The following safety features must be incorporated:
- Pressure regulators that filter the gas and provide a constant delivery pressure in accordance the international standards.
- Pressure gauges with safety backs, which deflect the bursting, gases.
- Hose check valves (non-return valves) which allow gases to the blowpipe, but not back from it.
- Flashback arrestors which quench flashback flames and cut off the gas flow automatically, must be incorporated in both
oxygen and fuel gas lines.
Apart from the hazard of fumes and gases described in gas welding & cutting two additional hazards are introduced
with electric arc welding, namely radiations from the welding arc and electrocution.
Radiation from welding arcs consists of ultraviolet light, infrared rays and visible light. The effects and the protection
required are as follows:
Ultraviolet and infrared rays are irritating to the skin, producing a condition similar to sunburn. Protective clothing worn
will adequately shield welder.
Ultraviolet rays are extremely irritating to the conjunctive and cornea of the eye, even short exposures to the welding
arc produces a condition known as ‘arc eye’ or ‘eye flash’. It normally appears a few hours after exposure, producing
symptoms of pain, sand/grit in the eye feeling and watering of the eyes. With treatment, the effect normally wears off
after 24 hours.
Eye protection must be worn incorporating suitable filters, as to overcome this problem.
Visible light from the arc is so intense that the welder must wear eye protection.
Regarding electrocution, this is normally caused by defective equipment or improper wiring. There is also, the added
danger when working at heights of falling as a result of electric shock.
All welding sets, cables connectors and terminators must be maintained in good condition, and be of adequate capacity.
29
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Electrical supply and earthing connections to welding transformers and generator sets, must be made, inspected and
maintained by an authorized/competent person.
Electrode holders shall be provided with a handle of tough insulating non-ignitable material.
A fully insulated holder or hook should be provided to accommodate the live electrode holder when not in use.
7) Demolition Work
Demolition work will always be considered of a high risk. Thus, specifically appointed competent and
experienced supervisors are to conduct supervision of such work.
Any demolition work is subject to the risk assessment and methods of statement
- The meaning of confined space is defined as any area that is not designed for human occupancy, is large enough to
enter and has limited means of access or egress, or has the potential for oxygen deficiency or enrichment or the
accumulation of hazardous materials
* General Requirements:
Work Permit (Confined Space / Vessel Entry) according to the project documentation at the site.
A work permit is required before a person can either enter or partially enter a confined space.
*Construction Personnel
The personnel involved must be fully aware of any dangers or risks involved.
The H.S.E Department rules, procedures and instructions must be observed, including Work Permit Systems.
* Assessment:
The Project HSE Manager, Construction Manager and the immediate Supervisor of the work must carry out an assessment
in conjunction with any additional personnel who are experienced in the work. The Area Authority (Construction
Manager) assisted by the HSE Department, must be allowed sufficient time to consider each job and personally check
each stage of the action required in the issue of the permit .
The process of assessment must involve consideration of the work required to be done, the methods by which the work
can be done and the hazards inherent in the plant in relation to the work and to all personnel directly involved with the
works.
In assessing the work and methods available, the first object should be to see whether entry into the plant by personnel is
really necessary. Entry should only be considered when no alternative method is available.
The object of the assessment is to determine what steps should be taken to make the job safe and what precautions should
be adopted during the actual working.
30
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Warning notices, as appropriate, must be displayed. Full discussion shall take place with all personnel involved prior to
work commencing. Precautions must be taken to prevent potentially dangerous materials from entering it whilst persons
are inside.
All materials, solid, liquid or gases, which are liable to present a hazard to persons inside the confined space, must be
removed.
Special care must be exercised when cleaning, and the cleaning processes and methods must be adapted to meet each
separate set of circumstances.
The cleaning process may have to be repeated several times to ensure that all potentially dangerous materials have been
removed.
Extra care should be exercised if any sludge is suspected to be Radioactive.
A) Steam Cleaning:
The method of cleaning to be used must depend on the nature of the materials concerned. In many cases, steam cleaning
will be found to give satisfactory results. If the material that is to be removed is not readily volatile or is corrosive,
preliminary treatment by repeated washing with water, other suitable solvents, or with a neutralizing agent, may precede
steaming.
Where there is solid matter at the bottom of a vessel, a perforated steam pipe may be used to stir up the deposit and assist
in its removal.
If the equipment/area has been left for more than a few hours after steaming, it is advisable to re-steam immediately before
entry to remove any vapors that may have been liberated from crevices or from small quantities or residues or sludge
remaining inside.
c) Purging:
When cleaning has been completed all liquid remaining in the confined space must be run out and manholes opened to
allow ventilation.
In the case of steam cleaning this must be done whilst the equipment is still hot, to take advantage of convection currents.
If natural ventilation is not sufficient to remove the last trace of the vapors, etc. then artificial means e.g. blower, exhaust
fan or compressed air, must be used.
Equipment containing flammable gas or vapor may be purged with an inert gas (e.g. nitrogen) to avoid the formation of
an explosive mixture with air when it is open up.
If persons must enter or even approach the equipment that has been purged with an inert gas, precautions must be taken
to ensure that there is adequate oxygen to support life.
31
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
d) Testing:
A test on the atmosphere using a certified gas detector is not normally satisfactory for assessing possible toxic risks. In
the majority of cases, the safe working limits to prevent an explosion are many times greater than the toxic limits. Where
it is necessary to test for flammability or explosively using a certified gas detector (as, for example, when entry wearing
Breathing Apparatus “BA” is considered), then it is particularly important that the equipment used is well maintained
and calibrated before use. Any personnel using BA equipment shall be fully trained and competent in its use.
Tests should be made from outside the confined space, drawing the air through long sample probes. It is essential
however that the tests must be made throughout the whole volume of the space. Any sludge present must be disturbed
before testing to release any trapped gases or vapors.
If it is necessary for a person to enter a vessel to carry out a test, or before the conclusion of such a test, he must wear
suitable Breathing Apparatus). In addition a safety harness and lifeline, the loose end of which is held by a man keeping
watch outside, must be capable of pulling him out. Reviving (resuscitation) apparatus ready for immediate use should
be kept close at hand or within the site, during such operations.
* Certification:
The responsible person who has been directing the operations must make a decision on the method of entry into the
confined space in conjunction with the Safety Officer. They must take account of all the factors likely to affect the
safety of the operation and decide in the light of their knowledge and experience. Consideration must be given to, but
not limited to, the effectiveness of isolation, the amount of sludge or other deposits remaining after cleaning, the results
of atmospheric testing, the work to be done and the nature of the equipment/area. In addition they must specify if: -
The space is safe for entry without Breathing Apparatus for a specified period and with certain other precautions taken.
Breathing apparatus and a lifeline should be worn and other precautions are also taken. No entry shall be allowed under
Breathing Apparatus until full backup is provided and a Breathing Apparatus controller is present.
When work is being executed inside a confined space and Breathing Apparatus is not being worn, an adequate supply
of breathable air must be maintained. The purpose of this is to dilute any gases, etc. which might be evolved from the
operation, from deposits, seams and also to provide fresh air for the person or persons inside.
The provision of ventilation in this manner is not an alternative to the use of Breathing Apparatus where the gases, etc.
are likely to be present to the extent that persons could be overcome.
The method of ventilation and the quantity of air required depend on the individual circumstances and must be
prescribed by the person responsible. If a vessel has sufficient top and bottom openings then natural ventilation may be
sufficient, but in most cases some form of mechanical ventilation is to be preferred, for example:
By introducing compressed air
Using a blower fan and ducting
By using an exhaust fan or ejector and ducting (provided there is an adequate supply of fresh air to replace the air
exhausted).
In all cases the airline or ducting must be introduced at or extend to the bottom of the vessel to ensure removal of heavy
gas or vapor and effective circulation of air. Under no circumstances must oxygen be introduced to 'sweeten' the air.
Oxygen enrichment renders certain substances (e.g. grease) liable to spontaneous combustion.
32
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
When there is a danger of static discharge, earthing and bonding of ducting and/or airlines to the metalwork of the
confined space is necessary. At the discretion of the person responsible, it will be necessary to carry out further testing
of the atmosphere inside the confined space whilst work is in progress.
Whilst a worker is inside a confined space he must be kept under constant observation by an attendant outside.
If the worker is wearing a lifeline, care should be taken to ensure that it does not become entangled on pipes and fittings
inside the confined space.
According to the nature of the work and the risk, the working spell must be interrupted by rest periods during which the
worker is able to leave the space and be in the open air.
He must leave the space prior to the time limit stated on the Work Permit expiring.
Rescue :
Equipment and trained personnel shall be readily available for rescue purposes at all times when a person is inside a
confined space.
- The equipment available shall include additional sets of Breathing Apparatus, lifelines and resuscitation
apparatus.
- Where limitations on entry have been specified, these must also be applied to entry for the purposes of rescue. If,
however, entry has been allowed without Breathing Apparatus, and the person inside has been overcome, it must be
assumed that entry for rescue is unsafe without Breathing Apparatus.
- The attendant and men likely to form a rescue team must be adequately trained in the risks involved and in the use of
Breathing Apparatus, lifelines, resuscitation apparatus and artificial respiration. Oxygen MUST NOT be used to
improve the atmosphere inside a confined space after a person has been overcome.
33
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
* Cancellation of Permit
A Work Permit must be cancelled when operations to which it refers have been completed. It must be returned to the person
responsible by the person to whom it was issued, who must sign a declaration that all personnel and equipment have been
removed from the confined space / area, and personnel warned that the space is no longer safe for entry.
Return to Service
When work has been completed, the Work Permit has been closed out and the equipment/area can be returned for service.
The responsible person (Area Authority) should first check that the Permit has been completed, then make the final entry on
the Permit for acceptance of the work/area from the Performer/Initiator of the job.
* Training
Effective training is necessary for:
- Supervisors
- Persons likely to enter confined spaces to carry out work in them
- Persons likely to act as attendants.
- Persons appointed to form a rescue team.
In practice, many of these functions will be fulfilled by the same persons, but it is important to appreciate that all persons in
such positions must be properly trained.
In this context training must include
- Use of the equipment provided, including a knowledge of its construction and operation
- Check instructions when donning apparatus
- How to deal with malfunctions and failures of equipment during use
- Emergency procedures
- Artificial respiration and resuscitation
The object in every case should be to ensure that all personnel likely to be concerned with entry into confined spaces
are fully aware of the dangers involved and the precautions to be taken.
The manufacturer can often usefully give instructions in the use of equipment. A manufacturer's instruction and
maintenance manual must be kept available.
The training must be reinforced by practices, particularly rescue practices. Refresher course, talks, etc. should be given
as necessary.
In addition to the types of training outlined above, there is a related need to ensure that persons who are likely to be
conducting tests under the Work Permit system are properly trained and competent in the use of the equipment provided.
Such training must include a basic understanding of how the equipment works, methods of use, its limitations,
interpretation of results, maintenance and calibration where appropriate.
34
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
List of Approved Gas Testers names and specimen signatures should be at the site.
Authorized persons are only allowed to enter electrical substations or technical rooms. Thereby a permit to work is mandatory.
RADIOGRAPHY
This procedure covers all activities involving transportation, storage, or use of radioactive sources. Every effort is to be
exerted so as to ensure that radiography is only carried out whilst other jobs are not going on.
Project safety department is to be furnished with the following notation prior NDT work:
A copy of the radioactive materials licenses or registration.
Type of exposure device, x-ray machine or source handling equipment to be used.
A copy of the source decay certificate
Description, design and location of the storage facility to be used
A copy of the radiation operation document.
2-Radiography Emergency Procedure:
Generally speaking, an emergency situation arises when the source is jammed in its guide lube on the source or is accidentally
separated from the control.
35
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Work should be conducted within a predetermined barrier and with constant monitoring of the radiation level using a survey
meter.
In the event this accident occurred, following actions are taken:
Action by radiography
Using a survey meter, measure the dose rate around the area and establish a new safe barrier beyond which the dose is
less than the allowable limit depending on the YEMGAS documentation.
Restrict access to this barrier and display a warning light around it together with radiation warning notice.
Carefully plan for actions to be taken. Prepare all equipment required for the recovery operation and store such materials
as long handling tongs shielding… etc in the dark room on site.
Inform the persons in charge of the area and propose an action plan.
Using tongs, attempt to place the source in its container as quickly as possible.
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS:
Each cable set with such required attachment as cap, plug or receptacle and any equipment connected with cable
and plug, except those fixed but not exposed to damage are to be visually inspected before each day use. Not
only does inspection detect such external defects as deformed or missing pins and insulation damage but also
internal defects. Any damaged or defective equipment is to be removed from service till repaired.
Following tests are made to all cable sets and receptacles apart from the permanent wiring of a building or
structure and other cable-plug connected equipment, which require grounding:
Equipment grounding conductors are tested for continuity.
Receptacles and relevant attachment such as caps or plugs are tested for correct equipment-grounding conductor.
The equipment-grounding conductor is to be connected to its proper terminal.
Required tests are to be performed in the following manner: -
Before equipment enter into service.
Before equipment is re-engaged into work after an incident.
All Cable, electrical equipment tested about the ground conduction, receptacles, caps, plugs have to be tested and labeling
acc. The color code
1) Implementation procedures.
Before use of electrical tools and equipment, workers are responsible for visually inspecting defects. Visual inspection
shall is daily performed for tools that are in use. Defective tools or cables are removed from service to be repaired or
replaced.
All electrical tools, equipment cables and receptacles are tested for ground continuity. Conductors are inspected for
defects. Upon passing all tests and inspections, the tools/equipment are to be color-coded as per the code scheme set
forth at the end of this procedure. As soon as electrical tools/equipment arrive at the job area, they are not moved to
the field until first checked by the competent person.
36
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Only competent persons or designated repairman repair electrical tools/equipment or cables. After being repaired,
tools shall be re-inspected and coded with a repair code.
2) Records:
Written records are made and kept on the job site. Such records are related to the grounding inspections, concluded results
and required repairs.
3) Color Code Designation:
Tools, cable, and equipment that have passed required inspections carry the color appropriate for the inspection period.
This code is placed adjacent to the tool on the power cable and adjacent to the plug on cables.
1) Introduction
The project takes proactive measures to prevent any emergencies and/or fire. Requirement and applicable government
regulations are hereunder summarized: -
All operations are conducted in a manner as to minimize the risk of emission, release, spill or discharge of hazardous
materials into the air, soils, water, sewers and fire. Minimization of risk can be achieved by:
Storage of flammable and other hazardous materials in a systematically controlled way. Storage location and the use of
them is to be authorized by HSE manager of the project
Good housekeeping. Areas are to be kept free from and wastes.
Monthly inspection of all firefighting systems.
Appropriate work practices like emergency drill.
Use of containment methods at any potential source of ignition such as fireproof blankets around welding and flame
cutting operations.
Locating appropriate fire extinguishers within 15 meters of hot works.
Integrity of electrical equipment.
Isolating flammable materials from ignition source.
Use of fire prevention surveillance, alarms, fire detector.
Keeping Emergency/fire protection and reports in the agenda of the weekly safety meeting.
Bounding stores of flammable materials and substances that could damage the environment whilst regularly inspecting
them.
Compliance with all legal requirements related to storage and use of flammable materials.
NOTE: should any circumstance be found of imminent potential danger to people, assets or environment, all work in the
area of danger is to be stopped until corrective actions are taken.
37
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
Since activities may differ in one site, coordination of work is much important the safety of environment and protection of
work.
The aim of inspection is to identify the process of implementing HSE programs and if there is any chance for improving HSE
performance.
1) Regular Inspection
Project HSE department arranges safety tour around site periodically. The inspection include both unsafe acts and safety
performance.
The safety tour must have determined date and time and the report must cover the following point:
Time and place of inspection,
The conditions evaluated,
The mistakes found,
A short coming schedule for corrective actions and the persons responsible for such correction.
2) Environment inspection
The HSE department arranges for an environmental inspection monthly so as to inspect the performance
towards environment inside the project.
ACCIDENT REPORTING
All accidents arising out of or related to PTJ operations, which may result in time lost, must be immediately reported to
client and project manager.
A brief incident report is made including the following information:
Location and date of accident.
1) Names of persons involved
2) The employing company of persons involved.
3) Nature of accident.
Accident Investigation Procedure
All accidents are immediately reported to project manager by the safety department.
According to that investigation unsafe practices could be corrected or prevented.
Collecting facts:
The injured persons are questioned as soon as possible.
Photographs of the scene showing all angles are taken as required and labels with the date, stuck on each photo.
Accident witnesses and other interested parties are questioned and statements, collected.
38
Prepared by Controlled by Approved by Revision No. Revision date Department
HASSC health regulations are applied to all activities, buildings and other permanent premises belonging to or occupied
by HAS or any contractor authorized to work on behalf of HASSC.
Also, mobile or temporary premises, construction sites and other areas where HASSC or its contractor carry out work
are subject to health regulations.
Any deviation from base regulation for practical reasons is to be approved by HAS prior work or occupation of the
temporary premises.
A sanitary squad performs such sanitary services as collection and disposal of garbage/wastes and cleaning roads,
building, living quarters and sanitary facilities. All necessary steps of good sanitary practices are to be taken so as to
keep the camp and work sites free from harmful insects, rodent and other pests. Only upon approval by company medical
officer, insecticides or other rodent killers can be used as a support to the sanitary program.
2) Water supply
Water is to be provided and maintained at suitable points conveniently accessible to employees. Contained in suitable
vessels, drinking water is to be supplied through fresh water and vessels from contamination. Portable water testing
regularly with report. All water supplied for domestic use is to be disinfected by chlorinating. Drinking water is clearly
marked “drinking water”. At all points, where drain connections are not practicable, arrangements should be made for
the disposal of wastes and overflow of water by means of sub-soil drainage system.
3) Disposal of Garbage
A sufficient number of fly-proof bins are to be available inside food establishments, camps and work sites so as to clear
the area from flies.
Waste and rubbish are to be disposed of in a disposal site downwind of the camp or work site. Garbage is burned or
buried.
Waste stream (industrial, domestic, chemical, hazardous…etc) should be separated and disposed off on company agreed
disposal sites.
MEDICAL CARE
In the big distant sites, staffs are to be trained internally on first aid.
A physician is to be available on site.
An ambulance is to be available for the project.
39
Safety and Health Manual
12.12.2016 A For REVIEW AND COMMENT Ahmed Rezk Sherif Kadry Hassan Allam
1.1.1. No endeavor is worthy if it should cause human suffering through disabling injury
or loss of life.
1.1.2. A good safety record reflects the quality of management, supervision and the
work force. It also serves to promote business and thereby contributes to the
continuing growth and success of the company.
1.1.3. Poor accident experience increases costs and results in a loss of profits.
1.2. GOALS
The safety goals of our company are to achieve zero fatalities, zero permanent
disabilities, zero lost- time accidents, and a safety performance level below 50% of
OSHA heavy construction average injury rates.
1.3.2. H.A.C will maintain a safety and accident prevention program, which meets the
requirements of the Host Country, local codes, and all other authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work. As a supplement to the requirements of such
authorities, the Contractor shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the
“Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction” published by the Associated
General Contractors of ARE.
1.3.3. Management and supervision are charged with the responsibility of preventing
the occurrence of incidents or conditions that could lead to occupational injuries
or illness. While the ultimate success of the Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
Program depends upon the full cooperation of each individual employee, it is
management's responsibility to see that safety, health and fire prevention rules
and procedures are adequate and enforced, and to see that effective training and
education programs are employed to the best advantage.
1.3.5. Every supervisor shall be held accountable for the safety performance
demonstrated by the employees under his supervision. Employees are
responsible to abide by procedures, use tools and equipment safely, follow the
rules and use personal protective equipment provided.
Our policy is to accomplish work in the safest possible manner consistent with
good practices. Management and supervision at every level is charged with the
task of translating this policy into positive actions.
1.4.3. Management and supervision shall recognize the responsibility for compliance to
all established codes, regulations, standards and procedures. Enforcement
action is mandatory. Therefore, every supervisor shall be held accountable for
the safety performance demonstrated by the employees under his supervision.
1.4.4. In performance of the work H.A.C and its subcontractors shall meet the
requirements of the Host Country, local codes and all other authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work.
1.4.5. A training program shall be effectively established for each employee soliciting
their full cooperation with a belief that all accidents can be prevented.
1.4.6. H.A.C and its subcontractors shall have responsibility for the safe use, storage,
and disposal of any chemicals, refuse, waste, or other materials generated or
used in the performance of the work in accordance with this Safety, Health, and
Fire Prevention Manual.
2.1.2. The Projects Safety, Health and Fire Prevention Program H.A.C been designed
to assist H.A.C Management and subcontractors and their supervision to
recognize, evaluate and control hazardous activities or conditions within their
scope of work.
a) Provide safe and healthy working conditions for all persons working on the
Company.
b) Maintain all Projects Fire Prevention Program to eliminate fire hazards and
provide adequate means to fight any fire that might occur and provide for
proper notification of the Engineer, Owner and local authorities.
c) Protection of the general public in case working in public area.
d) Reduction of accident costs.
e) To act as a guide for interpretation of current Egyptian Labor Laws, provincial
and local laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations, requirements and
guidelines of government authorities and agencies bearing on the
performance of the work and agencies as outlined in this procedure.
f) H.A.C management & supervisory personnel shall assume direct
responsibility for employee safety for work directly under their control.
g) H.A.C management and supervisory personnel shall not assume or relieve
subcontractors from their direct responsibility for employees safety.
2.2. OBJECTIVE
Identify the Program and how it shall be administered, responsibilities and ensure
adequate Control.
a) Proper planning of all work to minimize personal injury, property damage, and
the loss of productive efforts.
b) Establish and maintain a system for early detection and correction of unsafe
practices and conditions.
2.4. PROCEDURES
2.4.1. Administration
a) H.A.C is responsible for monitoring all Projects Safety, Health and Fire
Prevention Program, which includes auditing the safety performance and
monitoring compliance of all subcontractors, with applicable Egyptian Labor
Laws, provincial, local and H.A.C Safety, Health and Fire Prevention
requirements.
c) Whenever unsafe conditions and fire hazards are noted and immediate
corrective action cannot be obtained, the Safety Supervisors or
subcontractor shall be notified in writing of the unsafe condition and is
required to correct the situation and notify the H.A.C Safety Supervisor of
action taken within specified time.
d) Should there be a conflict between any applicable safety laws, rules, etc., the
most stringent shall apply. The H.A.C Safety Supervisor shall be the final
authority on any question or conflict that may occur regarding the
interpretation of, or the compliance with, any safety laws, rules, etc.
2.4.2. Subcontractors
d) All personnel working on the projects shall attend Weekly Tool Box Safety
Meetings provided by H.A.C or the subcontractor.
i) Each subcontractor shall attend weekly safety meetings held by H.A.C. (This
meeting shall be in conjunction with weekly construction meeting.)
k) Each subcontractor shall provide and enforce the use of personal protective
equipment required by Egyptian Labor Law, Provincial, local and Projects
Safety regulations.
p) Each subcontractor shall take all precautions to maintain a clean work sites.
(ii) And STOP payment for the work being performed; and
(iii) Alternatively, correct the situation and back charge the subcontractor
for expenses incurred.
2.4.3. Employees
All employees shall comply with all safety rules and regulations
applicable to their work and to the general safety of the other workers on
the projects. It is the responsibility of each employee to support H.A.C in
providing a safe place to work, to protect themselves and co-workers
against injuries and to report all safety hazards at once to project
supervision.
Employees shall immediately report all injuries to their employer for first
aid and/or medical treatment. Should H.A.C select to provide onsite
medical, injury treatment shall be coordinated through H.A.C’s site Safety
Department.
d) It is imperative that employees at every level comply with the provisions and
directives of the Safety Program at all times while working.
3. TRAINING
3.2. OBJECTIVE
To ensure that all employees, are properly trained in hazard recognition.
3.4. TRAINING
3.4.1. Regular and continuing training of employees is required. In addition, employees
shall receive special training prior to being assigned an unfamiliar task.
Listed below, but not limited to, are areas where training is required:
b) The employee shall also be made aware of any potential hazards, personal
hygiene and personal protective measures required.
h) Employees who are exposed to harmful dusts, mists, vapors, or gases shall
be trained in the selection, care, use and maintenance of respirators per the
approved written respiratory protection program before working in any such
conditions.
j) All employees using aerial lifts or man lifts shall be trained. Documentation
shall be maintained and prior to training, the training program shall be
reviewed and accepted by the H.A.C Safety Department.
3.5.2. In addition, all subcontractors shall have a safety bulletin board located at their
office area for posting of safety information.
3.6. MEETINGS
3.6.1. Safety meetings shall be utilized on the projects for the achievement of a
successful Accident Prevention Program.
a) Construction Meetings
Safety shall have a prominent place on the agenda and records of the
meeting shall reflect specific items discussed.
b) Tool-Box Meetings
Weekly safety training meetings shall be conducted by supervisor or
foremen. Attendance is mandatory for all subcontractor employees at the
work site. The meeting provides an opportunity to point out any hazardous,
unhealthy conditions, or unsafe work practices that have been noticed. In
addition, safety rules and regulations, safe working procedures, analysis of
accidents and potential hazard shall be discussed. A record of these
meetings shall be maintained, and shall include topics discussed and the
names of employees and G.E.T. Badge number. The original forms shall
be maintained by the subcontractor with a copy sent to the H.A.C Safety
Department.
c) Special Meetings
H.A.C Safety Department may call such special meetings as necessary.
Attendees shall be notified and the meeting topic(s) noted in a memo.
4. CONTROLS
4.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
To establish and maintain a consistent HSA Projects Safety, Health, and Fire
Prevention Program through continuous safety audits by H.A.C and subcontractor
representatives.
4.2. PROCEDURE
In order to provide a continuous and consistent safety control, the following areas, not
inclusive, shall be reviewed and inspected on daily basis:
H.A.C and subcontractors need to ensure that they have adequate quantities of
protective equipment available on sites, such as hearing protection, safety glasses,
hard hats, safety harnesses, etc.
Check storage of new and waste materials. Keep walkway and traffic areas clear.
Management and supervision shall be fully responsible for ensuring that its
employees, subcontractors, and other persons performing the work at the site keep
work areas and adjoining premises free at all times from accumulations of all waste
materials, rubbish, debris, broken concrete, and other scrap resulting from the
performance of their work.
All non-hazardous waste material, rubbish, and debris shall be removed from the
building/ sites, trailers, lay down areas and placed in closed top containers. Such
containers shall be removed from the sites when full and shall be properly disposed
of at an off-site location in the nearest dump area assigned by the Governments
Environments Dept.
4.2.3. Work areas shall be kept clean and free of trash, rubbish and debris at all times.
4.2.5. Inspect scaffolding and platforms noting strength of supports. Assure that
scaffolds over 1.8 meters high are protected with standard guardrails and toe
boards. All scaffold boards shall be checked for defects and equipped with cleats
to prevent them from sliding.
4.2.6. Tools
Check for burrs, dull points, heads are properly fitted on handles, and if power driven,
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 12 of 64
are in good working order.
4.2.8. Floors
Note strength and security, guards and hoist ways, and stairway openings.
Note whether excavations, trenches, tunnels, and adjacent buildings are properly
shored or sloped.
Note condition of insulation on conductors, and guarding of live circuits. Assure the
use of Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) as required and see that they are
operable.
Note guarding of moving parts; inspect airline hoses, hose connectors and "dead-
man" controls.
4.2.12. Machines
Note guarding of gears, belts, pulleys, shafting, and method of oiling and greasing.
Assure that welders and helpers wear proper personal protective equipment and that
welding machines are properly maintained. Check storage and transportation of
acetylene and oxygen tanks. Provide welding shield when other personnel are
working in the area or shield them from the area.
Welders and helpers should know that oxygen may not be used in place of
compressed air, as serious explosions and burns may result.
Inspect work areas for proper placement or storage of flammable and combustible
materials. Burning, welding, or other fire generating work shall not be performed
unless storage of materials is properly protected.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected and the inspection tag initialed monthly.
The subcontractor shall be responsible for his extinguishers and the contractor for the
4.2.16. Noise
Noise control at the source is required if feasibly possible, but properly fitted ear plugs
and/or ear muffs shall be worn when an employee is exposed to noise levels greater
than 85 dB time weighted average (TWA).
Assure that personal protective equipment and clothing is used as required. Check
for proper lighting at all points. See that nails are removed or bent over in old forms
and lumber, and other physical hazards are controlled.
4.3. PLANNING
Due to the complexity of all projects and the activities of other subcontractors,
construction operations shall be extensively planned to include safe construct ability
procedures.
4.4. AUDITS
Formal safety audits shall be periodically conducted by a composite audit team of
H.A.C and subcontractor management personnel.
4.5.2. If the premises are not cleaned as required, then H.A.C shall notify the
subcontractor that the premises are not being maintained in the condition
required. Should the subcontractor fail to initiate substantial progress toward
cleanup of the premises within twenty-four (24) hours following receipt of said
notice, H.A.C may elect to provide the necessary labor, materials, and equipment
to achieve the same and deduct the full cost thereof from any moneys due the
subcontractor.
When cleaning up, do not throw or drop material from upper levels unless the area
below is properly barricaded and adequate warnings are posted. A standby person is
required.
4.6.2. Roadways
Clean up and dispose of all rubbish, soil resulting from the work on a daily basis or as
required by H.A.C or the Employer.
5. VISITORS SAFETY
5.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish and maintain safety controls to protect the visitor during the execution of
any Projects related to H.A.C.
5.2. PROCEDURES
During construction of this project, the following measures will be taken to protect the
visitors from construction hazards. The Contractor and subcontractors will be
required to monitor their work for compliance.
5.2.1. When all or a portion of a roadway is blocked to traffic, excavated material will be
piled or fence barricades will be erected to direct traffic away from construction
hazards. Dimensions may be varied but the overall height of excavated material
or barricade will be at least 120 cm. When total closure is intended the barricade
will extend to the curb or ditch line on both sides.
5.2.2. Flagman will be used whenever traffic passing through the work area may be
required to stop because of conflicts with construction equipment or because the
safe travel path cannot accommodate two-way traffic. A flagman will not be
required to guard more than one conflict point. Where one-way traffic is required
for a distance of over 30 meters a flagman will be assigned to each end. Traffic
signs may also be required to alert traffic of the upcoming hazard.
5.2.4. During loading, unloading and rigging activities, personnel will be posted as
watchmen to protect the public from swinging loads and similar hazards.
5.2.5. The visitor will be protected from all electrical hazards. Electrical cords that could
5.2.6. All aspects of the projects safety plan are intended to provide visitor safety as
well as worker safety.
6.1.2. A trench is referred to as a narrow excavation in which the depth is greater than
the width; although the width is not greater than 5 meters. An excavation is any
man-made cavity or depression in the earth's surface. This can include
excavations for anything from cellars to highways.
6.1.3. The Projects requires that all excavations over 1.5 meters deep be sloped,
shored, benched, braced, or otherwise supported. When soil conditions are
unstable, excavations shallower than 1.5 meters also shall be sloped, supported,
or shored.
6.1.5. A second method of support is shoring sheeting, tightly placed timber shores,
bracing, trench jacks, piles, or other materials installed in manner strong enough
to resist the pressures surrounding the excavation.
6.1.6. A trench box, a prefabricated, movable trench shield composed of steel plates
welded to a heavy steel frame may also be used.
6.1.7. All excavations of a depth of one (1) meter or greater shall be reviewed by H.A.C
Safety and excavations greater than 1.5 meters, shall require a task safety
analysis prior to the work.
6.1.8. Underground lines, equipment and electrical cables shall be identified, located
and marked prior to beginning excavation work.
6.1.9. Physical barriers shall be placed around or over trenches and excavations.
Barriers shall be temporarily removed only when necessary to provide access to
personnel or equipment. Once the equipment or personnel have entered or
exited, the barrier shall be immediately replaced. Flash lighted barricades shall
be provided at night when work is performed or traffic is anticipated nearby at
6.1.10. A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench
excavation so as to require no more than 8 meters of lateral travel for employees.
Any ladder shall extend a minimum of 1.0 meter above the ground level.
6.1.11. When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, and the operator
does not have clear and direct view of the excavation edge, a warning system
shall be used such as a spotter person(s) to warn the operator, barricades, or
mechanical signals, or stop log.
6.2. BLASTING
Blasting or the use of explosives is not permitted on projects site.
Appropriate hearing protection shall be worn in work areas where noise levels exceed
85 dB time weighted average (TWA).
Eye protection includes approved safety glasses with side shields of monologues
meeting the standards specified in (ANSI) American National Standards Institute Z
87.1-1989, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection or
equivalent approved by a recognized international testing organization. Eye
protection will be required as appropriate for the task being performed. Dark
protective eyeglasses shall not be worn inside buildings.
All construction employees shall wear approved non-metallic hard hats. All
employees and visitors shall wear approved hard hats when entering areas of
construction or overhead hazards. Hard hats shall be void of any type of defects and
should not be altered.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 17 of 64
6.3.4. Respirators
Approved respirator shall be used when excessive dusts, mists, gases or other
atmospheric impurities are determined to be harmful to health.
Safety harnesses and secured with two safety lanyards and one chock absorbers
shall be used by all employees working from unguarded surfaces when falls to a
different level present a hazard. Each employee shall also wear a safety harness
with a safety lanyard secured to a separate life line while working from swing
scaffolds, boss’s chairs, or other suspended work platforms when a falling hazard is
present (See Fall Hazard Control, Section 12.0).
All persons working in the construction site shall wear sturdy foot protection. It is
recommended that low-quarter footwear not be worn, due to inadequate ankle
support. At no times shall soft sole, canvas shoes or opened toed footwear
(sandals) be allowed on the construction site. Footwear shall be worn as shoes,
not as sandals.
Protect your skin from sun, welding, hot pipe burns, and other hazards that exist in
the construction areas by wearing proper extremities clothing protection. THIS
INCLUDES LONG PANTS FOR LEG COVERING AND SHIRTS THAT HAVE
MINIMUM FOUR-INCH SLEEVES. NO SHORTS OR TANK TOPS (shirts without
sleeves and fully covering the torso) ARE ALLOWED ON SITE. Clothing shall be
kept in good repair and in clean condition.
6.4.2. Manhole and temporary floor openings shall be immediately guarded by standard
covers. When the cover is not in place, the opening shall be immediately
protected by a standard guardrail.
6.4.3. Wall openings, from which there is a drop of 1.25 meters and the bottom of the
opening is less than l meter above the working surface, shall be guarded.
6.4.4. Runways shall be guarded by a standard railing, or the equivalent on all open
sides 1.25 meters or more above floor or ground level. Whenever tools, machine
parts, or materials are likely to be used on the runway, a toe board shall also be
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 18 of 64
provided on each exposed side. Trench crossings for equipment use shall be of
adequate strength to support equipment in area.
6.5. SCAFFOLDS
6.5.1. Lean-to scaffolds and makeshift platforms are prohibited.
6.5.2. Scaffolds shall not be used for the storage of material except material being
currently used that work shift.
6.5.3. All scaffolds shall be adequately designed to carry, without failure, four (4) times
the maximum intended load. At no time shall any scaffold be overloaded.
6.5.4. All scaffolds shall be maintained in safe condition and scaffolds damaged or
weakened, from any cause, shall be immediately repaired or dismantled.
6.5.5. Scaffolding or staging more than two (2) meters above the ground or floor,
suspended from an overhead support, or erected with stationary supports, shall
have standard guardrails and toe boards properly attached.
6.5.6. Scaffolds shall be provided with an access ladder or equivalent safe access.
Employees shall not climb or work from scaffold handrails, mid-rails or brace
members.
6.5.7. When freestanding manually propelled mobile scaffolds are used, the height shall
not exceed four times the minimum base dimension. They shall be equipped with
wheel brakes on a minimum of 2 wheels which shall be engaged at all times
employees are on the scaffold. Such scaffolds shall not be rolled or moved with
employees on them.
6.5.8. All work platforms on scaffolds shall be totally decked without unguarded
openings, and all decking shall be secured against displacement.
6.5.9. Whenever a scaffold cannot be erected with handrails, personnel working on said
scaffold shall be provided with safety harness and safety lanyard.
6.5.11. H.A.C shall designate in writing its competent person for the erection,
daily inspection, repair, maintenance and dismantling of scaffolds.
Scaffolds shall be tagged denoting their status, whether complete or
incomplete. Employees shall not be permitted onto incomplete scaffold
except those required to complete the scaffold.
6.6. LADDERS
6.6.2. Wood ladders shall not be painted as this may cover-up defects and
deterioration.
6.6.3. The areas at the base and top, side rails and cleats or rungs on ladders shall
be kept clean and free of lines, hoses, cables, wires, oil, grease, and debris.
6.6.4. If a ladder is to provide the only means of access or exit from a working area
for 25 or more employees, or simultaneous two-way traffic is expected, a
double cleat ladder shall be installed.
6.6.5. Portable ladders shall be placed so the horizontal distance at the bottom of
the ladder is not less than one quarter (1/4) of the vertical distance to the top
support. In case of necessity that, the ladder is placed more horizontal, it
shall be braced to prevent sagging. All ladders shall be secured at the top, to
prevent displacement.
6.6.6. Portable ladders shall be placed so that the side rails have a secure footing.
The top rest shall be rigid and have ample strength to support the applied
load.
6.6.7. Ladders with broken or missing rungs or steps broken or split side rails or
other faulty and defective construction shall not be used and shall be
immediately destroyed or immediately removed from the project site.
6.6.8. Single portable ladders over ten (10) meters in length shall not be used. If
greater heights are to be reached, separate ladders shall be used with
intermediate landing platforms provided.
6.6.9. Portable ladders, used on smooth floor or other smooth surfaces, shall be
equipped with non-slipping bases, or otherwise secured to prevent
displacement.
6.6.10. Ladders shall be sufficient length to protect not less than one (1) meter above
the top landing. When this is not practical, grab rails, which provide a secure
grip for an employee moving to or from the point of access, shall be installed.
6.6.11. Aluminum and/or metallic ladders are prohibited around energized electrical
panels and lines.
6.7.1. All cutting and welding operations are required to have within easy reach a proper
fire extinguisher of a size and type to extinguish any fire that may ignite on
materials being cut or welded or materials immediately adjacent to cutting and
welding operation.
6.7.2. All oxygen/acetylene cylinders shall be kept in an upright position and secured by
chain or other suitable means to prevent accidental displacement. A cylinder
truck, with chain, is a preferred method of sacrament.
6.7.3. Full and empty cylinders of oxygen shall not be stored close to cylinder of
acetylene or other fuel gas. They shall be separated by a minimum of 7 meters,
or by a noncombustible barrier accepted by H.A.C Safety dept.
6.7.4. Oxygen cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hoses, and apparatus
shall be kept free from and away from oil and grease. Oil or grease in the
presence of oxygen under pressure will ignite violently.
6.7.5. Cylinders in storage shall be kept away from sources of heat and shall be
protected against the direct rays of the sun.
6.7.6. Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed. Valve protection caps shall
always be in place except where cylinders are in use or connected for immediate
use.
6.8.2. Welding current return circuits or grounds shall be attached to the welding as
close as possible and shall carry their current without hot or sparking contacts
and without passage of current through equipment or structures which might be
damaged or made unsafe by the welding current or its voltage. Specifically,
welding current shall not be allowed to pass through any of the following
materials:
d) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hooks, hoisting or rigging equipment, metal hand
railings, ladders, machines, shafts, bearings, or weighing scales.
6.8.3. Noncombustible or flameproof screens shall shield all arc welding and cutting
6.8.4. The ground for the welding circuit shall be mechanically strong and electrically
adequate for the safe passage of workers.
6.8.5. Where it is necessary to couple, or uncouple, several lengths of cable for use as
a welding circuit, insulated cable connectors shall be used on both the ground
line and the electrode holder line. Coupler joints shall be fully insulated.
Welding machine supply lines shall be maintained in the shortest length
possible.
6.8.6. Cables with worn or damaged insulation shall not be used and shall be
immediately repaired or removed from the projects site.
6.8.7. An insulated electrode holder (stinger) of adequate rated current capacity shall be
used at all times.
6.8.8. Welding cables and gas hoses shall not be placed on stairs, walkways, ground or
floor where they are exposed to damage by foot traffic or create interference to
walking or work area access
6.9.2. Only qualified electricians, familiar with code requirements, shall be allowed to
perform electrical work. Only qualified electricians shall repair electrical
equipment including power tools.
6.9.5. Extension cords used with portable electrical tools and appliances shall be of the
three-wire type. Cords with the ground probe removed or rendered ineffective
shall be removed from service.
6.9.6. Electrical cords and trailing cables, which could create a hazard to employees or
other persons in the area, shall be covered, elevated or otherwise protected from
damage. Cords and cables shall not be placed on the ground or walking surface
6.9.7. The use of extension cords is limited as possible. Both male and female plugs
are of the dead front type.
6.9.8. Electrical cords and temporary wiring, when elevated, shall be secured with non-
metallic material. Tie-wire or other conductive material shall not be used. They
shall be elevated a minimum of 2.0 meters above the walking or work surface.
6.9.10. Fire and explosion from sparks in flammable atmospheres can and does lead to
loss of life and serious damage to property.
6.9.11. The severity of electric shock is not entirely dependent upon the voltage of the
power source. The ratio of the voltage to resistance determines the current that
will flow through the body and the resulting injury.
6.9.12. H.A.C and Construction subcontractors are responsible for the temporary electric
supply system on a construction site and the safety measures associated with the
National Electrical Code.
6.9.14. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the correct fuse or breaker ratings are
strictly enforced and that the Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) are
installed properly on all circuits.
6.9.15. All installation work must be carried out by qualified, experienced electricians.
6.9.17. Portable electric tools, extension lights and cords should be inspected each time
they are issued and returned. This should be part of a tool store procedure.
Frequent random checks should be made where those tools, lights and plugs are
being used on site.
6.9.18. Many accidents occur when lower volt equipment is plugged into higher volt
systems. Before any portable tool or extension-light is plugged in, the voltage
required for the tool or light must be the same as the power source, and the plugs
must be checked for damage.
6.9.19. All non-current carrying metal parts of any electrical equipment must be properly
grounded. This will reduce the electrical shock hazard.
6.9.20. Work Permits must be obtained and the type of equipment to be used discussed
and agreed upon before the permit is issued.
6.9.22. Before starting a job, the exact voltages should be known. This is important as it
determines the type of personal protection required for the work and the
procedures established in the work permit. If there is any doubt about voltages, a
check must be made before the work is started.
6.9.23. High voltage or overhead lines are usually not insulated. Therefore, any kind of
metallic object coming near or in contact with them can cause a hazardous
situation so it should never be assumed that there is enough clearance; it should
always be proved. It should never be assumed that a cable or line is "dead"; it
should always be checked.
6.9.25. Grounding cables shall be connected to ground first, and then the equipment.
Grounding cables shall be installed and removed using hot sticks or insulating
gloves and protective apparel.
6.10.2. Equipment manufactured with one light, front or rear, such as motorized carts are
acceptable as long as manufactured devices are working.
6.10.3. Personnel may not be hoisted by forklifts unless an approved manufactured work
platform is used per contractors written procedure that has been accepted by
H.A.C prior to hoisting the personnel.
6.10.4. Only authorized drivers shall be permitted to operate vehicles assigned for use on
the project. Accidents shall be reported immediately to H.A.C’s Safety
Department.
6.10.5. All cab glass shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible
distortion affecting the safe operation of any machine covered by this part.
Missing, defective, damaged or glass not accepted by H.A.C shall be replaced
before the equipment or vehicle is used on the project site.
6.10.6. All constructions equipment and vehicles having an obstructed view to the rear
6.10.7. All track type construction equipment shall have a travel alarm, audible above
surrounding noise level.
6.10.9. Heavy machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, which are suspended or held aloft
by use of slings, hoists, or jacks shall be substantially blocked or cribbed to
prevent falling or shifting before employees are permitted to work under or
between them. Bulldozer and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump
bodies, and similar equipment, shall be either fully lowered or blocked when
being repaired or when not in use. All controls shall be in neutral position, with
the motors stopped and brakes set, unless work is being performed required
otherwise.
6.10.10. All haulage vehicles, whose payload is loaded by means of cranes, power
Shovels, loaders, or similar equipment shall have a cab shield and/or Canopy
adequate to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials.
6.10.11. Engines shall be shut off during fueling or maintenance operations, except as
required for adjustment or testing.
6.10.12. Trip handles for tailgates of dump trucks and heavy equipment shall be so
arranged that, in dumping, the operator shall be in the clear.
6.10.13. No person shall be permitted to ride with arms or legs outside of the truck body,
in a standing position on the body, or on running boards or seated on side
fenders, cabs, cab shield, rear of truck, or on the load.
6.10.14. Personnel shall ride in fixed seats only, no riding on forklifts, tailgates, etc.
Ensure that personnel are properly trained on vehicles using hydraulic lift
gates.
6.10.15. No vehicle shall be driven at a speed greater than is reasonable and proper,
with due regard for weather, traffic, intersections, width and character of the
roadway, type of motor vehicle, and any other existing condition.
6.10.16. Only approved standard hand signals for crane, derrick, and boom equipment
shall be used. A copy of these hand signals shall be posted at the operating
position of each piece of equipment.
6.10.17. Rated load capacities, operating speeds, special hazard warnings shall be
conspicuously posted on all equipment. Instructions or warnings shall be
visible to the operator while he is at his control station.
6.10.18. All machinery and equipment shall be inspected by a competent person prior to
each use. The inspection shall be documented in writing and retained by the
subcontractor. Any deficiencies shall be repaired, or defective parts replaced,
6.10.19. Accessible areas within the swing radius of the rear of the superstructure of the
crane, either permanently or temporarily mounted, shall be barricaded in such a
manner as to prevent an employee from entering the swing radius areas and
being struck or crushed by the crane.
6.10.20. Swinging or hanging loads shall be lowered to the ground and detached from
the crane while the crane is being moved.
6.10.21. An accessible fire extinguisher of 5BC rating or higher shall be available at all
operator stations or cabs of equipment. Rollover protection (ROPS) is required
on all applicable equipment operated on the project.
6.11.2. Employees working more than 2 meters above any adjacent working surface,
placing reinforcing steel in walls, piers, columns, etc. shall be provided with and
use safety harness and secured lanyard.
6.11.3. Employees shall not be permitted to work above vertically protruding reinforcing
steel unless such steel H.A.C been protected to eliminate the impalement
hazard.
6.11.4. Riding concrete buckets for any purpose shall be prohibited, and working crews
shall be kept out from under suspended concrete buckets.
a) The erection floor shall be solidly planked over its entire surface except for
access openings. Planking shall not be less than five (5) cm thick, full size
undressed, and shall be laid tight and secured against movement.
c) Standard handrails, including top rail, mid-rail and toe board or equivalent
shall be installed around the periphery of all temporary planked floors during
structural steel erection. The erection subcontractor shall install turnbuckles
no less than every 30 meters to allow for tightening of cables. A minimum of
two cable clips shall be used at all securing points.
b) When setting structural steel, each piece shall be secured with not less than
two bolts at each connection and drawn up wrench tight before the load is
released from the crane or hoisting equipment.
d) Avoid walking on the top flange of beams. Employees shall coon the steel by
using the lower flange. When engaged in work from a height of more than 2
meters or when exposed to processes or machinery, a safety harness with
safety lanyard shall be used.
e) When loads are being hoisted, avoid walking under the lift or permitting an
employee to be exposed to the swing of the lift. No one shall be permitted to
ride the load under any circumstances.
g) For the protection of other employees on all projects, signs shall be posted in
the erection area.
General
Lifting operation is very dangerous and many accidents has been occurred during
this activity, majority of accident are resulted from lifting equipment, slings and
shackles, suspended load or crane operator so the following precautions
concerning lifting equipment, lifting gears should be considered during this
operation.
A Lifting Technical Study and Safety Plan shall be prepared and implemented for
those components for which one of the following lifting condition occurs:
c) The load exceeds 30 percent of rated load chart for crane and possible
failure would endanger existing facilities;
The Lifting Technical Study and Safety Plan shall be prepared and issued by
third party and submitted to the Clint for review and approval.
Use of cranes for hoisting of personnel should be avoided when possible. Prior to
requesting authorization for use of personnel platforms or aerial cages, the
responsible subcontractor’s supervisor will verify that all alternative access
methods have been reviewed and H.A.C determined that the use of such
equipment is the safest method available for performing the required work.
6.13.4. Competent person has good knowledge and experience shall supervise all lifting
operations.
6.13.5. Before beginning any crane operation, the supervisor and Operator should
review all lifting procedure requirements.
6.13.6.17. Other.
6.13.7. Cranes shall have a valid Crane Safety inspection sticker, crane Weekly
checklist shall be used by crane operator to ensure Regular inspection of crane
and the crane conditions still meet its Inspections certificates and site access
inspection.
6.13.8. Valid governmental heavy equipment license and H.A.C and / or Third
party Crane Operator Certificate are required for H.A.C and Subcontractors’
mobile crane operators.
6.13.9. Crane should be provided with valid calibration certificates from a third
party.
6.13.10. Hooks should be fitted with a safety catch on the hook opening so that the
slings cannot be displaced.
6.13.12. The hook shall be removed from service for the following Reasons (If there
are visible cracks, If it is twisted 10 degree out of place, If there is a 15% throat
opening beyond the Manufacturers specification).
6.13.13. There is an area surrounding every power line that is referred to as the
absolute limit of approach. It is strictly forbidden to move any crane boom or
load line or load into this area unless the line has been de-energized or
insulated (250.000 volt is 20 feet a safe distance and over 250,000 volt is 25
feet a safe distance).
6.13.14. When wind velocities are above 32 km/h (20 mph), the rated load and
6.13.16. The safe working load of rigging equipment is the maximum load which the
equipment should be subjected to; this load should never be exceeded.
6.13.17. Calibration certificates from third party should be available for all lifting
gears.
6.13.18. Before use, all new equipment should be subjected to a proof Load test by
the manufacturer and certified. The safe working load and serial number shall
be clearly marked on the sling And the lifting gear, either by tagging, stamping,
engraving, or embossing. Riggers shall not use lifting gear unless the safe
working load is clearly visible.
6.13.19. Slings shall not be tagged with safe working load in the field. Approval by
the Inspection and department and subsequent review by the Loss Prevention
Department is required.
6.13.20. It is essential that each wire rope sling is properly constructed and used.
6.13.21. All wire rope slings shall be manufactured, inspected, and load tested by a
recognized manufacturer.
6.13.22. Homemade wire rope slings shall not be allowed at project site.
6.13.23. As the angle between the legs of a multiple sling increases, the safe
working load decreases. The included angle should be no more than 90 and
must never exceed under any circumstances
6.13.24. Before storage, chain and wire rope slings should be cleaned, lightly
lubricated, and inspected.
6.13.25. Slings must be stored in a location where they are not liable to Suffer
mechanical damage, away from extremes of heat, cold, and especially
dampness.
6.13.26. H.A.C and construction subcontractors shall maintain a job site log of slings
containing the following information: ID. Number; sate in service; safe working
load as stated in proof load certificate; full details of periodic inspections.
6.13.27. All rigging shall be inspected at least every six months per ANSI B30.9 and
a Sling Inspection Report shall be completed and filed for review by the Crane
Inspector
6.13.28. Slings which have been damaged or are defective with more than 10%
shall be immediately removed from service, cut up and destroyed
6.13.30. All spreader bars shall be manufactured, tested, and inspected to ANSI
B30.20, permanently identified with the safe working load, manufacturer's name
and serial number
6.13.31. Spreader bars shall be stored away from moisture, and protected from
physical damage.
6.13.32. Shackles (clevis) are used for making connections in rigging; they should
be tested by the manufacturer and marked with the safe working load.
6.13.33. The pins are separate but matched parts of the shackles, so care must be
taken to use the correct pin for each shackle.
6.13.34. Rebar, mild steel bolts or similar items are not acceptable replacements for
shackle pins
6.13.35. H.A.C and construction subcontractors should assign banks man and he
must be well-acquainted with the hand signals, the different functions of lifting
gear, and the various methods of loading
6.13.37. Suspended load should be tied with tag line to avoid hitting hazard
equipment or personnel
Minimum
Area or Operation
Illumination
5 Foot-Candles General construction area lighting.
5 Foot-Candles Concrete placement, excavation and waste areas, access
ways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling,
and field maintenance areas.
5 Foot-Candles INDOORS: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exit ways.
5 Foot-Candles Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas:
(Exception; minimum of 10 foot candles is required at tunnel
and shaft heading during drilling, mucking and scaling.)
10 Foot-Candles General construction plant and shops, such as batch plants,
screening plants, mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms, trade shops such as carpenter-rigging-pipe-welding-
equipment-, active warehouses and storerooms, barracks
or living quarter, locker-shower-dressing rooms, mess halls,
indoor toilets, workrooms.
30 Foot-Candles First aid stations, Infirmaries, and offices.
Where the use of artificial light is required, it shall be maintained on while workers are
entering or leaving the areas.
Areas requiring the continuous use of artificial light shall be inspected at least once
daily and any defective lamps shall be immediately replaced.
6.15.2. Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being
raised against the head block.
6.15.3. A blocking device, capable of safely supporting the weight of the hammer, shall
be provided for placement in the leads under the hammer at all times while
employees are working under the hammer.
6.15.4. Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable
from jumping out of the sheaves.
6.15.5. When the leads shall be inclined in the driving of batter piles, provisions shall be
made to stabilize the leads.
6.15.6. Air hammer hose shall be securely attached to the hammer with an adequate
length of at least 1/4-inch diameter chain or cable to prevent whipping in the
event the joint at the hammer is broken.
6.15.8. Engineers and winch men shall accept signals only from the designated
signalmen.
6.15.9. All employees shall be kept clear when piling is being hoisted into the leads.
6.15.10. When piles are being driven in an excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall be
sloped to the angle of repose or sheet piled and braced.
6.15.11. When steel tube piles are being "blown out", employees shall be kept well
beyond the range of falling materials.
6.15.12. Employees in pile driving operations shall wear appropriate personal protective
equipment.
6.16.2. Chains, cables, and hooks shall be in good physical condition. Hanging hooks
shall be free to pivot when lifting or pulling a load.
6.16.4. Capacities of chain falls and come-a-longs shall be clearly marked and shall be
adequate for the load to be lifted or pulled. "Cheaters" shall not be used on the
handles of come-a-longs.
6.16.5. Chain falls and come-a-longs shall be inspected annually and the most recent
inspection date shall be clearly indicated on the equipment.
c) Only stable, safety arranged and adequately secured loads shall be handled.
b) Proper hand protection in the form of gloves shall be provided for persons
doing manual lifting.
a) Material stored inside a building under construction shall not be placed within
2 meters of any hoist way or inside floor hole or opening, nor within 3 meters
of an exterior wall, which does not extend above the top of the material being
stored.
c) Brick and concrete blocks shall not be stacked more than 2.5 meters in
height.
e) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock, and other cylindrical material, unless
racked, shall be stacked and blocked to prevent spreading or tilting.
h) Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear to provide free and safe
movement of material handling equipment and employees.
6.18.2. Respiratory hazard associated with abrasive blasting shall be analyzed and
proper protection provided as required.
6.18.3. Hearing hazard associated with abrasive blasting shall be analyzed and proper
protection provided as required.
6.18.4. Employees involved in abrasive blasting operations shall be equipped with heavy
canvas or leather gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from
the impact of abrasive.
6.18.5. Abrasive blasting equipment shall be inspected daily prior to use to ensure it is in
proper working condition. Defective equipment shall be tagged "Do Not Use"
and shall be immediately removed from service.
6.18.6. Dust accumulation shall be kept to a minimum through regular clean up and
proper disposal to ensure that other personnel are not unnecessarily exposed to
the respiratory, slipping and tripping hazards associated with abrasive blasting.
6.18.7. The area around the equipment to be cleaned shall be barricaded or roped off for
a distance of 10 meters. Shields may also be necessary to confine the dust and
silica.
6.18.8. Abrasive blasting in a defined confined space shall require a confined space entry
permit.
6.18.9. Prior to any abrasive blasting, a detailed blasting procedure shall be submitted to
H.A.C Safety for review and approval.
c)All required Safety Signs shall be in both Arabic and English and erected prior to
the initiation of construction activities or as necessitated by the work
performed.
e) Where a hazard exists, ensure proper signs, tags, or barricades are in place
to identify the hazard and protect employees until corrective actions can be
accomplished.
6.19.4. Flagging
b)Tape and chain used as flagging shall have a minimum width of 3/4 inch; and
rope and bunting used as flagging shall have a minimum rope diameter of
1/4 inches. Safety signs shall be attached to the flagging to identify the
hazards.
c) Flagging shall be placed at least 2 meters laterally from the hazard being
identified.
6.19.5. Barricades
d)Barricades shall be placed at least 0.75 meters from the edge of excavation.
7. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE
7.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
To establish and implement a basic Industrial Hygiene Program to be used
7.2. OBJECTIVE
To assure all personnel are aware of occupational hazards associated with their
scope of work and precautionary means to protect against occupational illnesses.
7.3. PURPOSE
7.3.1. Respiratory Protection
Noise exposure is inherent in construction. Loud and prolonged noise can cause
loss of hearing, pain, nausea, and reduced muscular control. Employees shall
wear hearing protection in areas posted or as determined by H.A.C.
a) All Supervisors and Subcontractors shall be solely responsible for the safe
use and storage in accordance with all applicable laws, of any chemicals or
other materials used in the performance of their work and shall be required
to provide a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) with 100%
disclosure for each chemical. All chemicals brought onto the construction
site shall bear a label stating the identity of the chemical, any hazards
associated with it, and the name of the responsible party bringing such
chemical onto the site (Attachment 4).
b) Any non-hazardous waste in any form, which results from the work shall be
properly disposed of in a safe manner, protective of the environment and in
accordance with all applicable laws.
c) Accurate records of the types and quantities of all waste, including but not
limited to hazardous wastes shall be maintained. Subcontractors shall
provide copies of all such records to the Contractor. No chemicals of any
kind shall be pumped or allowed to flow into any sewer.
a) Subcontractors, under the direction from the H.A.C Safety Department, shall
establish a written Comprehensive Hazard Communications Program, which
shall include the following:
b) Labels
In the work area, each container shall be labeled, logged, or marked with
the identity of hazardous chemicals contained therein, and shall show
hazard warnings appropriate for employee protection. The hazard warning
can be any type of messages, words, pictures, or symbols, which convey
the hazard. Labels shall be legible in English and Arabic and be
prominently displayed.
Beyond the identity information, the Material Safety Data Sheets shall
provide information on:
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 39 of 64
(i) The physical and chemical characteristics of the hazardous chemicals.
(ii) Known acute and chronic health effects and related health information.
(vi) The name of the organization responsible for preparing the sheet.
(vii) Copies of the Material Safety Data Sheets are to be at the work site,
readily accessible to employees in that area.
(iii) Operations in their work areas where hazardous chemicals are present.
(iv) Where the subcontractor shall be keeping the written hazard evaluation
procedures, Communications Program, lists of hazardous chemicals,
and the required material safety data sheets.
b) Hand soap and paper towels shall be provided. A trash container shall be
provided for the towels.
c) Employees are not allowed to take lunch break or rest break in construction
areas. Breaks will be taken in accordance with local customs.
8. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
8.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish guidelines to be followed by all personnel during emergency situations.
8.2.2 The area superintendent’s office will serve as the emergency station for each
work area.
8.2.3 A full time nurse will be stationed at the main emergency station. The nurse
will be available to travel to other sites or give guidance via telephone/radio if
an emergency arises.
8.2.4 The nearest local medical facilities will be used in emergency cases for
employees.
8.2.5 An ambulance will be designated and will be dedicated for that purpose. To
the main emergency station.
9. LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE
9.1. PURPOSE
Establish Lockout/Tag out procedures for securing machinery and equipment, having
potentially hazardous energy sources, during construction period. It is essential that
all personnel are consistent with their lockout procedure to ensure the safety of all
employees. A lockout procedure is to render inoperative electrical systems, pumps,
9.2. PROCEDURE
9.2.2 All locks and applicable tags shall be issued by the subcontractor's Safety
Representative to their applicable personnel as required.
9.2.3 The subcontractor's Safety Representative shall maintain a lock and tag log.
Sample log sheet attached.
9.2.4 All energy sources shall be locked out and a "DANGER" tag affixed to the
equipment or system indicating who installed the lock, craft, subcontractor's
name, phone number, and reason system is locked out.
9.2.7 Each employee involved with lockouts shall have a lock with an individual
key. No locks with duplicate or master keys shall be used. Craft or gang
locks shall not be used unless approved by the H.A.C Safety Department.
9.2.8 Subcontractors are required to identify their locks with name engraved on
locks.
9.2.10 If more than one employee is required to lockout and tag a piece of
equipment, or circuit, a multiple padlock device shall be used.
9.2.11 After locking out and tagging a circuit, an attempt to energize the equipment
shall be made by depressing or turning to "on" all starting stations before work
begins. In no case shall work begin before circuits and equipment is tested to
ensure that they are de-energized.
9.2.12 Any employee who removes a lock and tag belonging to another employee or
person, or overrides lock and tag in anyway, shall be removed from the job
site immediately.
9.2.13 Written authorization H.A.C to be obtained from the H.A.C Safety Department
or supervision of the responsible subcontractor when a lock H.A.C been left
on a piece of equipment and the originator is not available for its removal.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 42 of 64
9.2.14 When locks and tags are required, the personnel working on that circuit shall
notify their supervisor. The supervisor, or his designee, shall see that
appropriate locks and tags are provided. Following completion of the work,
the supervisor is also to be notified for the removal of the locks and tags.
9.2.15 Electrical systems, which share a power source with a common main breaker,
may be worked as follows:
a) Where practical, the main breaker shall be opened (racked out) and
locked out per the Lockout Procedure.
b) In cases where breakers are used to sub feed branch circuits (more than
one circuit) being supplied from one main breaker, and the panel does
not accept a padlock with a buddy device, the beaker switch shall be
shut off, a piece of lockout tape shall be used to cover breaker switch
and tag shall be placed on shut breaker. Tags shall be entered in
Lockout log as a lock.
f) Lines, valves and similar systems that are being tested pneumatically or
with other gases such as nitrogen, shall be tagged and/or locked out to
prevent an accidental discharge of the pressure within the line. In
addition, areas affected by the pneumatic test shall be barricaded
against entry and inspected by the H.A.C Safety Department prior to
commencement of the test.
Hot work permits applies to work inside area has flammable and/or combustible
material and may generate during work one/or of the following:-
a) Naked flame.
Cold work permits apply any work involving one or more of the -
c) Chemical cleaning.
a) Work inside any confined space, tank, vessel or any non-operational, Non
ventilated area where dangerous or unknown concentrations of toxic, flammable
or hazardous gases, fumes or vapors could arise or Where the oxygen
content of the air could be reduced below 19.5% by volume.
b) Area authority shall issue confined space entry permit after completion pre-permit
work area checks.
c) Confined space entry procedure shall be drawn for all major works by the area
and performing authorities, with advice from project HSE Manager.
e) Stand by man (attendant) shall be stay full time to monitor confined space entry
personnel by using Confined space entry log.
a) Excavation permit shall be required to ensure that all necessary precautions are
taken to avoid damage to underground services such as electrical cables, piping,
instrumentation and telecommunication.
b) All the required signatories for obtaining clearance of underground cables and
services have checked and signed.
a) Area authority and performing authority shall visit the work area to discuss
together all necessary preparatory work and HSE Requirements.
b) Gas testing shall applied by qualified gas tester which shall certify by signature
the gas testing results.
c) Site HSE manger shall specify any additional safety precautions required and
sign.
d) Performing authority shall prepare risk assessment to the work stated, discuss
work permit requirements, and risk assessment results with the persons who are
to perform the work.
f) After completion, all work permit requirement and gas testing, the area authority
and performing authority shall accept by signature that site preparation and
conditions are satisfactory for the work stated to proceed.
a) A work permit is valid for only one shift, but it may be extended for one additional
shift with proper approval.
c) The receiver of the work permit must keep the permit posted at the job location at
all times.
d) The receiver of a work permit must keep a copy in his possession or within view
of the job site for the duration of the job, so that it may be presented upon
request and if the receiver leaves the job site, he shall give the permit to a
responsible senior crew member to keep until he returns.
e) The issuer, receiver and the senior crew member must sign the work permit
transferring the work permit to the senior crew member.
f) At the end of the shift, each work permit must be closed out by both issuer and
receiver and the only exception shall be when the distance and remoteness
make signing impractical, and it is so stated when the work permit is issued.
11.2. OBJECTIVE
To assure all personnel are aware of safe working practices during cutting and
welding operations.
11.3. PROCEDURE
11.3.1. Safety regulations as outlined in Section 6.7, Gas Welding and Cutting and
11.3.2. All areas where cutting and welding is to be performed shall be inspected
prior to operations by Subcontractor's Safety Representative. Combustible
materials shall be either covered with noncombustible covers or removed
from area.
11.3.4. Adequate portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in area for cutting and
welding.
12.1. POLICY
Whenever performance of any task would allow a worker to fall a distance of two (2)
meters or more or any distance where the likelihood of a serious or fatal injury exists,
the hazards of falling shall be identified, evaluated and controlled.
12.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure personnel working at an elevation where
they are exposed to a fall hazard have been properly trained and continuous fall
hazard protection is maintained.
12.3. PROCEDURE
b) Within two (2) meters of a roof's edge or roof opening, elevated open-
sided platform, screen guard and floors.
d) At all times while operating or working out of a man lift, high reach or
approved personnel lifting basket.
e) Working from ladder two (2) or more meters from the floor.
12.3.2. Continuous Fall Protection shall be required all times when working in
unprotected elevations and subjected to fall of two (2) meters or greater.
Continuous fall protection can be accomplished as follows:
c) Self-retracting lifelines.
e) Safety nets.
12.4.2. Defective fall protection equipment should be taken out of service and
destroyed.
12.4.3. Equipment shall be stored in a manner that shall prelude damage from
environment factors, such as heat, excessive moisture, oil, chemicals and
their vapors or other degrading elements.
13.1. PURPOSE
To establish safe operating procedures, to be used unilaterally by H.A.C and all
subcontractors, to protect employees who have to enter a confined space for work
tasks.
13.3. PROCEDURE
13.3.1. Hazard Identification
Before employees are permitted to enter a confined space, the hazards shall be
identified and evaluated. The severity of hazards shall be determined in order to
classify the confined space entry as a low hazard or high hazard entry (Sections
13.3.7 and 13.3.12). The confined space shall be evaluated when the conduct of
work is suspected of introducing new hazards into the space.
a) The air monitor shall perform atmosphere testing, and ensure proper
authorization of the Confined Space Entry Permit for all confined space
entries.
c) Retest confined space atmosphere a minimum of each eight (8) hour shift.
Frequency of re-testing shall be the decision of the H.A.C Safety Department
and authorized attendant. All atmospheric testing is the responsibility of the
subcontractor and the H.A.C Safety Department shall witness test.
In addition to atmospheric testing, the air monitor and authorized attendant shall
d) Falling objects.
h) Physical stress.
13.3.4. Isolation
13.3.5. Ventilation
a) Before employees are permitted to enter a confined space, the space shall be
mechanically ventilated, if necessary.
b) Prior to ventilating a confined space, the qualified person shall take positive
steps to ensure that no prophetic materials or work practices that shall ignite
flammable vapor in the presence of air are present in the confined space.
g) Whenever possible, air movers shall be used with ducting to increase the
efficiency of ventilation in the confined space and to prevent recalculation of
contaminated air due to ventilation "short circuiting".
h) When two or more air movers are used for ventilation, all such units should be
operated in the same flow direction to maximize efficiency.
a) The Confined Space Entry Permit shall be posted as close to the point of
entry as possible, and shall remain there for the job duration.
b) All entrances to any confined space that could be inadvertently entered shall
be posted. Signs shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following
information:
DANGER
CONFINED SPACE
ENTER BY PERMIT ONLY
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
a) No entry shall be permitted into confined spaces that have been found to
contain atmosphere which are flammable, oxygen deficient or immediately
dangerous to life and health.
(i) Employees entering the confined space shall be equipped with airline
respirators operated in the pressure-demand mode with a 5-minute
escape air pack. The breathing air (minimum Grade D) shall be supplied
from air compressors or compressed air cylinders. The final decision on
respiratory protection shall be determined by the H.A.C Safety
Supervisor. A sign-in/sign-out log shall be used.
(ii) Employees entering the confined space shall be equipped with full body
harness and lifeline.
(iii) A man-rated hoisting device with fall arrest capability shall be provided
for lifting employees out of confined space with top entry. The retrieval
equipment shall be on-site and operational prior to entry.
(iv) The Authorized Attendant shall stand by on the outside of the confined
space ready to give assistance in case of an emergency. The attendant
shall not enter the confined space, but shall notify rescue personnel.
The attendant shall be present at all times during confined space entry.
(v) The Authorized Attendant shall also maintain and have available lifeline
and harness and all other protective gear required for entry.
(vi) All entrants shall use applicable protective equipment, such as head and
eye protection, gloves, boots, and imperious clothing, as required by the
nature of the potential hazards and atmosphere contaminants.
Protective clothing types shall be specified on the confined space permit.
c) Low Hazard Confined Space - When the atmosphere of the confined space is
found to be below the action level of the most toxic contaminant present, and
are acceptable LEL and oxygen levels, no special modification of the work
procedure should be necessary, except as indicated below:
(i) The nature of the work, such as mechanical cleaning of the tank
surfaces, may require the use of respiratory protection, head and eye
protection, gloves, boots and impervious clothing.
13.3.8. Illumination
b) Extension cords used for temporary lighting shall be equipped with ground
fault circuit interrupter connectors. Switches shall be approved for the
location.
c) The lighting shall not be suspended by the electric cords, unless they are
designed for this method of suspension.
d) Electric cords shall be kept clear of working spaces and walkways or other
locations in which they may be exposed to damage.
a) Cylinders of compressed gas of any type shall not be taken into confined
spaces. Self-contained breathing apparatus equipment is the only
exception.
c) Confined space entrants are not to carry matches or cigarette lighters into
space containing or possibly containing flammable gases, vapors or
combustible dusts.
13.3.10. Communication
d) Monitoring activities inside and outside the confined space during work
operations to ensure that it is safe for authorized entrants to remain in the
space. Remains at entry point unless relieved by another authorized
attendant.
(i) Warns the unauthorized person(s) away from or out of the space.
a)Hazard Information
(i) Hazards shall be identified for each confined space. The hazard
evaluation is based on overall risk associated with entry. The
(ii) The past and current usage of the confined space, which may
adversely affect the atmosphere of the confined space, should be
reviewed. The usage review should include, but not be limited to a
review of the following:
b)Hazard Evaluation
(i) Scope of Hazard Exposure - How many and/or which employees are
exposed or may be affected.
(ii) Magnitude of the Hazard - How much energy may be released, how
toxic are the chemicals, quantity of materials which could be
inadvertently introduced, etc.
(viii) If there is the possibility that the confined space atmosphere can
become IDLE while the work is in progress, procedures and
equipment shall be provided to allow the employee to safely exit the
confined space.
14.2. INSPECTION
14.2.1. Prior to daily use, all self propelled work platforms shall be inspected by the user.
Listed below are items that should be checked prior to use:
14.3.1. Lift controls shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that they are in
safe working order.
14.3.2. Brakes shall be set and outriggers positioned on flat, solid surfaces.
14.3.4. Boom and basket load limits shall be checked and not exceeded (usually two (2)
employees and their necessary tools).
14.3.5. Employees shall tie-off with a full body harness and secured safety lanyard to the
basket, but never to adjacent pole, structure, etc.
14.3.8. Scissor lifts shall never be moved with the platforms up.
14.3.9. Outriggers shall be in the stored position before any aerial lift is moved.
14.3.10. Do not operate lifts while batteries are being charged in place.
14.3.11. When lifts are used inside buildings, consideration shall be given to carbon
monoxide emissions. Lifts that are propane driven or have air purifying
scrubbers generate far less carbon monoxide.
14.3.12. Equipment being used should be free of leaks, however, if a leak should
develop install plastic type catch cloth under carriage of equipment. Repair leak
as soon as possible.
15.1. OBJECTIVE
To establish a Fire Protection and Prevention Program to be used unilaterally by all
personnel on the job site.
15.2.3. Subcontractors are responsible for the provision of adequate portable fire
protection for their scope of work.
15.3. HOUSEKEEPING
15.3.1. Clear access to all available fire fighting equipment shall be maintained at all
times. The hanging of clothing, ropes, or other materials over fire protection
equipment shall be prohibited.
15.3.2. Daily cleanup of scrap material, sawdust, rags, oil paint, grease, flammable
solvents, and other residue of construction operations shall be required.
15.3.3. All constructions areas and storage yards shall be cleared of weeds, debris and
other combustible materials before lumber and other combustible construction
materials are delivered to the job site.
15.3.4. All rubbish shall be cleared from buildings at least daily and work areas shall be
kept free of accumulations of debris.
15.3.5. Areas beneath and within three meters of buildings should be free of
accumulation of debris and combustible vegetation.
15.3.6. All rags, waste, etc. soiled by combustible or flammable materials shall be placed
in tightly closed metal containers for daily disposal.
Classification Materials
Ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber and
Class A
many plastics.
Flammable liquids, oils, grease, tars, oil base paints, lacquers, and
Class B
flammable gases.
Energized electrical equipment where the electrical non-conductivity of the
Class C
extinguishing media is of importance.
Class D Combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium, etc.
15.6.1. Following is a list of type and location of fire extinguishers to be provided by the
subcontractor. This list is not all inclusive of use:
b) One or more fire extinguisher rated 2A shall be placed within 3 meters of all
open yard storage areas of combustible materials.
c) One each 20 B: C rated fire extinguisher shall be located outside but within 3
meters of rooms storing over 60 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids.
d) One B: C rated fire extinguisher located between 8 and 25 meters from any
outside flammable liquid storage area.
15.7. INSPECTION
15.7.1. All portable fire protection equipment shall be maintained in operating order,
inspected, and documented in writing on a monthly schedule. Each piece of fire
protection equipment shall have the date of the inspection and initials of the
inspector for the current monthly inspection attached.
16.2. DEFINITIONS
16.2.1. Combustible Liquid - Liquid having a flash point at or above 37C. (100F.) and
subdivided as follows:
Flash Point
Classification
@ or above C [F] below C [F]
Class II 37 [100] 60 [140]
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 59 of 64
Class IIA 60 [140] 93 [200]
Class IIB 93 [200]
16.2.2. Flammable Liquids - Having flash point below 37C. (100F.) and a vapor
pressure not exceeding 40 psi at 37C. (100F.) and are of Class I which are
subdivided as follows:
16.3.2. Signs prohibiting open flames such as smoking or spark generating tools or
equipment shall be posted.
16.3.4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be provided by the manufacturers,
vendors, or subcontractors for flammable or combustible materials brought on job
site.
16.3.5. Flammable and combustible liquids shall be kept 15 meters away from hot work,
open flames or other spark related activities.
16.3.6. Flammable debris shall be disposed of in approved metal containers with lids.
16.4.2. There shall be no more than 3 flammable liquid storage cabinets in one area
unless separated by at least 30 meters.
16.4.6. Storage areas shall be kept free of debris and in good housekeeping order.
16.5.2. The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert spills away from buildings
and should be surrounded by a curb or earthen dike or container in the storage
areas to contain a spill or ruptured container.
16.5.3. Area within dikes shall be lined to prevent leakage of flammable and combustible
liquids into the soil.
16.5.4. Vegetation and debris shall be kept free form the storage area and in good
housekeeping order.
16.8.2. Containers or tanks shall be grounded and bonded to the container the
material is being dispensed into.
16.8.5. Leaks from the nozzle into the drip pan shall be cleaned immediately.
16.9.1. Storage areas shall be kept free of debris and maintained in good
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 61 of 64
housekeeping condition.
16.9.3. Material storage indoor shall not obstruct or adversely affect means of exit.
H. A. CONSTRUCTION
THE FOLLOWING SAFETY AND HEALTH RULES ARE A PARTIAL LIST OF GENERAL
REGULATIONS THAT SHALL APPLY TO ALL CONSTRUCTIONS EMPLOYEES, VENDORS,
DELIVERY PERSONNEL, AND VISITORS ON THE H.A.C PROJECTS. ANY PERSON WHO
CARELESSLY DISREGARDS THESE OR ANY APPLICABLE SAFETY AND HEALTH
REGULATIONS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO DISCIPLINARY ACTION UP TO AND INCLUDING
REMOVAL FROM THE JOB SITE.
1. The following Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is required to be worn by all persons, at all
times while on the construction site:
2. Smoking is prohibited in areas where flammable liquids are stored or being used and other
designated areas.
3. All occupational injuries and illnesses, no matter how slight, shall be reported to your
supervisor immediately. If you are injured on the job and do not report the occurrence to your
supervisor, the company shall not be responsible for medical expense incurred by you.
4. Submitting false or fraudulent information, when reporting an accident or injury, shall be cause
for removal from the job site.
5. Fighting, gambling, horseplay and other misconduct are not permitted, or threatening or
attacks upon another employee be tolerated and shall be cause for immediate removal from
the job site.
6. The use or possession of intoxicants or drugs on the job is prohibited. Any employee
reporting for work intoxicated or under the influence of intoxicating liquor or drugs shall not be
allowed to work and shall be administered disciplinary action which could result in immediate
removal from the job.
7. Keep clear of all equipment. Avoid pinch points and the blind areas. Be alert to avoid swinging
or suspended loads.
8. Be alert for and heed all information and warning signs at all times.
9. Do not use compressed air to dust-off yourself or clean about any area.
10. Unless authorized, do not attempt to repair or tamper with equipment that is not functioning
properly. Report malfunctions to your supervisor.
11. Whenever anyone is required to work on or in close proximity to electrical equipment or electrical
circuitry, appropriate tagging shall be placed to identify all controls deactivating the circuit, and
the circuit shall be locked out, when possible.
ESH M-02 Safety Manual Rev. A Page 63 of 64
12. Jumping on or off equipment or vehicles, either moving or stationary is prohibited.
13. Misuse of tools and equipment or circumventing safety devices can result in injury to yourself or
others. Do not use makeshift or "jury-rigged" tools or equipment to perform your job.
14. Unless specifically authorized by H.A.C, firearms and explosives are prohibited on the job site.
15. Report all unsafe and unhealthy practices and conditions to your supervisor at once.
16. All fire protection and emergency equipment are plainly marked and shall be kept free of
obstruction at all times.
17. Only authorized and properly trained and supervised personnel are permitted to operate
equipment, vehicles, valves, electrical switches and similar machinery.
18. Ride only on vehicles designated and designed for transporting personnel.
19. Store and use gas cylinders in a secure, upright position, with their valve caps secure and the
cylinders shielded from the sunlight.
20. Maintain good housekeeping at all times. Keep waste, debris, and rubbish cleaned up. Place all
lunch papers, cups, cans and other litter in trash receptacles. Discard and/or store all oily
rags, waste and similar combustible materials in metal containers provided for that purpose.
21. Riding loads, slings, the ball, crane hook or other materials hoisting equipment is prohibited,
except in a life threatening emergency.
22. Keep all machinery guards, guardrails and other protective devices in place and in good operating
order.
23. Be alert at all times to conditions and work processes in your area and surrounding area and with
the presence of other workers and equipment so that you can foresee and avoid potential
dangers.
24. Work area guidelines and regulations for environmental protection shall be strictly followed. All
hazardous material shall be properly handled, stored and disposed of.
HAC believe such key objectives benefit all persons involved in company activities will only be achieved through
continually improving of HSE performance through applying safe working practices and procedures, spread safety
awareness among employees and contractors and a commitment to safety regulations and rules in all activities
carried out.
To achieve these objectives HAC will pursue the following occupational health, safety & Environments policies:
* HAC is guided by an established accident-prevention policy. This policy is based on a sincere desire to eliminate
personal injuries, occupational illnesses and damage to equipment and property, as well as to protect the general
public whenever and wherever the public comes in contact with, or is affected by the facilities Operation activity.
* HAC will maintain a safety and accident prevention program which meets the requirements of the Host Country,
local codes, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. As a supplement to the requirements of such
authorities, the Contractor shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the “Manual of Accident Prevention in
Operation” published by the Associated General Contractors,
* Management and supervision are charged with the responsibility of preventing the occurrence of incidents or
conditions that could lead to occupational injuries or illness. While the ultimate success of the Safety, Health and
Fire Prevention Program depends upon the full cooperation of each individual employee, it is management's
responsibility to see that safety, health and fire prevention rules and procedures are adequate and enforced, and to
see that effective training and education programs are employed to the best advantage.
* Every supervisor shall be held accountable for the safety performance demonstrated by the employees under his
supervision. Employees are responsible to abide by procedures, use tools and equipment safely, follow the rules
and use personal protective equipment provide.
* HAC will comply with all applicable laws and regulations and promote the commitment and skills of its
personnel to ensure effective environmental management of its business.
* HAC recognizes its responsibility to protect the environment and to minimize, as far as is safe, practicable and
economically sound, any adverse environmental impact of its activities.
* HAC expects and will encourage its employees and contractors to take a responsible attitude towards their own
and their colleague’s impact on the environment.
* HAC will establish clear environmental targets and develop appropriate performance indicators.
* HAC will reduce and restrict the production of waste and, where possible, dispose of such wastes by recycling.
Hassan Allam
Yehia Zakaria Street, Industrial Zone – Lot 5, Sheraton Heliopolis Housing, Cairo, Egypt
Tel: +202 26785 917 Fax: +202 26785 920 www.allamsons.com
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
ISO 14001:2015
The management system is applicable to:
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
OHSAS 18001:2007
The management system is applicable to:
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
CERTIFICATE
OF REGISTRATION
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
Intertek Certification Limited, 10A Victory
Park, Victory Road, Derby DE24 8ZF, United
Kingdom
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate͛s validity is subject to the organization maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek͛s requirements for systems certification. Validity may
be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the property of Intertek, to
whom it must be returned upon request.
SAFETY STATISTICS UPDATE
1.1.1 Company
1.1.2 Subcontractors
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
24,146,033.00 37,321,114.00 63,329,403.00 93,366,384.00 90,109,934.00 Number of worked hours
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Environmental incidents
655.00 221.00 523.00 1,217.00 1,339.00 Near miss accidents
518.00 114.00 318.00 699.00 2,147.00 Number of medical treatments (MT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of restricted work cases (RW)
2.00 1.00 4.00 7.00 14.00 Number of lost time accidents (LT)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Number of fatal accidents (FA)
0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 Lost Time Injury Rate (LTIR) (1)
4.31 0.62 1.02 1.51 4.80 Total Recordable Injury Rate (TRIR) (2)
12.00 4.00 64.00 161.00 161.00 Total number of lost calendar days (TLD)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Rate of seriousness (Rs) (3)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Workers compensation insurance rate (if applicable) (4)
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) (if applicable)
Key
(1) LTIR = (LT+FA) x 200.000
Number of worked hours
Notes:
1. Each case is to be counted one in the most severe category i.e. as an MT, RW, LW or FA.
2. A First Aid Case is not to be counted as a Medical Treatment Case.
3. A First Aid injury is any one-time treatment of a worker and subsequent observation of an injury, which does not ordinarily require medical treatment.
Such treatment is considered first aid, whether provided by a first aid provider or a medical professional.
4. MT - A medical evaluation or treatment done by a third party medical provider.
5. RW - Restricted work status occurs when, as the result of a work-related injury or illness, an employer or health care professional keeps, or recommends
keeping, an employee from doing the routine functions of his or her job or from working the full.
6. LW - Days away from work occur when, as the result of a work-related injury or illness, an employee is unable to be present in the workplace during the full
workday that the employee would have been scheduled to work before the injury or illness occurred.
Form:
Revision: 0 HSE Statistics Page 1 of 1
______________________________________________________________________ __________________
ANNEX 13: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 43 of 44
1 x 30 (Bula) + 1 x 20 (Mafanco) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
Page | 1
1. SCOPE
This document defines the H.A. CONSTRUCTION (H.A.C) standard requirements for Quality Assurance and
Quality Control for all relevant construction activities of Guinea Bissau - EPC – 1 x 30 (Bula) + 1 x 20
(Mafanco) MWAC PV Power Plants
The purpose of this document is to define the methodology and processes to be applied in the Project. It
contains only the activities pertinent to the project execution phase and contains:
• The quality standards and requirements to be applied in the project. This will include the quality
standards that should be followed by the subcontractors as well as the internal quality processes and
procedures;
• The quality responsibilities of the involved parties and the related reporting process;
• The quality documentation process. This will present the methodology, the timing and the
responsibilities of the quality documentation process;
The quality plan aims to make use of all available templates and quality recommendations H.A.C’s Quality
system. All stakeholders should be familiar with how quality shall be planned, assured and controlled
throughout all the project phases.
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Ensure that the installation of the plant is carried out according to precise specifications, which are
defined in contractual documents;
• Ensure that the construction and installation of the plant is carried out on a ‘right first time’ basis;
• Attain the aimed performance ratio of the plant;
• Comply with the relevant market standards;
• Ensure relevant stakeholders that the photovoltaic plant operates in accordance with the set
standards;
• Meet business expectations: enable the desired benefits to be achieved.
Page | 2
4. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
For all the works to be performed under the scope of work, H.A.C will establish and implement quality
assurance Plan which, as a minimum, meets the requirements set out in the relevant section of ISO 9001.
Our Project Quality Management submitted includes a general description of the scope of work and more
specifically the following items:
H.A. CONSTRUCTION will maintain Quality Control Plan (QCP) to check and enhance the quality of all
Construction activities in order to assure the fulfillment of the Contract quality requirements. Where
relevant, such document will include Quality Control Plans from sub-contractors.
Page | 3
6. OVERALL QUALITY RESPONSIBILITIES
The present Project Quality Plan is based on the following relevant tasks and responsibilities concerning the
Project quality themes:
All Project participants Compliance with the quality Implementation of quality activities and
plan in the respective areas procedures in the respective areas of work.
H.A.C Project through of work.planning Quality
Quality • Define the overall Project Quality Plan
Quality Manager control including the Quality Control Plan.
Overall quality • Review and approve the detailed Project
communication Assurance of
Quality Plan and Quality Control Plan
overall project quality.
designed/elaborated by the Contractor
• Review and approval of Quality Control
Plans from suppliers and subcontractors.
• Maintenance of quality documentation.
• Maintenance and follow up of issue register.
Further role descriptions are to be defined in the Contractor’s Project Quality Management Plan.
Page | 4
7. APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY
The quality management of the project will continue to be ensured amongst others through the following
principles:
• Careful planning
• Team work and open discussion on issues
• Double check and side-control routines
• Use of new materials only
• Early warning of potential quality issues and early involvement of quality referees or experts
• Open dialog and observation of works and processes
• Fulfillment of quality control plan and the inspections therein
• Detailed planning of testing and commissioning of plant
• Internal and external quality audits as and when considered necessary
The methodology to be followed for the project quality management is based on the following activities and
documents:
The purpose of an Inspection and Test Plan is to put together in a single document that records all
inspection and testing requirements relevant to a specific process or element of work.
H.A. CONSTRUCTION will prepare and maintain Inspection and Test Plans (ITP) that identifies the items of
materials and work to be inspected or tested, by whom and at what stage or frequency, as well as Hold
and Witness Points, references to relevant standards, acceptance criteria and the records to be
maintained. Such plans must systematically list quality activities relating to the Works and will, where
relevant, include ITPs from sub-contractors. The ITPs must include:
Page | 5
• Identification of the person responsible for carrying out the control
• Reference to acceptance criteria for the activities
• Reference to applicable test and inspection procedures
• Reference to the record forms or inspection checklist
• Identification of the involvement of H.A. CONSTRUCTION and Third parties in inspection and test
activities
• List of Laboratories for external inspection
H.A. CONSTRUCTION will provide records in various forms, such as checklists or record forms, test
certificates, certificates of compliance/conformity, survey data, written approvals to provide the documented
evidence necessary to verify that the work is in accordance with the contract requirements.
Inspection checklists will be developed to give confidence that the person doing the work is aware of all the
important steps, attributes and matters to be addressed, and the standards that should be complied with,
and that conformity is being verified.
The inspection checklist will include the date of inspection, the name / qualification and the signature of the
person who carries out the inspection.
The quality acceptance criteria for components and works shall be described in the Quality Control Plan and
associated test sheets, as well as the measurements to be applied in case of non-compliance with the quality
criteria. Acceptance criteria shall also be described in the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Strict tolerance
and limits shall be adhered to at all times.
The inspection and testing activities and the affected components and works are listed in the Quality Control
Plan. Where appropriate, inspection activities shall be described in detail in Quality Inspection Procedures or
inspection checklists and recorded in Quality Inspection Reports, which shall be approved and signed by the
respective responsible appointed in the Quality Control Plan. For all other inspections, the signature of the
responsible for the inspection on the respective document shall be sufficient for its approval. The Contractor
and all Contractor’s Personnel responsible for Quality Inspection Reports, shall ensure that all reports and
completed check sheets are drafted and approved within 72 hours of having witnessed any test, inspection or
conducted a factory visit. Where the signature of the Employer’s Representative or other Employer Personnel
is required as part of any quality inspection, Contractor shall ensure that the correct documentation is
presented for signing within 24 hours of the occurrence of a test.
Page | 6
10. QUALITY DOCUMENTATION
This section of the Project Quality Plan defines the quality documentation to be produced during execution of
the Works.
The Project Quality Plan (PQP) is the document which sets out the basic guidelines for the quality
management for the project. The Contractor shall develop the Contractor’s Project Quality Plan in additional
detail outlining the documentation, organization, responsibilities, frequencies of inspection etc. This document
shall be submitted before the execution of any of the Works, within 14 days of the Commencement Date.
The Quality Control Plan or Inspection and Testing Plan (in some industries) sets out on an activity level the
inspections to be carried out, the procedure or check lists to be used, the report or documentation to be
generated, the acceptance criteria and gives the Employer the opportunity to specify witness, hold or review
points. This document shall be submitted before the execution of any of the Works, within 14 days of the
Commencement Date.
Quality Forms shall be created by the Contractor to be used as templates for recording of inspection and
testing activities. Each inspection shall generate a Quality Record in the Quality Form template. Quality
Forms shall be submitted to the Employer for review prior to being issued for construction.
Records are established to provide evidence of conformity to requirements and the effective operation of the
Quality Management System. Scatec Solar has defined process that ensures the controls needed for the
identification, storage, protection, retrieval, retention time and disposition of records. Records shall also
remain legible, readily identifiable and retrievable.
10.5. Punch-lists
Overview on identified items which must be solved before the signature of a certificate
10.6. Certificates
Signed proof of quality activities and documentation having met specific requirements
When necessary, Quality Instructions will be created to describe procedures or quality activities. Quality
instructions will be linked to the correspondent quality activity or inspection in the Quality Control Plan.
Page | 7
10.8. Non-conformance Register
Non-conformance Register is a document that lists all the non-conformances in the project. It also gives the
status of the non-conformances. This is a separate document from the PQP.
H.A. CONSTRUCTION provides attached sample plans and record forms as standard templates which
describe the minimum requirements for quality control of work. These minimum requirements will be taken
into account by all subcontractors when elaborating the Inspection and test plan and the inspection
checklists.
The following standard inspection plans are attached to this document as a sample:
Civil Works:
Page | 8
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-004
INSPECTION PLAN FOR ELECTRICAL BURIED NETWORKS
INSPECTION SCHEME
Form 1 : Control of Execution of Trenches
Form 2 : Control of Implementation of Cables without Ducts
Form 3 : Control of Implementation of Cables with Ducts
Version 00 2/10
1. SCOPE
This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for PV electrical buried
networks . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- the execution of the trenches
- the implementation of cables without ducts
- the implementation of cables with ducts
The minimum requirements specified in this documents will be taken into account by H.A.C when
elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).
In any case,the minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under the
responsibility of H.A.C as part of its activities.
All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of
EMPLOYER's representative.
3. INSPECTION PLAN
3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls
Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.
Version 00 3/11
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The activities
however may proceed.
Version 00 4/11
3.2. Control forms
Control forms are provided as standard template and could be used by H.A CONSTRUCTION as a base
to elaborate the inspection Checklists
All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C and the EMPLOYER.
Version 00 5/11
INSPECTION SCHEME
Layout of trenches W x x
Execution of trenches
Form 1
Geometry of trenches W x x
Conformity of cables H x x
Implementation of
cable without ducts
Form 2 Laying the cables in the trench H x x
Implementation of
cables with ducts Layout of cables H x x
Form 3
Version 00 6/10
Form 1 - Execution of trenches
Project name :
Layout of trenches
Version 00 7/11
H.A. CONSTRUCTION
EMPLOYER
Version 00 8/11
Form 2 - Implementation of cables without ducts
Project name :
Conformity of cables
Version 00 9/10
Backfilling of the trenches
H.A. CONSTRUCTION
EMPLOYER
Version 00 10/10
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-006
INSPECTION PLAN FOR ROADS AND PLATFORM CONSTRUCTION WORKS
Version: 01 1/1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SCOPE
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3. INSPECTION PLAN
Roads
Form 1 - Assessment of documentation before start of works
Form 2 - Execution of roads earthworks
Form 3 - Execution of road layers : Subgrade / Structure layer / finishing layer
Form 4 - Control for acceptance of road works
Form 5 - Surface water drainage works
Platforms
Form 10 - Execution mounting platforms earthworks
Form 11 - Execution of platform layers : subgrade layer /structure layer / finishing layer
Form 12 - Control for acceptance of road works
Version: 01 1/1
1. SCOPE
This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for roads and platforms
construction works . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- the documentation
- the earthworks
- the subgrade layer
- the foundation (or base) layers
- the top layer
- Road drainage works
The minimum requirements specified in this documents must be taken into account by H.A.
CONSTRUCTION when elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).
In any case, Employer's minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under
the responsibility of H.A.C as part of its activities.
All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of the
Employer representative or any other Third party assigned by H.A.C/EMPLOYER.
3. INSPECTION PLAN
3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls
Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.
Version: 01 1/2
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The
activities however may proceed.
All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C. and the EMPLOYER's Representative in
charge of the work.
Version: 01 2/2
INSPECTION SCHEME
Execution of road
layers : subgrade /
structure layers Check conformity of materials for
(base, foundation) / stabilization (where stabilization is W x
finishing layer required)
Form 3
Check means used on site are conform
to those specified in H.A.C's Quality W x
Assurance Plan
Version: 01 1/2
Domains / Activities Points of Control EMPLOYER (or
Hold point (H) /
H.A.C. appointed Third Party
Witness Point (W)
Representative)
Execution of platform
layers : subgrade / Check the conformity of materials for
structure layers stabilized layers (where stabilization is W x
(base, foundation) / required)
finishing layer
Form 11 Check means used on site are conform
to those specified in H.A.C's Quality W x
Assurance Plan
Version: 01 2/2
Form 1 : Assessment of Documentation before Start of Works
Project Name:
Owner /
Document Third Party
Type of Documents Issuer Version Engineer Observation
Reference Approval
Approval
Earthworks plane
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 1/1
Form 2 - Execution of Roads Earthworks
Project name :
Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works
Check transverse/longitudinal
Visual inspection
slope are conform to execution
Topographic survey
drawing
Version: 01 1/2
Check the top level of earthworks Visual inspection
is conform to execution drawing Topographic survey
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 2/2
Form 3 - Execution of road layers : Subgrade / Structure layer / finishing layer
Project name :
Layer designation :
Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"
Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Version: 01 1/3
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works
Version: 01 2/3
Check the bearing strength of the layer
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 3/3
Form 4 - Control for acceptance of road works
Projet name :
Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"
Result of Acceptance
Control points Méthods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check the geometrical carachteristics are conform to execution drawings
Gamma density
meter (if material size
Check the measured density of
D≤ 20 à 31,5mm)
compacted layers is conform to
compaction requirements
Penetrometer
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 1/1
Form 5 - Surface water drainage works
Projet name :
Version: 01 1/2
Installation of drains pipes
Check drains pipes are
conform to standard
Check de diameter of the
drain pipe is conform to
specified requirements
Check depth of laying the
drain pipe is according to
drawing
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 2/2
Form 11 - Execution mounting platforms earthworks
Project name :
Platform designation :
Status "For
Execution drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"
Result of Acceptance
Control points Méthods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check means provided by H.A.C to execute the works
Plate test ou
Check bearing strength of the
Dynamic plate
levelling course of earthworks
complies with project specifications
Deflectometer
Version: 01 1/2
Check geometric characteristics of road are compliant with specified requirements
Check the slope of cutting (or
Measurement
embankment) is conform to
Topographic survey
execution drawings
Check the dimensions (Width,
Length) is conform to execution
drawings
- Check transverse/longitudinal
Visual inspection
slope are conform to execution
Topographic survey
drawing
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 2/2
Form 11 - Execution of Platform Layers : Subgrade Layer /Structure Layer / Finishing Layer
Project name :
Platform designation :
Layer designation :
Status "For
Execution Drawings Issuer Document reference
Construction"
Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Version: 01 1/2
Check conformity of materials for stabilization (where stabilization is required)
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 2/2
Form 12 - Control for Acceptance of Road Works
Project name :
Platform Designation :
Result of Acceptance
Control points Methods of inspection C NC Observation
control criteria
Check the geometrical characteristics are conform to execution drawings
Check that the levelling of the Visual inspection
road surface is within specified Topographic survey
tolerances
Check that platform
dimensions (length, width) are Measurement
conform to drawings
Check that the altimetry of
platform surface is conform to Topographic survey
specified level
H.A.C.
EMPLOYER
Version: 01 1/1
HAC_QC_CIV_ITP-008
INSPECTION PLAN FOR PILES AND SHALOW FOUNDATIONS OF PV
STRUCTURES
Version 00
1. SCOPE
This framework of quality inspection plan gives the minimum requirements for PV Structure
Foundation . The scope includes but not limited to, the following:
- Documentation
- Piles installation work
- Concrete foundation work
The minimum requirements specified in this documents must be taken into account by the Contractor
when elaborating his Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan (QA/QC Plan).
In any case, Employer's minimum requirements do not replace the obligations of self controls under
the responsibility of H.A. CONSTRUCTION as part of its activities.
All works shall be subjected to control under the responsibility of H.A.C and the surveillance of the
Employer representative or any other Third party assigned by H.A.C / EMPLOYER.
3. INSPECTION PLAN
3. 1. Inspection scheme
The inspection scheme describes for each activity concerned by the quality control:
- the subject of control
- the purpose of control
- the witness point and Hold point
- the responsive of controls
Hold Point (H) : is a mandatory verification point beyond which a work cannot proceed without
approval by the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body. The work cannot
proceed until the Employer Representative or a Third party inspection body is able to verify the
quality of the completed work and releases the Hold by means of Inspection Request approval.
Version 00
Witness Point (W) : is an identified point in the process where the Employer representative or
third party inspection body may review, witness, inspect method or process of work. The
activities however may proceed.
All the inspection Checklists must be co-signed by H.A.C and the EMPLOYER's Rep. in charge of
the work.
Version 00
Form 101 - Piles foundation documents evaluation and approvals
Project name :
Approval
Issuer (name revision of Approval
Object of control ref. of document Owner's Comments
of the body) document Third party
Engineer
Procedures of execution of
piles
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 102 - Inspection of piles
Project name :
Check compliance of constructed piles with project specification and relevant standards (Hold Point)
verify pile vertical deviation
(direction North-South) is within
specified tolerance
verify pile vertical deviation (in
direction East-West) is within
specified tolerance
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 201 - Concrete foundations documents evalution and approvals
Project name :
Approval
Issuer (name revision of Approval
Object of control ref. of document Owner's Comments
of the body) document Third party
Engineer
Check documents of conformity of materials
Quality Assurance Plan of
concrete plant
Certificate of conformity of
concrete mix components
(Cement, sand, crushed
stone, water, additives)
Certificate of conformity of
concrete plant with
standards (if applicable)
Certificate of conformity of
steel reinforcements with
standards
Check Design and Execution documents
Calculation notes of
concrete foundation
Layout and formworks
drawings of foundation
Reinforcement drawings of
foundation
Procedures of execution of
works
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 202 - Concrete foundation earthworks inspection
Project name :
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 203 - Reinforcements installation inspection (Hold point)
Project name :
Check implementation of
reinforcement is conform to
drawings
- layout of bars
- length of bars
- diameter of bars
- number of bars
- spacement of bars
- overlaping of bars
- anchorage of bars
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 204 - Earthing inspection (Hold point)
Project name :
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 205 - Formworks installation inpection
Project name :
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 206 : Concrete pouring inspection
Project name :
Row n°:
Check the pouring process is compliant with H.A.C's Quality Assurance Plan
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
Form 207 - Completed works inspection
Project name :
Row n°:
H.A.C
EMPLOYER
Version 00
2018
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants,
Guinea Bissau
Project Quality Management
SIGNATURE
For Tender
PREPARED APPROVED
DATE REV. REVISION DETAILS CHECKED BY
BY BY
1. General .................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction: ............................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Purpose: ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 References: .............................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Associated Procedures .............................................................................................. 4
1.5 Project Description and Scope of Work ....................................................................... 4
1.6 Definitions: ............................................................................................................... 4
1.7 Quality policy............................................................................................................. 5
1.7.1 Specific Solar PV Construction Issues ......................................................................... 5
1.7.1.1 Civil .................................................................................................................. 5
1.7.1.2 Mechanical ....................................................................................................... 5
1.7.1.3 Electrical .......................................................................................................... 6
1.7.1.4 Grid Connection ................................................................................................ 6
1.7.1.5 Logistical .......................................................................................................... 6
1.8 Quality Objectives ...................................................................................................... 7
1.9 Responsibilities of Key Persons on Site ...................................................................... 8
2. Project Quality Control System ..................................................................................................15
2.1. General ...................................................................................................................15
2.2. Document and Data Control ......................................................................................16
2.3. Purchasing...............................................................................................................16
2.4. Inspection and Testing..............................................................................................16
2.5. Control of Non-Conforming Products ..........................................................................17
2.6. Material Control .......................................................................................................17
2.7. Control of Quality Records.........................................................................................17
2.8. Internal Quality Audits...............................................................................................17
2.9. Reporting .................................................................................................................18
It defines not only the process to assure the expected quality level, but also what should be done and
who should be responsible to control and track the pertinent corrections.
Even though the Plan states the main goals and some mechanisms to assure the quality, Consultants,
Suppliers and Contractors should exert the quality control according to their own policies, but
following this Plan and ensuring its achievement successfully, as a minimum, the quality goals the
client has stated.
The Quality Control Program is divided into narrative and associated Procedures
1.2 Purpose:
The Purpose of this document is to ensure that the requirements of the Control in relation to the
Quality Control are met and that the Contractor Quality Control System is planned, documented,
understood and implemented by project personnel.
1.3 References:
• Project Technical Specification
• EPC Term Sheet: “Quality Assurance, Inspection Commissioning and Commissioning Testing”
• ISO 9001:2015
The 20 MW Solar power plant with 500 meter transmission line is located in Mafanco 157 km
from the capital Bissau
Each Manager, Supervisor or Superintendent, provided he is qualified, may perform the tasks and
assume the responsibility of those who report directly to him.
Site Engineer
Reports to the Construction Manager and is responsible for the following:
The Site Engineer supervises the activities of the Supervisors, Foremen and crew leaders and is
responsible for:
• Ensure that all information on drawings is conveyed to his subordinates in a proper manner
and details produced where required.
• Achieve the quality of work required by the specifications by proper supervision of work.
• As each activity is completed, mark up the ‘For Construction’ drawing with comments
relevant
• Preparation of the Method statements.
• Preparation of the Inspection Requests (IR’s) and submit it to the QC Dept.
• Ensure review to the ‘red-line’ drawings by H.A.C QC Engineer.
• Full awareness and implementation of project ITP’s.
• Awareness and effective handling of Client Complaints (internal and external).
• Review and action as required on internal audit reports.
• Verify and ensure measuring and monitoring equipment are calibrated and well maintained.
• Co-ordinate with the QC staff to carry out inspections.
• Awareness and related actions in case of incidents/Accidents and Near Miss.
• Prepare day work details, data related to subcontractor payment and preparation of client
payment valuation details.
Planning Engineer
Reports to the technical manager and is responsible for the following:
• The assigned planning Engineer for a project will be responsible for:
• Preparing the Project Master Plan (PMP)
• Updating and reviewing of the PMP
• Identifying areas of concern /delays
• Preparing monthly cash flow
• Initiating Procurement schedule
• Initiating Engineering schedules
• Preparing bi-weekly/ monthly progress reports submitted to the EMPLOYER.
• Preparing manpower/ equipment requirements over the project's duration.
• Co-ordinate with site Engineers, procurement Engineer, cost control Engineer and quantity
surveyor in order to obtain a sound and a workable schedule.
• Attending weekly site meetings with client, main contractor and project construction
management.
Level 1 This Project Quality Plan (PQP) and Project Quality Management Procedures
(QMP’s) which specify the Management activities, responsibilities, quality
standards and provide instructions necessary to meet the specified quality
requirements of the Contract. (Prepared by Quality Department)
Level 2 Construction quality control documentation such as and Inspection & Test
Plans (ITP’s) which specify activities, responsibilities, specifications /
standards and instructions necessary to meet the detailed specified quality
requirements of the Contract. (Prepared by Quality Department)
2. The project quality philosophy and system of CONTRACTOR embraces the activities of
its suppliers and subcontractors who are required to conform either to their own existing
quality control system or to defined CONTRACTOR procedures to ensure compliance to
project specifications. Where there is a difference between their own and the
CONTRACTOR procedure the latter shall rule.
2.3. Purchasing
2.3.1. Quality Requirements shall be clearly specified in all purchase orders or sub-
contract agreements.
2.3.2. All purchase orders for permanent materials and quality related supplies such
as laboratory equipment, and sub-contract agreements shall be reviewed by
Project QC Manager.
2.7.2 Originals of Quality Records shall be maintained by the project quality Department who
shall be responsible for filing, indexing in a manner, which facilitates safekeeping and
easy retrieve.
2.7.3 Indexing system, format, number of copies, etc. of handover package and handover
procedure shall be reviewed and agreed with the Consultant at an early stage of the
Project.
2.7.4 Quality records shall normally be kept for a minimum of one year from date of final
handover of Project to the Consultant unless otherwise specified in the Contract. Hard
copies shall be stored in weatherproof room or container, fire protected and
environmentally controlled if necessary. Contents shall be indexed. Soft copies will be
stored, if required, on compact disks (CD) held in the respective Subcontractor Head
Office.
QMP-245-001
Rev. Date Revision Details
For Tender
1. SCOPE
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
7. ATTACHMENTS
This procedure applies to all H.A.C and its Supplier’s and Subcontractor’s scope as defined by
the Contract for (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau
2. PURPOSE
- To ensure that the inspection and test status of all permanent materials and works are
controlled in accordance with the Project specification requirements and known at all
stages in the construction process, i.e. has item been inspected? Was it conforming?
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5.1 The QC Manager is responsible for ensuring that the inspection system is set up in
accordance with the Contract requirements and for monitoring the system’s compliance
to these requirements. He is also responsible for training and updating this procedure
when required.
5.2 The QC Manager is responsible for managing the inspection program for reviewing and
approving Site generated revisions of ITP’s and QCP’s prior to start of work and for
approving ITP’s as completed and conforming after work is complete.
5.3 The respective Discipline QC Inspector is responsible for revising or updating ITP’s if
required, organizing inspections, informing the Client’s representatives of upcoming
inspections (as required), carrying out inspections as indicated in the ITP, and for
approving and signing off competed inspection forms.
5.4 QC Inspector is responsible for carrying out inspection as indicated on the ITP.
6. PROCEDURE
6.1.1 The project QCD will obtain inspection requirements from specifications, drawings
and where applicable Method Statements to produce Inspection and Test Plans
(ITP’s).
6.1.2 ITP’s will list the quality related activities to be conducted, reference documents to
be used all characteristics to be briefed, acceptance criteria and the verifying
document on which to record the activity. It will further indicate the persons/ parties
to be present for witness/ percentage sampling etc.
6.1.3 ITPs are controlled documents (see QMP-245-002) and shall be coded as shown in
PQP-0XX. The draft document for submission to the Client shall be Revision 0.
Thereafter, revisions shall be numerical. The document shall be revised to the next
revision number whenever a change is made: this includes changes to any form
attached.
S Surveillance: Define sampling basis if applicable (e.g. x% random once per time
interval).
W Witness- obligatory attendance but if no show work will proceed
H Hold mandatory Hold point – work shall not proceed until item is in
conformance or corrective action has been agreed.
R Document Review (applicable to Third Party Inspections)
6.1.6 All ITP’s shall be sent to the discipline Construction Superintendents for review and
comment.
a) All inspection/ tests are carried out and recorded on appropriate forms with all
relevant details.
b) All required personnel have signed and dated the verifying document attached
to the relevant ITP.
d) At the end of the job checking that a) to c) have been carried out and signed off
confirming the ITP as completed.
6.2.2 Twenty-four hours prior to each inspection or as otherwise agreed with the
Consultant, discipline QCM shall advise the Consultant’s representative in writing of
the upcoming inspection using Application for Inspection Form.
6.2.3 Inspections shall take place at the points defined on the ITP and shall be attended
and/or witnessed as indicated. Discipline QCE shall sign where indicated.
6.2.4 If the item is non- –conforming, a non-conformance report (NCR) shall be raised see
QCP-245-004.
6.2.5 When all inspections designated on the ITP have been completed and are in
conformance, and all H.A.C signature boxes on the Inspection Forms have been
signed the Discipline QCE pass it to the QC document clerk for filing.
6.3.1 QCP’s – Quality Control Procedures-are prepared for the work packages within
each discipline, as required. QCP’s identify inspection and test requirements given
in the specifications and describe responsibilities, inspection and test procedure.
QCP’s are complementary to ITP’s and are issued as and when required as per the
H.A.C Quality Control System.
6.3.2 QCP’s are prepared, approved and issued as for ITP’s, see section 6.1.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-001 Page 5 of 7
Inspection and Testing
6.4 Inspection at Suppliers and Subcontractors
6.5.2 The laboratory shall work to its own Quality Procedures concerning use,
maintenance and calibration of equipment in accordance with the Project
Specifications.
6.5.3 The test responsibilities shall be defined in the applicable ITP’s and QCP’s.
6.5.4 All test reports specified in the ITP and complied by the Laboratory shall be
transmitted to H.A.C
6.6.1 Specific receiving procedure for incoming materials is given in QMP-0XX-003. Where
applicable receiving inspection requirements are detailed in the first item of the on
–site ITP for the work into which the product or material is to be incorporated. The
calibration status of inspection, measuring, and testing equipment shall be checked
upon received at Site. Status of which shall be recorded as per the attached form
6.7.1 Inspection Forms shall be filled in as the job proceeds. Entries and attachment of
reports shall not be left till later. Sign off and submission to Consultant shall follow
immediately after completion of each package of work.
6.7.2 The QC Document Clerk shall classify, store and maintain quality records while they
are current. Thereafter, they shall be handed over to Document Control Group for
storage as quality records.
6.7.3 An indexing system for quality records shall be developed and documents shall be
filed according to this system. Files shall be kept in a secure place, with controlled
access, protected from the environment and with fire protection. See QMP-0XX-002.
6.8.1 The QC Manager shall develop and maintain a list of QCP’s and ITP’s to be produced
for the Project, shall schedule their issue date and shall arrange for their
production.
6.9.1 The inspection and test status of materials, fabrication items, and installations shall
be identified where necessary and practical to facilitate all personnel involved in the
installation / fabrication process.
6.9.2 The responsibility of the extent and type of identification markings lies with the
QCM. He will ensure that whichever approach is used is clearly explained to all
construction supervisors. Identification markings may include status indicators such
as color-coding, tags, and markings on the item with markers or paint, stamps etc.
6.9.3 Discipline QCE is responsible for ensuring that all permanent works have been
inspected, that inspection is recorded and that all non-conformances are closed out
before handover.
7. ATTACHMENTS
3. MECHANICAL MECH.
Page 1 of 1
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
QMP-245-002
Rev. Date Revision Details
For Approval
1. SCOPE
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
All project documents require controlled distribution. The procedure must include all documents
related to the engineering, procurement and construction, completion and maintenance of all
the components of (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau
2. PURPOSE
- To ensure that approved, valid and up to date copies of all necessary documents are
distributed to project staff concerned.
- To ensure that documents are securely filed and maintained, are easily retrievable and
can be readily compiled into the hand-over package and archives at the end of the
project.
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
• Provides the DCG with the relevant contractual periods of replies by the CM for the
submitted documents by H.A.C in order to monitor the status of these documents
throughout the DCG Biweekly report.
6. PROCEDURE
6.1.2 The receiver of incoming documents – if not DCG – shall immediately hand them
over to DCG.
6.1.3 If possible, DCG shall insist that documents from outside companies be sent
under transmittal note. This requirement shall be imposed on suppliers.
6.1.4 Receipt of transmittals will be acknowledged by the Document Controller.
6.1.5 The contents of the package received will be checked against the transmittal list
and any discrepancies to be reported with the acknowledgment.
6.1.6 The transmittal received with incoming documentation will be filed in an “Incoming
Transmittals” file, which will be divided into sections reflecting the originators of
the transmittals.
6.1.7 Upon receipt of documents from outside or from within H.A.C DCG shall:
• Stamp the document ‘SITE MASTER’ in red and enter the date.
• Document number
• Document title
• Revision number
• Identification of sender
• Date received
• Status of document (i.e. whether for information, for review, IFC, etc.)
6.1.9 The Register will be issued weekly to project department’s managers to advise
them of the current revision status of documents that concern their work.
Managers are to advise DCG if any of the data is incorrect.
6.2.2 Document controller shall distribute the draft matrix for comment to all project
department heads.
6.2.3 The document controller, after agreement with all departmental heads on the
number of controlled copies required by each one of them, will distribute the
appropriate number of controlled copies to all the departmental managers
accordingly.
6.2.4 All controlled copies shall be numbered, and the number allocated to each
addressee shall be marked on the distribution matrix.
a) Documents generated within H.A.C and circulated for internal review. Normally this
is undertaken by the originator using an interdisciplinary check (IDC) system and is
not a DCG function.
6.3.2 Subsequent revisions of all controlled distribution documents shall be sent to the
same addresses as the previous revision.
6.3.3 All documents shall be issued under a transmittal and receipt acknowledgement
a) Check that the transmittal is complete and correct as listed on the transmittal and
refer all anomalies back to the DCG.
6.3.5 DCG shall report to the Technical Manager for appropriate corrective action any
cases of recipient consistently or willfully failing to return the signed transmittal.
6.3.6 All requests for additional copies of controlled distribution documents must be
made in writing to DCG. Requests should be limited to exceptional circumstances
because of the difficulty of tracing and keeping up-to-date copies that are
additional to the distribution matrix.
6.4. Filing
6.4.1 Document Controller shall define and document a filing system to enable rapid
accessing of all documents under his responsibility.
6.4.2 Master documents shall be kept in the DCG office, shall be copied by DCG
personnel and shall not be removed from DCG.
6.4.3 Superseded copies of all documents will be stamped ‘SUPERSEDED’ in red and
filed separately.
6.4.4 One copy of each superseded revision of each document will be retained in the
DCG offices.
6.4.5 All cupboards, drawer's files, stick files, box files etc…, will be clearly marked to
show their contents.
6.4.6 Access to files shall be strictly controlled by DCG. Loan of master documents to
project staff is prohibited. Loan of any other document shall be limited to a strict
minimum and controlled by a sign-out register.
6.5.3 The Technical Manager or Document Controller shall inform subcontractors about
coding requirements so that the documents they produce fit into the project
document control system without re-coding.
6.7.2 Copies of vendor data books and certificates for material supplied by the
Project Manager / Engineer shall be kept by DCG.
6.7.3 The project shall specify at the outset which other purchasing / subcontract
documents – if any – will be kept by DCG.
6.9.2 Document Controller is responsible for obtaining these codes and standards,
either directly from a supplier or via H.A.C Head Office
6.9.3 Details of all codes and standards held in the library will be entered on a database
list.
6.9.4 DCG are responsible for controlling loans of codes and standards to project staff
by a sign-out register or similar.
6.11.3 Documents shall be packed in robust and secured boxes clearly marked with
contract number and contents.
6.11.5 Each box will be individually numbered consecutively, and an index compiled by
the Document Controller.
7.1 Correspondence
7.1.2 All correspondence must be, numbered as follows -00001 (first letter with
increasing sequence number for all following letters)
7.1.3 Correspondence may be transmitted by hard copy and/or facsimile. Emails used to
transmit scanned copies of signed and properly numbered- project correspondence
must follow.
H. A. CONSTRUCTION
Yehia Zakaria St. Lot 5,
Sheraton Heliopolis Housing, Cairo, Egypt.
Attention: Project Manager
7.2.3 Transmittals shall be submitted by hard copy. Emails can be used to transmit
scanned copies of signed and properly numbered project Transmittals. For the
purpose of meeting the contractual dates, transmittal by email is acceptable
provided proper receipt by CONSULTANT is confirmed and Hard copies of the
transmittals are received no later than 5 days from email receipt. For details about
email usage refer to item 7.3.
7.2.4 The transmittal cover sheet shall note Contractor's transmittal no. to which the
transmittal is in response. For the purpose of meeting review period by the
CONSULTANT, transmittal by email is acceptable provided proper receipt by
Contractor is confirmed and Hard copies of the transmittals are received no later
than 5 days from email receipt. For details about email usage see Item 7.3 entitled
"Document Transmission via Email".
7.3.1 E-mails may be used to transmit scanned copies of signed and properly numbered
Project Correspondence and Transmittals; however, hard copies via regular mail
must also follow.
7.3.2 Emails may be used to expedite, clarify, or enhance information already contained
in official project documents (i.e. correspondence, drawings, etc.). Under no
circumstance shall emails override or circumvent hard copy communication.
7.3.3 Emails may not be used to originate new requirements, change scope of work,
make commitments, submit invoices, or alter any portion of the Contract.
7.3.4 All emails must be addressed one of the following personnel and copied to all the
others:
Title Name
(email Address)
1
7.4.2 Invoices should be submitted via a letter numbered and transmitted as per item 7.1
above. However, original invoices should be submitted to CONTRACTOR. The invoice
review period will start from the date of receipt by CONTRACTOR of original invoices.
▪ Contract No.
▪ Invoice No., date and amount. Contractor may use its own numbering system for
invoices.
▪ Mode of payment and banking instructions
▪ Relevant section of contract.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-002 Page 9 of 9
Document and Data Control Rev. 0
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
Documents Distribution Matrix
Document
Construction
Construction
Instruction
Work Site
Statement
Prequalif.
Drawings
Variation
Schedule
Method
Invoice
Report
MOM
(WSI)
Department
Order
MAR
Daily
QMP
Shop
NCR
MIR
PQP
RFI
ITP
JSI
Site Manager
Technical Office Mgr.
QC Mgr.
Planning
Cost Control
Quantity Survey
Surveying
Ware house
IT
Personnel
Accounting
Total
Legend
RFI: Request For Information MIR: Material Inspection Request QMP: Quality Management Procedure
NCR: Non Conformance Report MOM: Minutes of Meeting PQP: Project Quality Plan
MAR: Material Approval Request ITP: Inspection and Test Plan JSI: Job Site Instruction
Approved by
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
QMP-245-003
Rev. Date Revision Details
For Approval
1. SCOPE
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
7. ATTACHMENTS
This document defines the overall system for receipt, identification and inspection of
material to be incorporated into the permanent works for the project. In addition,
storage, handling, preservation, issue and control requirements are defined.
2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to define the mechanism for receipt and verification of
material, as well as storage, handling, preservation, issue and control requirements that
will be used within this project.
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5.1 The Procurement Manager is responsible for the operation of the material
department
5.2 The Storekeeper is responsible for the operations within the respective warehouse/
stores area and to implement the guidelines defined by this procedure.
5.3 He receives the material, checks it against the shipping documents and PO
requirements. He shall initiate the MIRs Reports as applicable and submits it to the
QC Department.
5.4 The QCE is responsible for inspection of the received materials against the approved
MAR, condition and expiry dates, review the adequacy of the shipment supporting
Documents (e.g. mill certificate) if any.
6. PROCEDURE
6.1.1 All Project materials to be incorporated into the permanent works will be
inspected and verified upon receipt at the job site. The Senior Storekeeper
will check the quantities and applicable physical and technical requirements.
On receipt of the Delivery note, the Senior Storekeeper shall check that the
material, certification or release note, as applicable, relating to the specific
P.O. is available. If not, a nonconformance will be issued in accordance with
QMP-245-004.
All material arriving at the Stores Area or job site shall be inspected by the
Storekeeper for the following:
- Transit Damage.
- Expiry date.
- Supplier applied preservation.
- Quantity against shipping documents and PO data.
- Availability of release note/ mill certificate.
Upon receipt of material at Stores area, packing shall be removed only so
far as to enable detailed checking for damage and verification of quantity
and quality. Upon completion of checking the packing should be carefully
replaced in order to maintain material preservation. Materials shall be
preserved as per the Vendor Supplier instructions.
Care shall always be taken when opening cases boxes not to damage any
of the contents.
In the event of drummed material being delivered, the drums shall not be
opened unless there is apparent damage to the drums or their seals.
However, spot checks shall be made to the extent possible. The extent of
checking performed shall be described on the MIR.
Items must be checked to ensure that they are correctly tag marked, and/
or color coded in accordance with the PO, and its attendant requirement.
The detailed check against the shipping documents shall be carried out as
soon as possible, certainly within three working days of the delivery.
Vendors shall be required under the terms of the Purchase Order, to provide
details of any special requirements including precautions to be taken during
off-loading and subsequent handling.
6.3.1 Storage areas shall be safe and tidy and all stored material shall be readily
identifiable.
6.3.3 All areas where material is held pending use shall, wherever possible, be
restricted and access limited solely to authorized personnel.
6.3.4 Upon receipt of material but after completion of detailed checking against
the criteria of the purchase order and its attendant specifications, the
material will be moved from the “Reception Area” to one of the approved
storage area classifications.
The main stores location shall be detailed in HAC plan for auxiliary site
facilities.
6.3.7 Separate area for drums of chemicals shall be established with the
appropriate flash point warning signs displayed.
6.3.8 “No Smoking” signs and appropriate fire extinguishers shall be on site in
consultation with the Safety Officer.
6.4
A. for Materials:
When a purchase order has an attendant specification for material that
requires controlled temperature storage, it shall be stored in a warehouse
equipped with an air-conditioned facility.
B. For Equipment:
The equipment will be preserved at the duration between receiving on site
till erection in fits final place according to the Manufacturer
recommendations stated in its O&M Manual.
6.5.1 The Field Warehouse Requisition (FWR) shall be used to request material
from the Warehouse.
6.5.2 The FWR shall also be used as a form for returning material from the site to
the Warehouse as denoted and instructed on the form.
6.5.4 The Storekeeper shall check each FWR against his stock records and identify
any material shortages.
6.5.5 The Storekeeper will place a “Hold” on each FWR for which material
deficiencies are identified and the storekeeper shall be responsible for
ensuring that no materials are issued against that FWR until the Hold is
released.
6.6.1 The Stock Record Card (SRC) shall be used for all material movement. The
SRC shall indicate the following information:
6.6.2 Material issues and returns shall be recorded on the SRC together with the
document number on which they were issued.
7. ATTACHEMENTS
3
H.A.C Store Keeper: …………………………………………………
Inspection Report
Yes/No STATUS
1- Conforms to approved MAR? …………………….
2- Details given above correct ? ……………………. A. Approved
3- Expiry Date still due? ……………………. B. Approved with comments
4- Physical damage ? ……………………. C. Rejected
5- Accessories / Spare parts included ? (if any) …………………….
Remarks :
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
H.A.C QC Eng. Name: ………………………………………………… Sig. SS Name ……………………………………………. Sig.:
The above material has been inspected upon arrival on site and found to be :
SATISFACTORY / UNSATISFACTORY
FOR INCORPORATION IN THE PERMANENT WORKS AND/OR FOR PAYMENT AS MATERIAL ON SITE
(1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants
Guinea Bissau
QMP-245-004
For Approval
1. SCOPE
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
7. ATTACHMENTS
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5.1 The Project Quality Manager is responsible for maintaining and updating this
procedure.
5.2. The Project Quality Manager is responsible for operating the nonconformance
system.
5.3 It is the responsibility of every one to report to their supervisor any deficiencies /
discrepancies that are observed.
6. PROCEDURE
6.1 General
6.1.1 Where material or a component fails to meet the specified acceptance criteria
due to a material deficiency or faulty workmanship or insufficient QC
documentation, such circumstances constitute nonconformance and the
material, piece or item of equipment is described as non-conforming product.
The vehicle for recording and disposing of non-conforming product shall be the
Non-Conformance Report (NCR), see attachment 7.1
6.2.1 The Project QA Manager shall complete the requirements of section 1 of the
Non-Conformance Report form, upon advisement by discipline QC Inspectors
of identified non-conformances.
6.2.2 The Project Quality Manager shall complete the remaining requirements of
section 1, and register/file the NCR after forwarding the original to the
discipline manager or superintendent as applicable. However, if the
nonconformance is proved non-valid or already actioned the NCR shall be
filed but not issued.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-000-004 Page 4 of 6
Non – Conformance Handling Rev. 0
6.2.3 Section 2 shall be completed by the discipline manager or superintendent,
as applicable, who shall consider specification, fitness for purpose and
schedule requirements when deciding the disposition of the
nonconformance.
6.2.5 Section 4 QCM for his review and acceptance. Rejection of the proposed
disposition will result in return of the NCR (rejected) with a further copy for
re-definition of proposed disposition.
6.2.6 Acceptance of the proposed disposition will result in return of the NCR
(accepted) to the discipline Manager or superintendent, as applicable, for
endorsement of completed action whilst
6.2.7 Section 5, once correction has been implemented and endorsed by the
discipline Manager or superintendent, the NCR to be returned to the QCD for
verification.
6.2.8 Section 6, the Project QC Engineer shall review (in the field) the action taken
and the documentation produced and report on its acceptability.
6.2.9 The verified / closed-out NCR shall be sent to the consultant for information.
6.2.10 The Project Quality Manager shall track all NCR’s, monitor the proposed
close out dates and follow up overdue actions.
7. ATTACHMENTS
DATE:
SIGNATURE: DATE:
(6) VERIFICATION:
QMP-245-005
Rev. Date Revision Details
For Approval
1. SCOPE
2. PURPOSE
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
7. RECORDS
8. ATTACHMENTS
3. REFERENCES
PQP-245 Project Quality Plan.
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1 The QC Manager is responsible for the preparation of this project procedure, its
amendment and controlled distribution.
5.2 The Corporate Quality Manager is responsible for H.A.C’s internal audit schedule and for
undertaking internal audits according to the schedule. Individual audits are assigned to
members of the Corporate Quality Department. On a case-by-case basis, unless there is
a resident auditor on a project, when audits are his responsibility unless otherwise
advised.
6. PROCEDURE
6.1 General
6.1.1 The management system encompasses the entire core activities related to
construction and documentation.
6.1.2 The function of the Corporate Quality Department is to develop and maintain a
documented management system suitable for the H.A.C’s business.
6.1.3 The Corporate Quality Manager is responsible for the Corporate Quality Department
and is assisted by Quality Engineers. The role of the Quality Control Manager is
summarized below.
• To assist office and project staff to implement the quality-related elements of the
management system.
• To assist in the development and improvement of the management system.
• To perform internal audits of the system.
• To approve suppliers and subcontractors.
• Responsible for preparation of all records required for the project
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE QMP-245-005 Page 3 of 6
QUALITY AUDIT Rev. 0
• Responsible for checking the material received and compare to the related material
approval request.
• Responsible to co-ordinate with site engineer for work inspections.
• Responsible to ensure that each activity is inspected & document release prior to
start next related activity.
• Ensure that the inspection is done with approved documents.
6.1.4 Internal audits are performed throughout H.A.C’s operations against the
documentation applicable to the area under audit to verify that the management
system is being implemented and to identify opportunities for improvement. A
suitably qualified auditor outside of the department audits the Corporate Quality
Department.
7. RECORDS
7.1 The Corporate Quality Manager shall maintain a complete archive of internal audit
reports (including the notification and scope), Corrective Action Requests, the
annual performance report and any special performance reports for a minimum of
five years, following which he shall decide the disposition.
7.2 Departmental heads shall retain copies of audit reports for a period of five years,
after which they may be discarded.
8. ATTACHMENTS
STANDARD FORMS
Form Title Reference Rev. Pages
Notification of an Internal Audit FM-245-0051 0 1
Scope of an Internal Audit FM-245-0052 0 1
Internal Audit Report FM-245-0053 0 1
Audit Plan
Documentation Summary
Document Ref. Title
Outline of Scope
Additional Information
Prepared by Date
Sheet of
Form No.: FM-245-0052 Rev.0
1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV)
Power Plants, Guinea Bissau
Internal Audit Report
Audit Ref. Location
Auditor Date of Audit
Work Area Manager
Area of Audit
Summary of Audit
Report closed on by
QMP-245-006
Rev. Date Revision Details
This procedure applies to all H.A.C and its Supplier’s and Subcontractor’s scope
as defined by the Contract of the project.
2. PURPOSE:
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6 PROCEDURE
7 ATTACHMENTS
10
11
12
13
14
15
QMP-245-007
Rev. Date Revision Details
0 Client comment incorporation
This procedure applies to H.A.C and its Supplier’s scope as defined by the Contract of
the (1x30 + 1x20) MWAC PV Power Plants in Guinea Bissau
2. PURPOSE
To nominate best suppliers to supply the items, materials and equipment in addition to
evaluate those suppliers periodically.
3. REFERENCES
4. DEFINITIONS
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
6. PROCEDURE
Record
Commercial Manager In Phone Types Of Supplies Offered By
S. Company Address Fax No. Registration Remarks
Name Of Co. Charge No The Supplier
Date.
Purchase manager
Supply Period Score= Required Supply Period/ Actual Supply Period x 20 ( Not Exceeding 20 )
Supplies’ Quality Score = Accepted Supplies’ Quality/ Actual Supplied Quality x 30 (Not Exceeding 30)
Price Level Score= (Least Price of Most Important Items/ Actual Price of Most Important Items) x 20 (Not Exceeding 20)
Transportation Cost Score= Least Price of Transporting The Unit/ Actual Price of Transporting The Unit x 10 ( Not Exceeding 10)
Prepared by /
Purchase Officer
QMP-245-008
Rev. Date Revision Details
0 For Tender
1.2 This Procedure must be read in conjunction with the relevant Project Contract Specifications.
1.3 This procedure is applicable to the Contractor/Subcontractors scope of work at the project.
2. PURPOSE
2.1 The purpose of this procedure is to ensure that all activities pertinent to the inspection of finished
works are completed as per specified requirements and are carried out in a systematic manner. A
brief illustration of overall handover process is shown per Chart-01; Handover Process Flow Chart
(attached).
2.2 Works at the Project can be handed over to the Employer’s only when all the scope of works had
been accepted by the ENGINEER.
3. REFERENCES
PQP-245 Project Quality Plan
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
Complete the Unfinished Works, sign off the items on the list including
clearance of all related RFI's, MIR's and NCR's '. Submit to Contractor
QA/QC Department
Contractor Construction Team
Go to
Stage 2 – External Snagging
No
All snags cleared?
Yes
Forward the Handover form attaching the signed Pre-Handover snag list
to the CSC/Engineer Inspection for approval
Contractor QA/QC
No
All snags cleared?
Yes
Forward the Discipline Handover form signed-off by The CSC/Engineer
to the Handover Coordinator with all supporting documents
Contractor QA/QC Department
Go to
Stage 3 – Final Handover
QA / QC Handover Coordinator
Contractor, The CSC/Engineer will confirm the clearance and acceptance on the Di
Handover form
QA / QC Handover Coordinator
Submit the cleared signed-off Final Handover Binder with all attachments to CSC/Engineer for final
acceptance & approval
QA / QC Handover Coordinator
End
• The initial stage of defining completion scope is to identify the physical limit / content of the area
under consideration. This is usually a complete structure or a part of the project with a specific
function.
• Drawings will be developed to show all the area details with all boundaries marked with
distinctive colors, indexed and supported by an Excel matrix, e.g.:-
• The area to be inspected shall be identified by the nearest grid lines the identification of areas will
be by grid lines. Key plan with hatching to show the exact area limits.
Note:
• When the area boundaries are not finally set, these can be adjusted to meet site requirements.
• Contractor QA/QC Team (Civil/Architectural/MEP/Steel) shall each ensure that all RFI's and MIR's
have been completed and signed-off in accordance with the approved ITP's and contract
specifications for each area.
• Contractor QA/QC Team shall ensure that all NCRs are completed and closed out.
• Contractor Construction Team shall ensure that areas are thoroughly cleaned for inspection.
• Contractor Construction Team shall ensure that areas for inspection are according to
specifications and the area is fit for purpose.
6.6 Snagging
• Contractor Construction Team is required to carry out their Incomplete and Outstanding Works
List and ensure that all have been completed and signed off in accordance with approved
drawings, Remedial Works …etc.
• Contractor QA/QC Team shall carry out detailed inspection of each area to be handed over and
shall review and sign-off the pre-handover inspection checklist before offering to The ENGINEER
for Inspection.
• Contractor QA/QC Team will then request The ENGINEER for each discipline to carry out their
external Snagging.
• Contractor QA/QC Team will monitor close out and sign off The ENGINEER snags by liaising with
Contractor Construction Team.
• Contractor QA/QC Team will arrange for final Handover inspection by the ENGINEER.
• The Contractor Construction Team shall resolve all outstanding snags and advise the relevant
Senior QC Engineer.
• If the resolution is accepted by the Senior QC Engineer, a color copy of the original Discipline
Inspection Form will be used to obtain The ENGINEER sign-off (the original documents should not
be removed from the Handover Document files).
• The signed Final Handover Form will then be transmitted to the OWNER via EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE for final acceptance.
6.8 Binders
• The finished works Final Handover binders are compiled from traceable, signed-off
documentation provided by the QA/QC Handover Documentation Team. Each binder is scanned
into PDF file format and uploaded into the relevant Folder.
• The respective handover binders of data are delivered to the QA/QC Handover Documentation
Team for safekeeping.
1. Location Plan - This identifies the physical location of the specific item of finished work
within the project.
2. Final Handover Form (QMP-245-018-12): together with signed-off copies of the Civil,
Internal finishing, External Finishing, Landscaping, Steel Structure, and MEP Inspection
Forms, each listing outstanding snags (and anticipated dates of resolution of those
snags).
3. Discipline Inspection Handover Form (FM-245-008-01) including: -
▪ Discipline MIR’s Register - lists the Civil Material Inspection Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline RFIs Register - lists the Civil Work Inspection Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline NCR’s Register - lists the Civil Non-Conformance Reports relevant to the
finished work.
▪ Discipline Deficiency Register – lists the Structural defects observed on site (on a
daily basis) and any actions taken to rectify those defects.
7) Spare parts and materials extra stock registers & Asset Register.
• Once a binder has been compiled (including lists of accepted outstanding snags), The ENGINEER
is notified through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE of the availability of the binder for review; the
binder is retained in the offices of the QA/QC Handover Documentation Team.
• When all the packages applicable to the finished work have been fully signed-off, the Contractor
shall submit the Compiled Documents through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for EMPLOYER’S
Approval.
• All forms will be scanned by Contractor to Electronic files after final acceptance from The
ENGINEER through EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
7. ATTACHMENTS
7.1 FM-245-008-001 Discipline Handing Over Form.
7.2 FM-245-008-002 Buildings Internal Finishing Pre-Handover Snag list
7.3 FM-245-008-003 Final Handover Form
ITEMS QC ENGINEER
QC
Engineer
Owner
SR QC ACCEPTANCE BY THE
NO. DESCRIPTION PRIORITY ENGINEER CSC/ENGINEER
SIGNATURE YES/NO/NA SIGNATURE
COMMENTS / OUTSTANDING: -
JV QC
CSC /Engineer
Owner
Priorities (1) Before Testing and Commissioning (2) After Testing and Commissioning (3) After Operation
FOR FOR
ITEMS STATUS A/B
CONTRACTOR THE CSC/ ENGINEER
This is to certify that the above subject area has been inspected and found acceptable for
Final Handing Over for immediate Use on ___/___/201__ at ___:___hrs. .
COMMENTS / OUTSTANDING: -
H.A.C QC
SCATEC SOLAR
Owner
H.A.Construction ( H.A.C )
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018
Main Site: Yehia Zakaria St., Industrial Zone-Behind Sheraton Date of Last Recertification Audit:
Heliopolis Buildings Cairo-Egypt 13:16 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
ISO 9001:2015 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
5 June 2021
The management system is applicable to:
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-B
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:
H.A.Construction
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018
Division
Certification Cycle Start Date:
05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
No.19, A6 Industrial Zone-10th of Ramadan City, Egypt
05 July 2018
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: Certificate Expiry Date:
5 June 2021
ISO 9001:2015
The management system is applicable to:
Production of various concrete masonry products, curb stones,
interlocks and pre-cast manholes
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-A
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:
H.A.Construction Steel
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018
Division
Date of Last Recertification Audit:
15 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
K.28 Alex-Cairo Desert Road, Alexandria-Egypt 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
ISO 9001:2015 5 June 2021
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
Certificate Number:
16046-01-C
This is to certify that the management system of:
Original Certificate Issue Date:
H.A.Construction Wood
27 June 2006
Last Certificate Expiry Date:
05 June 2018
Products Division
Date of Last Recertification Audit:
15 May 2018
Certification Cycle Start Date:
Block 21, 35, 36 CPC Industrial Park-6th of October City, Giza, Egypt 05 July 2018
Certificate Issue Date:
has been registered by Intertek as conforming to the requirements of: 05 July 2018
Certificate Expiry Date:
ISO 9001:2015 5 June 2021
Manufacturing and erection for all wooden works & fire rated doors.
Calin Moldovean
President, Business Assurance
In the issuance of this certificate, Intertek assumes no liability to any party other than to the Client, and then only in accordance with the agreed upon Certification
Agreement. This certificate’s validity is subject to the organisation maintaining their system in accordance with Intertek’s requirements for systems certification.
Validity may be confirmed via email at certificate.validation@intertek.com or by scanning the code to the right with a smartphone. The certificate remains the
property of Intertek, to whom it must be returned upon request.
_____________________________________________________________________ __________________
_
Page 44 of 44
Proposed Organization Chart
Project Manager
Q.A / Q.C
HSE Supervisors Security Officer
Inspectors
Guards
Cost Control
Store-Keeper Foreman
Engineer
Survey Labour
SUMMARY OF KEY EXPERTS
Language
Years
Specialist Experience in and degree
Proposed of A Educational
Name of Expert areas of beneficiary of
position exper ge background
knowledge country fluency(VG,
ience
G, W)
Gamal Hassan Project 39 64 Please refer to the attached CV
Manager
Mohamed Salah Construction 30 52 Please refer to the attached CV
Manager
Mahamed Nada Technical 20 42 Please refer to the attached CV
Office
Manager
Mohamed QA/QC 18 41 Please refer to the attached CV
Waleed Manager
Abd‐ElHamid HSE 21 40 Please refer to the attached CV
ElShazly Manager
Project Manager
1. Client satisfaction, budget control, profitability, contract compliance, problem resolution and
project personnel management
2. Organize, execute and coordinate work of the field project team
3. Responsible for the technical quality, accuracy, and standards adherence of engineering and
design drafting for the project, by working with the engineering and technical groups
ensuring work outputs comply with standards and meets contract requirements
4. Must be able to work professionally with clients, vendors, employees, managers and
supervisors
5. Produce weekly reports to HAC management on site progress & monthly reports to Client
6. Chair monthly Client progress meeting
7. Produce and revise construction schedules.
8. Monitor and document site progress
9. Write site specific subcontract scopes of work for all elements of the works
10. Complete monthly valuations for subcontractors. Complete monthly pay application to Client
11. Work with project civil and electrical engineers (HAC in-house or 3rd party) to ensure required
drawings and information are available ahead of construction and to resolve technical issues
during construction
12. Review of drawings to ensure completeness and constructability
13. Chair daily Plan Of the Day meeting with all subcontractors and Client Representatives
14. Chair weekly site safety meetings with subcontractor managers & Conduct weekly site safety
inspection
15. Develop site specific quality control documentation (with site QA/QC supervisor) &
environmental documentation (with site environmental supervisor)
16. Accomplish any other job-related duties/functions requested by the supervisor
Construction Manager
Specific duties:
Quality Manager
1. Manages site quality program; includes holding safety meetings, carrying out accident
investigations, and ensuring contractor compliance with company, customer, and government
safety guidelines
2. Creates a site-specific quality program including a manual to be used by all employees,
contractors, and subcontractors on the company's project site.
3. Develops Site Specific Quality/Testing Plans based on contract/customer requirements and
company standards
4. Trains company personnel/subcontractors on quality standards and documentation
5. Travel to projects and perform construction in-progress quality inspections at intervals
determined by the Safety & Quality Department in coordination with the project team
6. Performs periodic remote pictorial inspections of submitted construction progress photos
7. Travels to projects to perform a final quality inspections
8. Submits quality inspection and audit reports for review and approval, recordkeeping, and
distribution to the project team
9. Follows up on completion of Quality Issue Corrective Actions
10. Supports with overall Quality program improvements through lessons learned
Technical Office Manager
1. Will be in charge of all technical aspects of solar project for projects directly managed by the
company
2. Will represent, on behalf of the entity, for technical issues with third parties in the co-
development.
3. Duties will include the following within each SPV :
3.1. Ensuring the SPV respects all of the technical aspects of the contractual obligations
negotiated under his responsibility towards all third parties:
3.1.1. The Power Purchase Agreement signed with NBET;
3.1.2. The Transmission obligation according to agreements signed with TCN;
3.1.3. The Generation License Agreement obtained from NERC;
4. Ensuring the SPV meets all contractual obligations with regards to the EPC and O&M
contractor;
5. Ensuring that the plant operating and maintenance standards are up to standard, including
HSSE and Quality policies
6. Fulfilling all SPV reporting obligations on technical aspects of the Project as stipulated by the
Power Purchase Agreement, in the form of construction and operation reports or otherwise,
including but not limited to:
Project Manager
Page 1 of 5
2011 – 2012 Project Manager
Page 2 of 5
2003 – 2006 Construction Manager & Deputy Project Manager
Page 3 of 5
1991 - 1992 Project Manager
Page 4 of 5
1984 - 1985 Allam - Jarvis
Section Engineer
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
Page 5 of 5
Mohamed Salah El-Din Hanafy
Construction Manager
Professional
Experience
Jun. 2012 till Present Hassan Allam Construction
Construction Manager
Page 2 of 3
Mar. 1999 – May 2001 Superintendent
Site engineer
Site engineer
Page 3 of 3
Mohamed Elsayed Mohamed Nada
Technical Office Manager
Page 1 of 3
Jan. 2011 - 2013 Technical Office Manager
Page 2 of 3
Oct. 1997 – Oct. 1998 Futuristic Consultant Office
Page 3 of 3
Mohamed Waleed
QA/QC Manager
Languages English
Arabic
Courses OSHA - MIRDIF Security and safety Consultant
ISO 9001/2008- internal quality management auditor - Kaizen
Egypt
Establishing of QMS in accordance with ISO 9001/2008 -
Kaizen Egypt
Primavera project planner - PROMASTER
Professional
Experience
Mar. 2011 to present Hassan Allam Construction
Page 1 of 5
manager.
Maintain the record of the inspections of the incoming materials
and to reject the defective materials.
Managing non conformities process.
Expedite close out of the punch list items during the periodical
meeting with the construction team.
2007 - 2011 Orascom Construction Industries
Page 2 of 5
2006 - 2007 El Gabry general contracting Co.
Page 5 of 5
Abd-ElHamid Mohamed ElShazly
HSE Manager
Page 1 of 5
Professional
Experience
Apr. 2012 till Present Hassan Allam Construction (HAC) / DSI JV
HSE Site Manager
HSE Supervisor
Page 2 of 5
Prepare the fire evacuation emergency and medical.
Develop, review and upgrade Plant safety plans.
HSE coordinator
Responsibilities:
Participating subcontractors spreading the PTW system Culture in
Saqqara project,
Participate implementation of PTW system on site with
Monitoring Toolbox meetings,
Perform audits on construction permit to work systems
Providing training package for all staff and subcontractors,
Review construction risk assessments,
Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks,
Page 3 of 5
Coordinate HSSE meetings with all subcontractors.
Review all lifting plans of all lifting activities on Power Block
area.
Liaise with Construction Subcontractor Conduct training in
specific construction requirements
Monitor Toolbox meetings
Perform audits on construction activities. Review construction risk
assessments
Participate in emergency response drills and exercises
Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks.
Mar. 2005 – Jun. 2009 SIEMENS
Project: Sidi krir power project: substation (500K V) CP-104 & ELATF
power station project
Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Responsibilities:
Review construction risk assessments,
Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks,
Coordinate HSSE meetings with all subcontractors.
Review all lifting plans of all lifting activities on Power Block
area.
Liaise with Construction Subcontractor Conduct training in
specific construction requirements
Monitor Toolbox meetings
Perform audits on construction activities. Review construction risk
assessments
Participate in emergency response drills and exercises
Advise field Supervision in aspects of HSE relevant to their tasks
Make Exiting For Machine Hazard and Permit to Work: Training,
Auditing and Responsibilities
Bring to management’s attention areas of deficiency.
Provide support for development of both active and proactive
HSE key.
Performance indicators to monitor contractor’s activity progress.
To keep The Record of S.H.E Program Training to All Personal
according To the Construction Contract.
To Carry Out The H.S.E Inspections On The Site.
Checking all kind of slings at site before using.
Recognition the Different kind of hazard of work place and its
effect on the worker.
Page 4 of 5
Mar. 2005 – Aug. 2005 INITEC & KAHROMIKA Co.
Project: Nubaria Power Station Project: 1&2 (Cp-117, 118, 105, 106,
104 A)
Engineer: Power Generation Engineering and Services Company
(PGESCO).
Dec. 2003 – Mar. 2005 CONISYS & KAHROMIKA Co.
Safety Supervisor
Safety Supervisor
Safety Supervisor
Safety Supervisor
Page 5 of 5
Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.
Alternative Proxies: